IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi and welcome to Moodle 2
Essential Training for Teachers.
| | 00:08 | I'm Chris Mattia, Educational
Technologist at Art Center College of Design.
| | 00:12 | The most common use for Moodle by
teachers is to create an online component to
| | 00:16 | your existing,
traditional classroom-based class.
| | 00:19 | We'll begin by going step by step
through everything you need to know to install
| | 00:25 | and configure your own Moodle test server.
| | 00:28 | I'll show you all the essential
skills you'll need to have, such as posting
| | 00:32 | documents and information to your
students, setting up your Gradebook, and
| | 00:36 | creating your first online assignment.
| | 00:38 | We'll also learn about
Moodle's new built-in HTML Editor.
| | 00:43 | I'll show you features that will make
communicating with your students easier,
| | 00:47 | like forums that facilitate
conversations beyond the walls of your classroom.
| | 00:52 | I'll show you how to configure and use
the new Moodle 2 repositories to pull
| | 00:56 | files out of the cloud and into your course.
| | 01:00 | I'll even teach you how to develop a
multimedia exam to assess your students'
| | 01:04 | comprehension of learning outcomes.
| | 01:06 | There is a lot more to Moodle that can
save you time and enhance your students'
| | 01:11 | learning experience, so let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Course overview| 00:00 | Before we get into building our course
I want to give you a quick tour of
| | 00:04 | the finished course that we are going to
be building throughout this training series.
| | 00:08 | We are going to put together a
complete online course for your students.
| | 00:13 | The course is going to be
about coral reef ecology.
| | 00:15 | We will start off by posting a bunch of
documents and information for your students.
| | 00:20 | T is going to be your knowledge base.
| | 00:22 | You will be able to post documents like
your syllabi, lecture slides, and various
| | 00:27 | different reading assignments for your students.
| | 00:28 | I will also show you how to post
images and even interactivity into your main
| | 00:33 | page, such as interactive maps that
your students will be able to drag around
| | 00:37 | and explore more information on.
| | 00:39 | We will set up places for you to post
required readings and links to outside web sites.
| | 00:44 | Then I am going to show you how to build
community and collaboration within your
| | 00:47 | course by setting up
discussion forums and a class wiki.
| | 00:51 | This will help get your students to
interact with each other, both in the
| | 00:55 | classroom and outside the classroom.
| | 00:57 | We will show you how to set up
assignments, so that you can have your students
| | 01:01 | hand in work electronically,
| | 01:03 | so don't have to carry home
those bags of papers to grade.
| | 01:06 | They will all be delivered
electronically directly to your computer.
| | 01:10 | Finally, we'll go ahead and we'll
show you how to set up some online exams,
| | 01:14 | so you can perform assessments
directly inside of your course.
| | 01:17 | There are a whole lot of tools that
Moodle has available to help you build your
| | 01:22 | course, manage your grades, and manage
all the activities of your students.
| | 01:27 | This was just a quick overview so that you
have an idea as to where we are trying to get to.
| | 01:32 | Let's get started building our course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you're a Premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library or if you're
| | 00:05 | watching this tutorial on a DVD-ROM, you
have access to the exercise files used
| | 00:10 | throughout this training.
| | 00:11 | You should go ahead and copy those
exercise files to your desktop.
| | 00:15 | The files are arranged with one
folder per each chapter of the title.
| | 00:19 | When you go into a particular folder
you'll find all the different assets that
| | 00:22 | I'm going to be using to build the
course throughout this training title.
| | 00:27 | If you're a Monthly member or an
Annual member of lynda.com you don't have
| | 00:31 | access to the exercise files, but you can
follow along from scratch with your own assets.
| | 00:36 | Let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Setting Up a Test EnvironmentWhat you need to get started| 00:00 | To get started using Moodle,
you're going to need a couple of things.
| | 00:03 | First of all, you're going to need a
web browser, and you're going to need an
| | 00:07 | Apache web server, you're going to need a
MySQL database, and a current copy of Moodle.
| | 00:12 | Now that may sound like a lot
stuff, but it's really pretty easy.
| | 00:16 | The first one to tackle though is your
web browser, and for this I would really
| | 00:19 | suggest using Firefox.
| | 00:21 | There are a variety of different
browsers out there. The open standards browsers
| | 00:25 | such as Firefox, Safari, and Chrome
all work quite well within Moodle.
| | 00:31 | Internet Explorer, on the other hand,
your experience may vary, depending on what
| | 00:36 | you click on, which version of
Internet Explorer that you have.
| | 00:40 | So for the purposes of this training
video I really suggest you have a copy of
| | 00:44 | Firefox and if you don't have a copy of
it, you can simply go to www.firefox.com
| | 00:49 | and download a current copy
and install it on your machine.
| | 00:52 | The next thing you're going to need is
you're going to need all of those servers
| | 00:56 | and everything else,
and that's quite easy as well.
| | 00:59 | All you need to do is go to moodle.org in
your browser, and this'll take you to the
| | 01:05 | Moodle project homepage, and this is
where all the information about Moodle is.
| | 01:08 | You'll find forums.
| | 01:09 | You'll find all of the help documents.
| | 01:12 | You'll find everything you need to
know about Moodle within this site.
| | 01:15 | So in order to get your copy of Moodle,
you can come on down here to the lower
| | 01:19 | right-hand corner and
there is a link to Downloads.
| | 01:22 | Go ahead and can click on that link
and this is where all of the Moodle
| | 01:26 | distribution packages are located.
| | 01:28 | This page is split up so that the top
part has all of the standard Moodle packages.
| | 01:33 | Now this is primarily used for
servers that are going to be running as your
| | 01:37 | institutional Moodle installations.
| | 01:40 | We're not going to be using the
standard Moodle install packages.
| | 01:43 | If you scroll down a little bit further,
you'll see that there are Moodle install
| | 01:47 | packages for Mac OS X and for Windows.
| | 01:49 | So in the next couple of movies we'll
step through the individual installations
| | 01:54 | and setup for both Windows and Mac OS X.
| | 01:58 | If we scroll down a little bit further
on this page, you'll notes that there are
| | 02:00 | few other options here on the Download section.
| | 02:03 | There's the Modules and plugins section
and these are extensions that have been
| | 02:07 | written by third-party developers or
members of the Moodle community and they've
| | 02:11 | made these plug-ins and
modules available to you.
| | 02:15 | There are some really great tools in here.
| | 02:16 | I suggest you go in and spend some
time looking around at all of the various
| | 02:19 | different pools that are really available to
you that the Moodle community has produced.
| | 02:23 | The next section here is Themes.
| | 02:25 | Now themes are the user interface, or
the skins of Moodle, that make Moodle look
| | 02:30 | various different ways.
| | 02:31 | There are a variety of different themes
that have been included with all of the
| | 02:35 | standard Moodle packages that we're
going to install, and we'll even explore a
| | 02:39 | few of those themes in a later movie and show
you how you can do a little bit of customization.
| | 02:44 | But more than likely at your
institution your institution will have created or
| | 02:49 | designed or adopted their
own theme to be able to use.
| | 02:52 | So we're going to use one
standard theme for this training to keep
| | 02:55 | everybody together.
| | 02:57 | The final section down here are the
Language packs, and if you need to have
| | 03:00 | Moodle support a particular language,
you may want to come in here and check out
| | 03:04 | and see if a language pack is
available for your target language.
| | 03:07 | I'm going to go ahead and scroll
back up here, so we can see our two
| | 03:10 | distributions: Mac OS X and Windows.
| | 03:13 | I did mention that there were two
other things that you're going to need.
| | 03:16 | You're going to need an Apache web server
and you're going to need a MySQL database.
| | 03:21 | Well, the folks at Moodle have done a
fantastic job of creating these install
| | 03:25 | packages, the one for Mac OS X and the
one for Windows, because they've included
| | 03:29 | a full Apache web server and a full
MySQL database, and they have most of the
| | 03:34 | configuration already done and set up.
| | 03:36 | So installation is very easy.
Everything you need is going to be within just
| | 03:40 | a couple of clicks.
| | 03:41 | Now there is one other option for
you if you don't want to go through the
| | 03:45 | process of installing your own Moodle
installation, if you are at an institution
| | 03:49 | that already has Moodle running
as your learning management system.
| | 03:53 | You can contact your IT department and
simply ask them to set up a test course
| | 03:57 | for you and go ahead and use that test course.
| | 04:00 | Now more than likely your interface is
going to look different than what it is
| | 04:04 | that I'm showing you in the training
videos simply because your institution
| | 04:08 | probably has their own custom theme,
but you will be able to follow along
| | 04:11 | provided they're running the
current version of Moodle 2.1 or later.
| | 04:15 | In the next two movies, I'm going to show
you how to install and configure Moodle
| | 04:19 | for Mac OS X and then in the following
two movies will be for Windows, and then
| | 04:23 | we'll all meet back together
and continue our configuration.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing Moodle on a Mac| 00:00 | Here we are in our Firefox browser,
and we are on moodle.org/downloads, and
| | 00:06 | we're going to go ahead and
install Moodle on Mac OS X in this movie.
| | 00:11 | If you're looking for how to install
Moodle on Windows, go and check a later
| | 00:15 | movie in this chapter.
| | 00:16 | But in this movie, we're going to show
you how to install Moodle for Mac OS X.
| | 00:20 | So simply scroll down on the page a
little bit and look for this Moodle Mac OS
| | 00:23 | X as a link right here.
Go ahead and click on that.
| | 00:27 | On this page, the first thing you
want to check is make sure that the
| | 00:31 | distributions that are available to
you are one that's going to work on your
| | 00:35 | operating system, and you can
see that right here in this line.
| | 00:39 | That may be in a slightly different spot, as
this page kind of changes around a little bit.
| | 00:42 | But you're generally looking for this
information, that all distributed packages
| | 00:46 | work with the following versions of Mac OS X.
| | 00:48 | Now, if you're not sure which version
of Mac OS X you have, simply come on up
| | 00:53 | here to the Apple menu and click About
This Mac, and you can see right there,
| | 00:56 | version 10.6. Excellent!
| | 01:00 | The next thing I am going to do is
figure out which distribution you want.
| | 01:02 | So we'll scroll on down on the page,
and here you see all of the Mac OS X distributions.
| | 01:09 | They are listed out on the left-hand
column as to which version they are, so as
| | 01:14 | part of the recording of this video
we're going to be using Moodle 2.1, which at
| | 01:18 | the current time is the current stable version.
| | 01:21 | You can tell it's the stable version
because it has the word Stable right here.
| | 01:25 | You'll also see in the list 2.0, which
is the previous version, 1.9, which is a
| | 01:31 | very common version, and if you're
working at an institution that has the
| | 01:35 | version of 1.9, there is another
title of lynda.com that can help walk you
| | 01:40 | through how to use this version of Moodle.
| | 01:43 | The one down here at the bottom, Moodle
2.2 Dev, or whichever version that has
| | 01:47 | the Dev designation,
| | 01:49 | this is one that you probably want
to stay away from unless you are a
| | 01:53 | developer working on Moodle. So this is
essentially the beta build of the next version of Moodle.
| | 02:00 | If you want to have a sneak peek to see
what's coming out or what the developers
| | 02:03 | are all working on, you can go ahead and
check in on this, but for this training
| | 02:07 | title we're going to use the 2.1 Stable version.
| | 02:11 | And in the right-hand column
you can see there are two options.
| | 02:14 | There is an XAMPP or X-A-M-P-P and an MAMP.
| | 02:19 | This just refers to what are the
underlying packages that have been used in
| | 02:23 | order to build and
distribute these versions of Moodle.
| | 02:27 | They're essentially the same thing,
but if you notice, just underneath of the
| | 02:32 | download link, you can see that one of
them is 143.2 megabytes and the other
| | 02:38 | one is 192 megabytes.
| | 02:41 | So we're going to go ahead and use
the smaller one, which is the X-A-M-P-P.
| | 02:47 | So if you want to follow along, go
ahead and download the X-A-M-P-P version.
| | 02:51 | Now your browser should begin to
download this file, and just go ahead and make
| | 02:55 | sure you click the button that
says Save File and then click OK.
| | 02:58 | If that window didn't pop up, it may
simply mean that you've previously told
| | 03:03 | your web browser to always
save any file that you download.
| | 03:06 | Okay, once the download completes, it
should now be in your Downloads folder, and
| | 03:11 | we can simply access that
through this Downloads window by simply
| | 03:15 | double-clicking on the name of the file
and you'll notice that we get a little
| | 03:18 | opening Moodle DMG file,
that's a Disk Image File.
| | 03:23 | So that's going to be opening up in
the background, and we can go ahead now
| | 03:26 | and close our Downloads window,
and for now we can go ahead and close our
| | 03:29 | browser window as well.
| | 03:31 | Now, we have our Disk Image File right here.
| | 03:34 | Now, installing Moodle on
the Mac couldn't be easier.
| | 03:37 | All you need to do is take this XAMPP
folder and drag it and drop it onto the
| | 03:42 | Applications folder right here.
| | 03:43 | So we'll just go ahead and do that,
drop it in, and now we see that Moodle is
| | 03:48 | copying over into our Applications folder.
| | 03:51 | That's really all there is
to really installing Moodle.
| | 03:54 | Now, we have to do a little bit of
configuration and setup as soon as the copy finishes.
| | 03:59 | The copy is done, so let's go ahead and
close our DMG file, and we will just go
| | 04:03 | down here to our Dock and click on our
Finder to bring up a new Finder window.
| | 04:07 | And in the left-hand column under
Places I am just going to go ahead and click
| | 04:10 | on Applications to jump
quickly to my Applications folder.
| | 04:14 | You can also go to the Go
menu and select Applications.
| | 04:17 | We're going to scroll all the way down
here to the bottom, where you'll find the
| | 04:21 | X-A-M-P-P or the XAMPP folder.
| | 04:23 | Go ahead and click one time on that, and you
will see a whole of different files in here.
| | 04:27 | The first thing we want to do is find
this file that says FixRightsForMoodle.sh.
| | 04:33 | Simply double-click that file.
| | 04:35 | Now this is a shell script that's
going to go in, and it's going to repair
| | 04:38 | some file permissions that need to be
set up in order to make Moodle work.
| | 04:42 | Now, it is going to warn us that this
is a script and it's an application.
| | 04:46 | We're opening it for the first time, we
downloaded it, are we sure we want to do this?
| | 04:49 | Go ahead and hit Open, and you'll notice that a
Terminal window has popped up in the background.
| | 04:55 | Don't worry, we're not going to get
too crazy with the Terminal window here.
| | 04:58 | All we have to do is it's
prompting us for our password.
| | 05:00 | Now this is the password that you
use to log in to your Mac. It's the
| | 05:03 | administrator password for your machine, if you
have administrative privileges on your machine.
| | 05:08 | So I'll go ahead and type mine in here,
and you'll notice that as I'm typing,
| | 05:12 | I'm not getting any feedback on screen
that anything whatsoever is happening.
| | 05:16 | The cursor is not blinking.
| | 05:17 | It's not showing me little stars or anything.
| | 05:19 | It just asks me for the password.
| | 05:21 | I type it in and simply
hit Return on my keyboard.
| | 05:24 | After a few seconds, you'll see that it
tells us "logout," and then "Process completed."
| | 05:29 | Now, that's exactly what we're looking for.
| | 05:31 | That's all we need to know;
nothing else has to be done.
| | 05:34 | We'll simply close that Terminal window.
| | 05:37 | Every time you go to use Moodle
you're going to need to start up that Apache
| | 05:41 | server, and you're going to
need to start up the MySQL server.
| | 05:44 | The XAMPP project has this nice little
control panel that has been created for
| | 05:48 | you to be able to do that and make that easier.
| | 05:51 | So to make our life a little bit easier,
I am simply going to grab that XAMPP
| | 05:54 | file and I am going to drag it down
here to my Dock, and I like to put it
| | 05:58 | right here next to my Firefox Web
browser so I can get at it very easily,
| | 06:02 | and the final thing that I am going
to want to do is I am going to add this
| | 06:05 | Link to Moodle 2.1.
| | 06:07 | Now this is a web shortcut that's
going to take us directly to our Moodle
| | 06:11 | installation once it's up and running.
| | 06:12 | So I am going to grab that.
| | 06:14 | I'm going to drag that down here.
| | 06:15 | I am going to put it on the right-hand
side of this little vertical bar and
| | 06:18 | just drop it right there in place.
| | 06:20 | So now I'll be able to very quickly
get right to my Moodle installation.
| | 06:24 | I want to point out one other thing
while we're here in the XAMPP folder
| | 06:30 | before we go in and make any additional
changes or updates, and that is this htdocs folder.
| | 06:37 | We're going to use this in a little while.
| | 06:39 | This is actually where Moodle itself
is stored, and all of the build files and
| | 06:45 | everything else are all in here.
| | 06:46 | We're going to be dropping a file
into this location in a future movie.
| | 06:50 | But I just wanted to be able to point
it out to you, so when I mention the
| | 06:53 | htdocs folder or the root folder of your
installation, I want you to know where that is.
| | 06:59 | So I will go ahead and close this window now.
| | 07:01 | Let's go ahead and start up our Apache
web server, so we'll simply click on the
| | 07:05 | XAMPP control from our Dock and it's
telling us this is an application from the
| | 07:09 | Internet. Are we sure we want to do this?
| | 07:10 | Yes, save, I will hit Open.
| | 07:12 | When XAMPP starts up, it gives us
simply three buttons, and it tells us
| | 07:18 | Apache, MySQL, and FTP.
| | 07:20 | Now, I didn't mention FTP, that we need
to have it running, but we're going to go
| | 07:24 | ahead and start it so that it's there,
just in case there's something in the
| | 07:27 | background that requires it.
| | 07:28 | So we'll simply click the Start button
for Apache and we get a little prompt
| | 07:32 | here asking us to authorize this.
| | 07:34 | So this is again our administrator
password on our machine. Bo ahead and click
| | 07:38 | OK, and there we go.
| | 07:40 | We've got a little green light
telling us that Apache started properly.
| | 07:43 | We'll go ahead and click on the Start
button for MySQL, and MySQL is now running,
| | 07:47 | and we'll go ahead and start
up FTP just for good measure.
| | 07:50 | So all three have green lights.
| | 07:52 | They are all running now, and all I am
going to do is just minimize this window,
| | 07:55 | click the little yellow ball,
and drop it down to my Dock.
| | 07:58 | Now, I will come on back down to my
Dock and I will go ahead and click on the
| | 08:01 | Link to Moodle, and there we go!
| | 08:05 | Moodle has opened up, and it is
up and running within our browser.
| | 08:10 | Now let's go ahead and finish up this
installation with making sure that we're
| | 08:14 | able to log in. The Moodle Install for
the Mac already has an administrator
| | 08:19 | account set up, and I wouldn't suggest
using this password if this were a Moodle
| | 08:24 | installation that was going to be
being used out in a production environment
| | 08:28 | connected out to the Internet.
| | 08:29 | But this is just a local environment
that we're going to be using to be able
| | 08:33 | to play around with Moodle and learn how to
use it for training purposes during this video,
| | 08:38 | So this is a fine password to use.
| | 08:40 | So we'll simply come out over here to
the right-hand side under the Login box
| | 08:44 | and in Password we were just going to
go ahead and type 12345 and click the
| | 08:48 | Login button, and there we go. We've logged in.
| | 08:52 | Now, we don't see a whole lot on
screen that's changed to really let us know
| | 08:55 | that we've logged in, other than that
the Login window is gone, but if we scroll
| | 08:59 | all the way to the bottom of the
screen and look in the lower-left,
| | 09:01 | you'll see "You are logged in as admin." Perfect!
| | 09:05 | That's exactly what we want.
| | 09:07 | It's exactly where we want to be at this point.
| | 09:08 | So go ahead and scroll back up to the
top, and in the next movie we're going to
| | 09:12 | do a little bit of setup and cleanup
of the Moodle interface so that everyone
| | 09:16 | following along is going to have the
same look that I am going to have that I am
| | 09:20 | going to use throughout this training series.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Moodle for the Mac| 00:00 | Moodle is now completely configured on your Mac.
| | 00:03 | Throughout this training series though,
I am going to be using a different theme
| | 00:06 | and a slightly different layout of information.
| | 00:09 | If you'd like to follow along with me on
screen, go ahead and follow these steps
| | 00:13 | in order to get your Moodle
installation to look exactly like the one that I am
| | 00:17 | going to using throughout the series.
| | 00:19 | Go ahead and scroll down on the left-
hand column and look for the link for
| | 00:23 | Site administration.
| | 00:25 | Click on that link and then scroll down
again until you find a link for Appearance.
| | 00:29 | Click on Appearance and then click on Themes.
| | 00:32 | The second item under
Themes is called Theme selector.
| | 00:35 | Go ahead and click on that, and now
the new Theme selector has shown up.
| | 00:39 | You're looking for the Device type of
default, which is the primary view of
| | 00:44 | Moodle--what you're going to
see inside of your browser.
| | 00:47 | Come on over to the right-hand
column and click on Select theme.
| | 00:51 | The theme that we are going to be using for
this training series is called the Formal white.
| | 00:54 | So go ahead and scroll on down.
| | 00:56 | We are going to scroll past a few
these themes and there it is, Formal white.
| | 01:00 | Go ahead and click the button for Use theme.
| | 01:03 | Now we will come back to this screen
in a later movie and explore some of the
| | 01:06 | other themes, but for right now go
ahead and set up the Formal White theme.
| | 01:11 | You can see that the new theme has
been saved, and there is some information
| | 01:14 | about this theme that you're able to
read and then go ahead, and click on
| | 01:17 | the Continue button.
| | 01:19 | Let's go ahead and click on the Home
link in the upper left-hand corner, and now
| | 01:24 | let's do a little bit more cleanup.
| | 01:26 | Go ahead and scroll down just a
little bit in your window and look for the
| | 01:30 | Settings section on the
left-hand side and click Turn editing on.
| | 01:35 | We can clear out a few of the extra
items that are here on the screen.
| | 01:38 | Let's get rid of this upper
left-hand block that has Moodle4Mac.
| | 01:42 | So just simply click the X next to that,
and that goes away, and then scroll down
| | 01:47 | again, back down here to the Settings
section and click on Edit settings, and now
| | 01:52 | we are going to go ahead and customize the site.
| | 01:54 | For the Site full name we are going to
use a Site full name of Yondo University.
| | 02:00 | You can use whatever site name that
you would like, but if you want to follow
| | 02:04 | along with me, go ahead and type in
Yondo University and then for the Short
| | 02:08 | name I am going to type in YondoU.
| | 02:11 | Next, under the Front page description,
I am going to go ahead and select all of
| | 02:16 | the information that's inside of that
box and go ahead and hit Delete and simply
| | 02:20 | type in "Welcome to Yondo University."
| | 02:27 | Then we are going to scroll on down a
little bit to these settings here for
| | 02:30 | Front page and click on the first
dropdown menu that currently says None and
| | 02:35 | select List of courses.
| | 02:37 | This way before you log in to your
Moodle install you'll see the list of all of
| | 02:41 | the courses that are available to you.
| | 02:44 | The next section here says
Front page items when logged in.
| | 02:48 | So once you've logged in, you still
want to see that same list of courses.
| | 02:51 | So we will take the first dropdown
menu and again select List of courses.
| | 02:55 | That's all the setting changes
we need to make on this page.
| | 02:58 | So, scroll all the way down to the very
bottom of the page and click the Save changes link.
| | 03:04 | At the top you should see a little
listing that says Changes saved, listed in green.
| | 03:09 | Okay, go ahead and click back on the Home page.
| | 03:11 | We just have a few more items to fix.
| | 03:13 | The next thing we want clean up is this
big middle section here, and while there
| | 03:17 | is a very nice graphic, it's kind of
getting in the way a little bit, and we can
| | 03:21 | also probably remember that our Admin
name is admin and our password is 12345.
| | 03:25 | So we will go ahead and scroll down
just a little bit until just to the bottom
| | 03:30 | of the image and the on the left-hand
side, you'll see a little hand with a
| | 03:33 | pencil icon that says "Edit
summary" if you hover over it.
| | 03:36 | So go ahead and click on that,
and this is how you go in and edit some
| | 03:39 | information here in Moodle.
| | 03:41 | We will and simply just click and
drag to select that whole text and image
| | 03:45 | inside of the HTML Editor here and then
just hit the Delete key on your keyboard
| | 03:50 | to get rid of all of that.
| | 03:51 | And if you want to, you can just hit
Delete a few times to make sure that all
| | 03:54 | the content has been cleared out of there.
| | 03:57 | Then go ahead and hit the Save changes button
and our site refreshes back to look like this.
| | 04:02 | There is one more thing we want to do.
| | 04:03 | We want to add another block to our course.
| | 04:06 | So we are going to scroll down just a
little bit and over here on the right-hand
| | 04:09 | side, down at the bottom, you'll
see a link that says Add a block.
| | 04:13 | Go ahead and click that dropdown menu,
and the block that we want to add is this
| | 04:17 | one here that says Main menu.
| | 04:19 | Go ahead and click on the Main menu block.
| | 04:22 | If we scroll back down a little bit
more, you'll see there is the Main menu
| | 04:26 | block that has been added.
| | 04:27 | Anytime you add a block, it shows
up just above the Add a block tool.
| | 04:32 | Then there is a little Move tool
| | 04:34 | that's got a little up-and-down arrow.
| | 04:36 | Go ahead and click on that one time.
| | 04:38 | Now we get little dotted lines all over
the place where we can move that block to.
| | 04:42 | So what we are going to do is come
over here to the upper left-hand corner, to
| | 04:45 | this little section of dotted lines
| | 04:46 | right there. Go ahead and
click inside of that. There we go.
| | 04:49 | We've moved the Main menu.
| | 04:50 | Now this is a tool that we will be able
to use to be able to add content back to
| | 04:54 | this main page later on.
| | 04:56 | That's all we need to do in our setup here.
| | 04:58 | If we go ahead and scroll on down,
and we can click the Turn editing off link in
| | 05:03 | Settings, and there we go.
| | 05:05 | This is the standard install look
that we are going to use throughout
| | 05:09 | this training title.
| | 05:10 | In a later movie, we will go in and
we'll customize this theme some, but
| | 05:14 | for right now, this is the place that you
want to be if you're going to follow along.
| | 05:18 | The next two movies are going to
be installing Moodle on Windows.
| | 05:22 | So since you've already got this up
and running, unless you're going to be
| | 05:25 | installed this on Windows, go ahead
and skip those two movies, and I will see
| | 05:27 | you in the next one.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing Moodle on a Windows computer| 00:00 | Now, let's go ahead and get Moodle
installed on our Windows machine.
| | 00:04 | In this movie, I am going to show you
how to install Moodle on Windows. And we're
| | 00:09 | in our Firefox browser and we're on
moodle.org/downloads, and what we want to do
| | 00:14 | is we want to look for the Moodle
for Windows link, which is right here.
| | 00:19 | So go ahead and scroll down to that
link if you're not there and click on it.
| | 00:24 | This page tells us a little bit about
the installation. And then if we scroll
| | 00:28 | down a little further, we can see
the Windows Moodle Distributions.
| | 00:31 | As of the time of this recording,
there are three versions available;
| | 00:34 | 2.1, 2.03, and 1.9.
| | 00:36 | We'll start down here at the
bottom talking about these.
| | 00:40 | 1.9 is the previous major version
of Moodle, and this is the one that's
| | 00:44 | installed at a lot of different
institutions still that have not upgraded to
| | 00:49 | the Moodle 2 platform yet.
| | 00:51 | If you find out that your institution
is still using Moodle 1.9 then you may
| | 00:55 | want to go ahead and watch the Moodle
1.9 Essential Training that's on lynda.com
| | 01:01 | to follow along with that
version, rather than this series.
| | 01:05 | The next one up here is Moodle 2.0.
| | 01:07 | Moodle 2.0 was the first major release
of Moodle 2, and they did a major rewrite
| | 01:13 | of the entire underlying structure of Moodle.
| | 01:16 | It was a big release.
| | 01:17 | And they have since released Moodle 2.1,
which is the current stable version, and
| | 01:22 | so that's the one we're going to
be using for this training title.
| | 01:24 | So go ahead, and for the Moodle 2.1, go
ahead and click the Download link, and
| | 01:28 | we'll download the installer.
| | 01:30 | When your browser pops open little
window here asking what you want to do,
| | 01:34 | go ahead and click the Save File button,
and click OK. And the download should
| | 01:38 | only take a few seconds,
depending on the speed of your network.
| | 01:41 | It's about an 89-MB file.
| | 01:44 | Once the download completes, you can
come on up here, and let's just go ahead
| | 01:47 | and right-click on MoodleWindowsInstaller here
and click the link for Open Containing Folder.
| | 01:53 | Once you get down to your Downloads
section, go ahead and just right-click on
| | 01:57 | the Zip file here, and we'll say Extract All.
| | 02:01 | Where we want to put this is, let's go
ahead and browse, and we're going to go to
| | 02:05 | our Desktop, and we're going to make a
new folder up on our desktop, and we're
| | 02:10 | just going to call this Moodle
and go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:14 | It's going to point the
file right to our desktop.
| | 02:17 | You can choose another location if you'd like.
| | 02:19 | This will just be convenient for us
to be able to access these files while
| | 02:22 | we're doing the training.
Go ahead and click the Extract button.
| | 02:26 | Now that the file is finished
unzipping, we should be taken directly to our
| | 02:30 | desktop into the Moodle folder,
and you will find four folders there:
| | 02:33 | you'll find the server folder, a
README file, Start Moodle, and Stop Moodle.
| | 02:38 | Before we go ahead and start the
installation process, I'd like to go in and
| | 02:43 | make a slight change to one of the
server configuration files, to make our life a
| | 02:48 | little bit easier throughout the installation.
| | 02:51 | One of the limitations of this
installation, as of the recording of this video, is
| | 02:56 | that the PHP installation, which is the
programming language that much of Moodle
| | 03:00 | is running on, has a limitation of
only 8 megabytes per file to be able to
| | 03:07 | upload, and we want to
change that to a larger value.
| | 03:09 | So, simply double-click on the server
folder and come on down until you find the
| | 03:13 | php folder, and let's go inside of
the php folder, and then we're going to
| | 03:17 | scroll down through our list of files,
and we're looking for this grouping that
| | 03:21 | are just listed as php,
and the one that we want is php.ini.
| | 03:27 | It's the third one down that has
little page and the gear icon and the Type
| | 03:32 | section that says Configuration settings.
| | 03:34 | Go ahead and double-click on that file,
and it should open up in your Notepad,
| | 03:39 | and let's go ahead and search.
| | 03:41 | We're going to use the Edit function and
Find, and we're going to search for post_max.
| | 03:49 | Go ahead and hit Find and when you
find that line of text right there,
| | 03:54 | post_max_size, we want to change
that value to 128 M, or 128 megs.
| | 04:03 | This is going to be a lot more flexible
for us, and it's a good thing to do this
| | 04:06 | now before we go ahead and
get the server installed.
| | 04:09 | The other parameter that we just want
to double-check and make sure it's right
| | 04:13 | is the post_max file, and we'll
go ahead and search first down.
| | 04:19 | I can't find it down there,
| | 04:21 | s we will hit the up, and go
ahead and find next. There it is,
| | 04:25 | post_max_size, and that one is already set to
128 in this distribution. So that's perfect.
| | 04:33 | We can go ahead and close our Find.
| | 04:34 | That's all the changes that
we need to make to this file.
| | 04:36 | So we'll just go to File and Save,
and we'll go ahead and close the php.ini file.
| | 04:42 | Then we'll just use the breadcrumbs up here at
the top to navigate back to our Moodle folder.
| | 04:47 | What we want to do is we're going
to go ahead and start Moodle, so we'll
| | 04:50 | just double-click this Start Moodle.
| | 04:52 | So anytime you want to follow along
with this training title using your local
| | 04:56 | install of Moodle, just
double-click the Start Moodle.
| | 04:59 | The first time we're going to get a
little security warning, warning us that
| | 05:02 | we've downloaded this.
Are we sure we want to run this?
| | 05:04 | Yeah, go ahead and hit Run.
| | 05:06 | Windows there, trying to keep us all
safe, and this Command Prompt window opens
| | 05:11 | up, and it's running some scripts in
the background, and it's resetting a few
| | 05:15 | permissions and setting up a few things.
| | 05:17 | Once this comes up, it says Run
"Stop Moodle.exe:" in order to stop the Moodle server.
| | 05:23 | Normally, we start working with Moodle.
Right now, what I'd like to do is go
| | 05:26 | ahead and minimize this window, and I'd
like to stop Moodle right away, so just
| | 05:29 | go ahead and double-click Stop,
and then we'll hit the Run, and again another
| | 05:34 | little command prompt will start up,
and it will go through the process of
| | 05:38 | shutting Moodle down.
| | 05:39 | Now, all this is doing is it's really
setting up the XAMPP system quite nicely
| | 05:43 | and getting everything configured.
| | 05:44 | We can press any key--
| | 05:45 | I am going to go ahead and
hit the spacebar--to continue.
| | 05:48 | So once Moodle finishes stopping, go
ahead and now just double-click that
| | 05:52 | Start Moodle window again, and again it's
going to ask us to verify the security warning.
| | 05:57 | We'll go ahead and hit Run, and the XAMPP
system will go ahead and start up for us here.
| | 06:03 | Once the screen comes up to this point,
we'll just go ahead and minimize this window.
| | 06:06 | Don't close it; just minimize it there,
so it's just there out of the way.
| | 06:10 | One thing that I want to point out
before we go any further and go and
| | 06:13 | look at the Moodle installation: in a
later movie, we're going to go in and
| | 06:18 | we're going to copy a file into the
Moodle Home directory, and so where I
| | 06:23 | want you to copy that to is inside the server
folder and inside this Moodle folder right here.
| | 06:28 | So you just copy that file out of the
exercise file into there at a later time,
| | 06:32 | so I just want to point that
out real quick. All right!
| | 06:34 | We're going to close that, go ahead
and get rid of this, and in our Firefox
| | 06:40 | browser, we're going to go to http://localhost.
| | 06:49 | If you have a problem getting local
host to come up, you may want to try going
| | 06:54 | to http://127.0.0.1, and sometimes that
works on some installations of Windows
| | 07:03 | when localhost doesn't actually start up.
But in Moodle 2.1 build this should
| | 07:09 | start working now just fine
by just going to localhost.
| | 07:12 | We need to step through the
installation process for Moodle, so we're going to
| | 07:16 | just scroll down a little bit.
| | 07:18 | We're going to hit the Next button
after we select our language--our language
| | 07:21 | there is English--and we're going to
come down here to Confirm paths, and
| | 07:26 | everything should be set
up for us automatically.
| | 07:28 | It should have our web address as localhost,
our Moodle directory should be all set up.
| | 07:32 | We can go ahead and hit the Next button.
| | 07:35 | Next, we're going to come down here
to Database settings, and we can again
| | 07:39 | leave all of this set.
| | 07:41 | The Database password can be left
blank because we're not setting this Moodle
| | 07:45 | server up as a production server.
| | 07:47 | If we were, then you'd want to set
something that was a lot more secure than
| | 07:51 | just blank, but for the purpose of
this training video and to follow along, a
| | 07:55 | blank database password will work just
fine. Go ahead and hit the Next button.
| | 07:59 | Now we have the User
License Agreement, or the ULA.
| | 08:03 | Go ahead and read through that
and go ahead and hit Continue.
| | 08:07 | Now, Moodle is going to do a quick
check on our server setup and make sure that
| | 08:10 | everything is configured properly.
| | 08:12 | So I am gong to scroll down, and I can
look down the right-hand column and see
| | 08:15 | the status of OK, little green lights
all the way down, and we get a nice "Your
| | 08:19 | server environment meets all
minimum requirements." Excellent!
| | 08:22 | Go ahead and hit the Continue button.
| | 08:25 | Now, the installation process is going
to run pretty much without any additional
| | 08:31 | information given to you for a little while.
| | 08:33 | So you may think things
are frozen or is not working.
| | 08:36 | It is actually working fine.
| | 08:38 | You can see in the lower left-hand
corner it says Transferring data from a
| | 08:41 | localhost, and in the upper left, you
see the little green spinning circle thing
| | 08:46 | right there, indicating that
something is going on in the background.
| | 08:49 | So just be patient and soon you'll
start seeing things show up on screen.
| | 08:54 | When it's finished doing all of this,
it'll automatically jump you down to the
| | 08:58 | very bottom of the screen where
there will be a Continue button.
| | 09:03 | When the installation is ready to
move on, you'll notice that the screen
| | 09:06 | refreshes and jumps all the way down
to the bottom and you get this little
| | 09:09 | Continue button, go ahead and click
Continue, and in the next screen, we'll set
| | 09:13 | up our administrator account.
| | 09:15 | The default Username for the admin
account is admin, and it's a great one to use
| | 09:19 | for the purpose of the training video.
| | 09:21 | For the Password, the initial installation
has some pretty restrictive password settings.
| | 09:27 | We're going to go in and we're going
to change these settings at a later time,
| | 09:30 | and we'll reset the password.
| | 09:32 | But for right now, if you want to
follow along with me, I am going to go ahead
| | 09:35 | and use the password Qwerty!1 and to
see what that is, to make sure I typed it
| | 09:46 | right, I am going to check
the little Unmask so we can see.
| | 09:49 | So we're going to set the first name
here to Admin and the Surname to User.
| | 09:54 | That's fine. And for the Email
address we're going to go ahead and set
| | 09:57 | up admin@yondo.edu.
| | 10:01 | I will go ahead and scroll down.
| | 10:03 | Now, I will warn you though: if you
use your own email address here, later on
| | 10:07 | when you create your own user account,
you won't be able to use that same email address.
| | 10:11 | So I like to use just
admin@ and the name server.
| | 10:15 | For City and town, you can
put it whatever you want them.
| | 10:17 | I will go ahead and use Ventura. And for
the Country, I'm in the United States,
| | 10:22 | so I am going to click the Select country.
| | 10:23 | I am going to hit U on my keyboard,
jump down to the U section, and scroll down
| | 10:28 | a little further and there is the United States.
| | 10:29 | I will go ahead and scroll down to
the bottom of the page now and click the
| | 10:34 | Update profile button.
| | 10:35 | Moodle will go ahead and
create that account for us.
| | 10:40 | Now, we'll go ahead and set up
a few more things for our site.
| | 10:41 | Next, we'll enter a full name for our site.
| | 10:45 | For this, we're going to use a Yondo University.
| | 10:48 | Go ahead and type in Yondo University.
| | 10:50 | You can call the site whatever you'd like.
| | 10:52 | I am going to go ahead and give it a
short name of YondoU and for Front page
| | 10:58 | description, I am just going to say
Welcome to Yondo University, and we'll go
| | 11:05 | ahead and scroll down a little bit.
| | 11:07 | We'll leave Self registration
disabled and simply click the Save changes
| | 11:11 | button down at the bottom.
| | 11:13 | Once this comes up, we can see that we
are now logged in as the admin user, and
| | 11:19 | everything looks like it's working now properly.
| | 11:22 | So in the next movie, we're going to go
ahead and we're going to do a few setup
| | 11:26 | and configurations of the Moodle
install so that everything is going to look
| | 11:31 | the same as what I am going to be
showing on screen throughout the rest of this
| | 11:33 | training series.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring Moodle for Windows| 00:00 | Now that we have Moodle up and running
on our Windows machine, the next thing we
| | 00:04 | want to do is make a few tweaks to the
user interface, so that what you see on
| | 00:09 | screen is the same thing that I'm
going to be showing on my screen throughout
| | 00:13 | the rest of the training.
| | 00:14 | So in order to follow along, simply come
on down here to the Site administration
| | 00:18 | link in the lower left-hand corner, go
ahead and click on that, and scroll down
| | 00:22 | until you find Appearance.
| | 00:24 | Go ahead and click on
Appearance and then click on Themes.
| | 00:27 | Then we want the second link
here, which is Theme selector.
| | 00:31 | This is where you go in and you set
up what theme that you want to use.
| | 00:36 | The default setup is the one that we
are looking for, here the Device types
| | 00:39 | is default, and then over in the right-hand side
you want to click the button for Select theme.
| | 00:45 | Now, in a later movie, we'll go ahead
and explore some of these themes in more
| | 00:49 | detail, but for right now let's go
ahead and set up the Formal White theme.
| | 00:52 | So I am going to scroll down until we
find Formal White and then simply click
| | 00:58 | the Use theme button right here.
| | 01:01 | We get a little information about the new theme.
| | 01:03 | We get a preview of it,
and everything is all set up.
| | 01:05 | We'll go ahead and click the Continue button.
| | 01:07 | This takes us to our Notifications page.
| | 01:10 | These things are actually not going to
affect us right now, so we are going to
| | 01:13 | go ahead and click the Home button in
the upper-left corner just underneath of
| | 01:17 | the Moodle logo here, and that
takes us back to our Moodle Home.
| | 01:21 | We want to do a couple of tweaks to the
user interface here on the Moodle Home page.
| | 01:25 | So we are just going to go ahead and
scroll down just a little bit until we get
| | 01:29 | to the Settings section. Then we're
going to click the link for Turn editing on.
| | 01:33 | This turns on the editing functionality
for Moodle, and it gives us a few other
| | 01:38 | things that show up.
| | 01:39 | You will notice that we now have a
Main menu, and this is a set of tools that
| | 01:43 | allow us to add content here to this first page.
| | 01:46 | But we're going to go ahead and
work with a few other blocks. In the
| | 01:48 | upper right-hand corner
| | 01:50 | here is this block right here that
says Welcome to Yondo University.
| | 01:53 | I am going to go ahead and get
rid of that block for right now.
| | 01:55 | We are not going to use that one.
| | 01:56 | So we are going to hit the little x next
to that and that gets rid of that block.
| | 02:00 | Now, we're going to add a block,
and you do that down here in the lower right,
| | 02:03 | where the Add a Block block is. Hit the
dropdown menu here, and the one that we
| | 02:08 | want to add is the Courses block.
| | 02:10 | So go ahead and find Courses in
the pop-up menu and select Courses.
| | 02:15 | After a few seconds, the Courses block
will appear, and now we want to move it in
| | 02:20 | to a location over here on the left-hand side.
| | 02:23 | And to move the block, all you need
to do is hit this little up-and-down
| | 02:27 | move arrow right there, hit that one
time, and after the screen refreshes,
| | 02:32 | you'll notice these little dotted lines that
have started to appear around on your screen.
| | 02:36 | So go ahead and scroll down, and we
want to click inside of the set of dotted
| | 02:40 | lines that are right above the
Settings and just below Navigation.
| | 02:44 | So click one time inside of that section,
and that tells Moodle where you want to
| | 02:48 | put the Courses block.
| | 02:50 | This is a block that will just have a
listing of the courses that are on the system.
| | 02:55 | Now that we've added the Courses block,
let's go ahead and add one more block.
| | 02:58 | If we come back over here to the
right-hand side and click on the dropdown menu
| | 03:01 | for Add under the Add a Block area, go
ahead and select the Online users block.
| | 03:08 | When you select Online users a new
Online users block should appear when the
| | 03:13 | screen refreshes, and you can see
currently that just the Admin User is listed as
| | 03:17 | previously logged in
within the last so many minutes.
| | 03:20 | So in my case I've got it set to
the last five minutes on screen.
| | 03:24 | This way, you can tell who has
been logged in to your system.
| | 03:26 | Next, let's come over here on the
left-hand side and scroll down and click on
| | 03:31 | the Edit settings link
inside of the Settings block.
| | 03:34 | We're going to go ahead and edit the
homepage settings for Moodle. And we have
| | 03:40 | already got our Site name and our Short
name and our Front page description, but
| | 03:43 | we are going to scroll down a little bit
further, and we want to go down here and
| | 03:47 | make sure that Front page has the top
option which is List of courses, and
| | 03:52 | Front page items when logged
in also has List of courses.
| | 03:55 | So just go ahead and verify that
both of those are set there like that.
| | 04:00 | We can scroll all the way back down
to the bottom and click Save changes.
| | 04:05 | The last set of setting changes that we
need to do is, during the installation I
| | 04:09 | mentioned that the password
restrictions are a bit excessive for having a
| | 04:14 | testing server just
running on our local machine.
| | 04:17 | So let's go ahead and reset those settings now.
| | 04:19 | So we scroll down on the left-hand
column again, and we're in the Site
| | 04:23 | administration section.
| | 04:25 | You want to find the link for Security.
| | 04:27 | Go ahead and click on Security, and then we
want to click on the link for Site policies.
| | 04:33 | In the Site policies section, we are
going to scroll down pretty far down the
| | 04:37 | page, and what we are looking
for is this Password policy.
| | 04:41 | By default, it's checked on.
| | 04:44 | As you can see in the description here,
it's applying all of these different
| | 04:49 | password properties to it,
| | 04:51 | so a password of eight characters with a
digit, and a lowercase letter, an uppercase
| | 04:55 | letter, and alphanumeric characters.
| | 04:57 | That's a bit excessive,
| | 04:58 | so we'll go ahead and uncheck this box.
| | 05:01 | If you were deploying Moodle out on
to the Internet, and if this was a live
| | 05:05 | production server, then yeah, you would
want to have a lot of these restrictions
| | 05:09 | put in place to make sure that
your passwords were not accessible.
| | 05:12 | But this version of Moodle that we are
installing right now is not going to be
| | 05:16 | accessible to the outside world.
| | 05:18 | So we'll go ahead and scroll all the
way down to the bottom now and click Save
| | 05:21 | changes. And the final change that we
want to make is to actually go ahead and
| | 05:26 | reset our administrator password.
| | 05:28 | So let's go up here and click on the
Home button back up here in the breadcrumbs.
| | 05:32 | We are going to scroll down in the
Settings section to the section that says My
| | 05:36 | profile settings. Go ahead and click on
that, expand that menu out, and you can
| | 05:40 | see there is a link for Change password.
| | 05:42 | Go ahead and hit Change password.
| | 05:45 | Now, it's going to ask us to
type in our current password.
| | 05:48 | Now, the current password is the one
that we set in the last movie during the
| | 05:51 | installation. It's the one that is the Qwerty!1.
| | 06:01 | That was the temporary password
that we set up for the Admin account.
| | 06:05 | For the New password, and the one that I
am going to be using throughout this
| | 06:07 | training title, is going to simply be 12345.
| | 06:11 | So type that in and then click in
the Next field and type it in again,
| | 06:15 | 12345, and click the Save
changes button, and there we go!
| | 06:20 | It says, our password has been
changed. Click Continue and there we are.
| | 06:24 | We have our Admin User account.
| | 06:26 | Go ahead and click back to Home in the upper
left, and let's go ahead and test this now.
| | 06:31 | So we are just going to go up to the
upper-right corner now and there's a link for Logout.
| | 06:35 | Let's go ahead and hit Logout.
| | 06:36 | That will effectively log
us out of our Moodle server.
| | 06:39 | You can see the URL is set back to localhost.
| | 06:43 | To log in, we're just going to come up
here to the upper-right, click on the
| | 06:46 | Login link, and it asks us what
username. We are going to type in admin, and the
| | 06:51 | password is now 12345.
| | 06:52 | I am going to go ahead and hit
the Login button, and there we go!
| | 06:58 | We were able to log in.
| | 06:59 | We can tell that we were able to log in
because it tells us right here, "You are
| | 07:02 | logged in as Admin User." Excellent!
| | 07:05 | That's exactly what we want.
| | 07:06 | So in the next movie, we are going to be
back with everyone who is watching both
| | 07:10 | on the Mac and Windows, and we are going
to go into a few more configuration and
| | 07:15 | setup changes that we are going to
want to play with here inside of Moodle.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a custom theme| 00:00 | Now that we have Moodle up and running
on our machines, I'd like to show you one
| | 00:04 | of the new features in Moodle 2.1 right
away--and that's the ability to not only
| | 00:09 | select themes, which has been around
for a while, but the ability to customize
| | 00:13 | those themes right from inside
of the Moodle user interface.
| | 00:16 | This is generally an administrative
function that many teachers would not be doing;
| | 00:21 | however, since you're going to be
administering the local install of Moodle at
| | 00:26 | least on your test server, I will go
ahead and show you how to do this, so that
| | 00:30 | you are familiar with the process.
| | 00:32 | To begin though, what I would like
you to do is go ahead and minimize your
| | 00:35 | browser out of the way.
| | 00:36 | And if you're following along with the
exercise files, I've included a file here
| | 00:41 | called logo.png, and it's just a simple logo.
| | 00:44 | It says YONDO UNIVERSITY for
students. It's a PNG file.
| | 00:48 | If you don't have the files,
you can go ahead and create one yourself.
| | 00:51 | It's about 300 pixels wide by 80 pixels tall.
| | 00:53 | Go ahead and close that.
| | 00:55 | And now what we need to do is we
need to copy this PNG file into the root
| | 01:00 | directory of our web server.
| | 01:02 | So if you're following along on the Mac,
you want to go to your Applications
| | 01:05 | folder/XAMPP/htdocs and simply drag
the logo.png into that folder, and if you
| | 01:12 | hold down the Option key, it'll
make a copy of the file in there.
| | 01:16 | Go ahead and enter your password.
| | 01:18 | Now if you are following along on
Windows, simply go into the exercise files
| | 01:23 | and go into the Chapter01 folder and go
ahead and right-click on the logo file
| | 01:27 | and simply hit Copy.
| | 01:30 | I'm going to go ahead and close that window and
come on down here on our desktop and
| | 01:33 | double-click the Moodle folder where
we have our Moodle installation at.
| | 01:36 | I am going to go ahead and go into the
server folder, and then the folder that
| | 01:40 | we are looking for is this one
right here, the one that says Moodle.
| | 01:43 | Just go ahead and double-click in there.
| | 01:44 | And then just to make sure we don't
drop it into one of these subfolders,
| | 01:48 | we are going to come down here where
the rest of the files are, right-click, and
| | 01:51 | hit Paste. And there is, the logo file,
and it is all set up for you for being
| | 01:57 | able to follow along with the training.
| | 02:00 | Let's go into the Theme section.
| | 02:02 | So we are going to scroll down in the
left-hand side, and we are going to click
| | 02:05 | on Site administration.
| | 02:06 | This is the section where all of the
administration functions for Moodle take place.
| | 02:11 | So we will scroll down a little bit
further, and we are going to go into
| | 02:13 | Appearance, and we are going to go into Themes.
| | 02:17 | The very first item here, Theme settings,
| | 02:19 | go ahead and click on that guy right there.
| | 02:21 | This brings up the Theme Settings
window, and the second item right here,
| | 02:25 | Theme designer mode,
| | 02:27 | if we go ahead and check this box, then
what they'll do is it will make it so
| | 02:31 | that as we are going through making
these changes, Moodle will automatically
| | 02:35 | refresh and rebuild the theme that's being
displayed on screen, so we can see it again.
| | 02:41 | So go ahead and now scroll all the way down to the very
bottom and click the Save changes button.
| | 02:47 | If we scroll down a little bit again,
we can go over to our Themes section and we
| | 02:51 | can go to our Theme selector.
| | 02:54 | Now we saw this during the set up,
and we have the default theme set up, and we
| | 02:58 | are using the Formal White theme,
but I wanted to very quickly look at a
| | 03:04 | couple of other themes, just to see some of the
flexibility that's available inside of Moodle.
| | 03:08 | So go ahead and hit Select theme.
| | 03:10 | Now we are just going to
look at a couple of them.
| | 03:12 | We are going to end up going back to the
Formal White, but for now go ahead and
| | 03:16 | let's look at this first one, Afterburner.
| | 03:18 | Go and hit Use theme, and you will
notice Moodle instantly resets and looks
| | 03:23 | completely different now.
| | 03:25 | We have got different colors set up.
| | 03:27 | We've got a nice gradient set
up here in our breadcrumbs bar.
| | 03:32 | We've got a logo that's added
up here in a different color.
| | 03:35 | Scroll on down, hit Continue.
| | 03:37 | We are going to scroll down again.
| | 03:39 | We are going to go back to that page.
| | 03:40 | So we are going to go back to Appearance,
go back to Themes, go back to Theme selector.
| | 03:45 | We are going to select the default theme again.
| | 03:50 | Let's scroll on down, and this time
what I would like to do is I would like to
| | 03:53 | look at the Arialist theme.
| | 03:57 | We are going to go and
hit Use theme for Arialist.
| | 03:59 | And now when that one loads up you
will notice the page looks quite different.
| | 04:02 | Again, there's no left-hand column
now; there's only a right-hand column.
| | 04:06 | Go and hit Continue here.
| | 04:08 | The nice part about this theme,
if we hit Home, is that your focus is now
| | 04:14 | over on all of your content, rather
than having your focus set up on all of
| | 04:19 | the little sidebars.
| | 04:20 | Most of the themes are able to do this;
| | 04:23 | this one just happens to be
one that's set up by default.
| | 04:25 | You will notice this one,
| | 04:26 | the spacing is set up a little bit
nicer on some of the text as well.
| | 04:30 | So let's scroll down again, and this
time kind of come all the way down to Site
| | 04:36 | administration, scroll down to
Appearance > Themes, and we are going to go to
| | 04:42 | the Theme selector.
| | 04:44 | Hit the Select theme, and let's
come on back down to Formal White.
| | 04:51 | Feel free to go in and click on any
of these other themes if you'd like to
| | 04:54 | have a look at them.
| | 04:55 | You now see how to get in and change
the themes, but we are going to go back
| | 04:59 | to the Formal White.
| | 05:00 | Now I would like to show you a
couple of things that you can do to really
| | 05:03 | customize this theme now.
| | 05:05 | So we are going to go ahead and hit Continue.
| | 05:07 | We are going to again go back to
Appearance on the left, go back to Themes, and
| | 05:11 | this time when we scroll down, under the
Themes menu, once we get below the Theme
| | 05:16 | selector, you'll see some of the names
of some of the themes that were in that
| | 05:20 | list, and Formal White
happens to be one of them.
| | 05:23 | Go ahead and click on Formal White,
and here is a configuration page now where
| | 05:27 | we can go in and we can configure
some of the different parameters.
| | 05:31 | We can set the default font size.
| | 05:34 | We can set it for the old formal 1.9 look.
| | 05:36 | We are going to leave that off for right now.
| | 05:39 | The page header content and
that is this section up here,
| | 05:43 | right now it's set to display the Moodle logo.
| | 05:46 | That's exactly what we want.
| | 05:47 | You could have it just have some page
header information, but we are going to
| | 05:50 | go ahead and leave it set to the logo,
and now we can add our own custom logo,
| | 05:54 | and that PNG file that we added earlier is the
logo that we are going to have displayed here.
| | 05:59 | So we can simply type in a
URL, http://, and we are just going to
| | 06:04 | typing localhost/logo.png.
| | 06:10 | Let's test and see how this looks.
| | 06:12 | We will just scroll all
the way down to the bottom.
| | 06:14 | Don't worry, we will come
back to a lot of these changes.
| | 06:15 | I just want to see that this is working.
| | 06:17 | Hit the Save changes button, and there we go.
| | 06:20 | We have our YONDO UNIVERSITY for students logo.
| | 06:23 | It's showing up right here in the top.
| | 06:26 | We can clean up this look a little bit.
| | 06:28 | It's a little hard to read with
this light beige kind of background here,
| | 06:32 | and the actual colors for our
university is more of a chocolate-brown color.
| | 06:36 | So we will go ahead and scroll down to
this first section where it says Header
| | 06:40 | background color, and here we can
either just move our mouse around in the
| | 06:45 | color palette and we can select a color
to have it show up in the top, or we
| | 06:50 | can just simply come in here and select the
web-safe color number, and we will just type it in.
| | 06:55 | So in our case it is #663300.
| | 06:56 | You can go and hit the Preview button
and scroll up at the top and there we go,
| | 07:04 | YONDO UNIVERSITY for students, and there
is our actual university's colors. Great!
| | 07:10 | Scroll on down a little bit more.
| | 07:12 | The next one to adjust is the Block
content background color, and that's the
| | 07:16 | color right over here. And by default it's
a little bit darker gray than I would like,
| | 07:21 | so I am going to go ahead and select that,
and again, we are going to type in #,
| | 07:25 | and this one is going to be set to F9F9F9.
| | 07:30 | Now the default for this is F6F6F6, so
this is a very slight change that may
| | 07:35 | not even be noticeable on all systems,
but it makes just a little bit of a
| | 07:39 | change, very subtle.
| | 07:40 | We are going to go ahead and leave the left
column background color as it is for the default.
| | 07:45 | I think that looks fine for us for now.
And we will scroll on down a little bit
| | 07:49 | further until we find the Footnote.
| | 07:51 | Now in the Footnote, you can put a
little station message that's going to
| | 07:54 | show up at the bottom.
| | 07:56 | If you have a tagline for university or
if you want to insert an image, you can
| | 08:00 | do that in here, but for right now
I'm just going to go ahead and type our
| | 08:04 | institution's tagline,
which is "A Culture of Learning."
| | 08:11 | In the bottom you have one
more option here, Custom CSS.
| | 08:15 | Now this is incredibly powerful,
because within this section you can actually
| | 08:19 | customize anything within the CSS theme
that you want, if you have somebody at your
| | 08:24 | university who is very versed in CSS,
and most of us do have those types of
| | 08:29 | people around us, fortunately.
| | 08:31 | So all we need to do is go ahead and
type this in, and there is a text file in
| | 08:35 | the Chapter01 exercise files,
if you don't want to type this, but it is
| | 08:38 | ".navbar li span " and put a open curly
quotes and then hit a line return and
| | 08:50 | then type in color: #996633;,
| | 09:00 | hit Return one time, and close
the curly quotes.
| | 09:04 | That's all we are going to do is
just one CSS statement, and what this is
| | 09:08 | going to do--we are going to go ahead and
scroll up, so we can see what's going to happen--
| | 09:12 | is right here in this navbar, you can
see that there are a couple of items
| | 09:17 | that as I move my mouse over, they are
not actually links--the links are these
| | 09:20 | white links--but this text here becomes
really difficult to read within this beige bar.
| | 09:27 | So when we go ahead and scroll all the
way down to the bottom and we hit Save
| | 09:31 | changes, that one little line of CSS
code is going to target these links right
| | 09:37 | here, and it's going to just highlight
them just a little bit to make it a
| | 09:41 | little bit easier for us
to read. So there you go.
| | 09:43 | That's all we are going to do
as far as customizing this theme.
| | 09:46 | You can go and hit the Home button,
and it will take you back to the homepage
| | 09:51 | for this theme, and in the next movie
we will go ahead and start setting up the
| | 09:55 | user accounts that we are going to use
during the rest of this training series.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating user accounts| 00:00 | Now we need some user accounts to be able
to work with throughout the training series.
| | 00:05 | So in order to create those, simply
come on down here in the left-hand side and
| | 00:09 | look for the Site administration
section and scroll down a little bit further
| | 00:12 | and click on Users and then click on Accounts.
| | 00:16 | The first thing we want to do is we're going
to add a single user account for ourselves,
| | 00:20 | so go ahead and hit the Add a new user
link, and that will bring up the Create a
| | 00:26 | new user account page.
| | 00:27 | So we'll simply give ourselves a username.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to give myself the username
of chris in all lowercase, and I'm going
| | 00:33 | to set my password to 12345.
| | 00:37 | Again, this is just going to be very easy.
| | 00:39 | You can create any username you want
to use, any password you want, but if
| | 00:43 | you want to follow along and do what
I'm doing, go ahead and use chris and set
| | 00:46 | your password to 12345.
| | 00:48 | For my First Name I'm
going to use Chris, C-H-R-I-S.
| | 00:51 | Surname is Mattia, M-A-T-T-I-A.
| | 00:55 | My email address, I'm going to
go ahead and use mattia@yondo.edu.
| | 01:01 | This is not my actual email address, by the way.
| | 01:03 | So we'll go ahead and scroll on down here a
little bit further and we go to City/town.
| | 01:08 | I am in Ventura, and I'm
going to hit the Select a country.
| | 01:13 | Now I'm just going to go ahead and hit
the U on my keyboard and it's going to
| | 01:16 | automatically jump down to the U
section, and I can scroll down just a little
| | 01:21 | bit further and there I find the United States.
| | 01:23 | If you're watching this video from
another country, go ahead and feel free to
| | 01:26 | select the country that you're in.
| | 01:28 | Now we're going to scroll on down, all
the way down to the very bottom, and click
| | 01:32 | the Update profile button. There we go.
| | 01:35 | We can see now that we have our own
user account with our email address set up
| | 01:40 | in here and all of our information,
and that's going to be fine for the teacher
| | 01:45 | account that we're going to be using to
manage our course, but it would be very
| | 01:50 | nice to be able to have some students
in our course, so that we can see what
| | 01:53 | students see as well.
| | 01:55 | We could step through that exact
process, clicking Add new user and creating a
| | 02:00 | whole series of different users,
but instead, what I've gone ahead and done--
| | 02:05 | if you go ahead and minimize this window down
out of the way--I've created a Users.csv file.
| | 02:12 | It's just a plain text file
| | 02:14 | that's a comma-separated file,
and in here it's pretty simply set up.
| | 02:19 | If you don't have access to the
exercise files, just go ahead and pause the
| | 02:22 | screen and type all the
stuff in exactly as you see it;
| | 02:25 | username,emailaddress,firstname, no
space in there,lastname,password,country,
| | 02:34 | and there's no spaces between
any of these different things.
| | 02:36 | Put a single line return, and then
I've just created the following users,
| | 02:40 | chris, and this is all my information right here.
| | 02:43 | That way we can test to make sure that
the import process is going smoothly.
| | 02:48 | It should go ahead and skip over
this account because we already have it.
| | 02:51 | And I've created the user of
Sally, Johnny, Al, Eugene, and Elvis.
| | 02:56 | Go ahead and close that file now.
| | 02:58 | Let's go back to our Moodle install,
and what we want to do now is we want to go
| | 03:03 | to Upload users link.
| | 03:05 | This is in Accounts and under Upload users.
| | 03:08 | It's going to ask us to choose a file.
| | 03:11 | Go ahead and hit Choose file, and we're
going to go the Upload a file link on
| | 03:17 | the left, and under Attachment hit the Browse
button, and it should take us out to our desktop.
| | 03:22 | We're going to go to Exercise
Files/Chapter 01/Users.csv.
| | 03:27 | This is the file we just showed you.
| | 03:29 | Hit Open and go ahead and hit Upload this file.
| | 03:32 | Everything should be all set up right here.
| | 03:34 | Go ahead and hit the Upload users
button, and we can see that Moodle
| | 03:38 | successfully brought in all of these users.
| | 03:40 | It's giving us a preview of what
their first and last names are.
| | 03:43 | We'll go ahead and scroll on down,
and we'll just check a few of these settings here.
| | 03:48 | We are going to leave New user password,
password, Create password if needed, so
| | 03:53 | all of these users are brand-new users
and it is going to create a password and
| | 03:57 | it's going to set it what we've
set here, 12345 for everything.
| | 04:01 | We're not going to force
the password to be changed.
| | 04:04 | We don't need, every time one of these
test students logs in, which is going to
| | 04:08 | be us, that we're going to want to have
to change the password because it's the
| | 04:12 | first time we're logging in.
| | 04:13 | We do want to make sure that we're
preventing email duplications, so if you took
| | 04:18 | and you changed the administrator
password in an earlier movie when you had the
| | 04:23 | Edit screen up for that, then if you
change the administrator's email address to
| | 04:28 | your own email address, you weren't
able to use your own email address here.
| | 04:31 | Let's go ahead and scroll on down,
and we can see in the Default values we can
| | 04:35 | set a few of those right now.
| | 04:37 | The City/town, we can go ahead and set
that to Somewhere because we only set the
| | 04:41 | country code; we didn't set the actual city.
| | 04:43 | If you wanted to change this to some other
city, you can go ahead and change that there.
| | 04:47 | And for Institution, I'm going to go
ahead and add in Yondo University
| | 04:53 | because that's the university that
all of these students are attending.
| | 04:56 | Let's go ahead and hit the
Upload user button, and there we go.
| | 05:01 | We've now created all of those user accounts.
| | 05:04 | Go ahead and hit the Continue button.
| | 05:06 | That just solidifies everything now.
| | 05:09 | Go ahead and go back to the Home
link in the upper left-hand corner, and
| | 05:12 | let's test one of those.
| | 05:14 | Go to the upper-right and click on
Logout, and the Logout button goes ahead and
| | 05:20 | changes and it now shows you Login,
so just go ahead and hit Login.
| | 05:24 | And this time on the Login screen,
instead of typing "admin," go ahead and type in
| | 05:29 | your username that you set up for yourself.
| | 05:31 | I have set up chris, and I'm going to set type
in my password 12345, and hit the Login button.
| | 05:38 | And there we go.
I can see that I am logged in as me.
| | 05:41 | You can log in as any of those additional users.
| | 05:44 | You have the list of the student user
names. If you want to test those, you're
| | 05:48 | more than welcome to.
| | 05:50 | In future movies when I go ahead and
log in as one of those student accounts,
| | 05:54 | I'll call out the username and
password throughout the training series.
| | 05:59 | In the next movie, we're going to go
ahead and set up our default course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a new course| 00:00 | Now that we have our users created,
we need to go ahead and create our test
| | 00:05 | course that we're going to
use throughout this title.
| | 00:08 | But if you look down in the lower
left-hand corner, you'll notice that the
| | 00:10 | server settings are no longer there.
| | 00:12 | And that's because we
are logged in as ourselves.
| | 00:15 | So the first thing we need to do is
make sure any time you want to administer
| | 00:18 | the server, go ahead and log out
and log back in as the admin user.
| | 00:23 | So go ahead and here we're going to
type in admin, and the password is 12345, and
| | 00:30 | hit the Login button.
| | 00:31 | Now we're going to scroll down
in the left-hand side and go to
| | 00:34 | Site administration.
| | 00:36 | And scroll on down again and this
time click on Courses and hit the
| | 00:40 | Add/edit courses link.
| | 00:44 | In the Add/edit courses, we're
going to simply add a new course.
| | 00:48 | And for the full course name, we're going
to go ahead and type in Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 00:55 | And for the short name,
I'm going to type in BIOL432.
| | 01:00 | It's the course number for my course here.
| | 01:03 | Now the Course ID, we're going
to go ahead and leave that blank.
| | 01:05 | That's used in many systems where
you've got a course ID that is tied directly
| | 01:11 | to your campus information system.
| | 01:14 | And this is a field that is not necessarily
required, but it is available for you to use.
| | 01:20 | For the Course summary, I'm going to
go ahead right now and type in "A general
| | 01:25 | course on coral reef ecology."
| | 01:30 | Normally, what would be populated in here
as the official course description, and
| | 01:34 | we'll show in a later movie
where that could be edited at.
| | 01:36 | But for right now, we'll just put a
very generic message right inside of here.
| | 01:40 | And if you wanted to, you could add a
little bit of formatting to that, but
| | 01:43 | we're going to scroll on past that.
| | 01:46 | And for the Format, we have a couple of options.
| | 01:49 | And the two most common options that
most teachers use for their courses is
| | 01:54 | either a Topics format or a Weekly format.
| | 01:57 | Now the Weekly format is going to start
off on a particular day in the term, and
| | 02:02 | it's going to calculate all of
the individual weeks of your class,
| | 02:05 | and it will populate in the dates
for when that course is being taught.
| | 02:11 | So in the case of our course, I'm
going to go ahead and use the Weekly
| | 02:14 | format for our course.
| | 02:16 | We've got a 15-week semester, so I'm
going to go ahead and select down 15.
| | 02:21 | And the Course start date, I'm going to
build a course for the spring of 2012,
| | 02:25 | so I'll click the dropdown menu here,
and I'll be able to scroll forward in time.
| | 02:30 | I'm going to go down to January,
and the first week of the course is going to
| | 02:36 | start on the 23rd of January here, in 2012.
| | 02:40 | And I'm going to scroll on
down a little bit further.
| | 02:44 | I've got Hidden sections
are going to be completely invisible.
| | 02:47 | I'm going to take my news
items and only have those set to 5.
| | 02:51 | My Gradebook I do want to show.
| | 02:53 | I'm not going to show any activity
reports, and I want to make sure that my
| | 02:57 | maximum upload size is 128.
| | 03:00 | On the Windows install, we did some php
configurations in order to reset our
| | 03:06 | maximum upload file size,
| | 03:08 | so this is where we're reaping that
benefit, so make sure that you've got that
| | 03:11 | set all the way up to 128 there.
| | 03:14 | Go ahead and scroll on down.
| | 03:16 | We're not going to log guests in.
| | 03:18 | The Groups, we're going to
leave those all set to None.
| | 03:22 | Availability, we're going to set this.
The course is available to students.
| | 03:27 | Language, we're not going to force
right now, and the only edit that I want to
| | 03:31 | make here, Role renaming.
| | 03:32 | These are the roles that Moodle has
called out for what the different roles
| | 03:36 | within your course are going to be.
| | 03:39 | And Manager, we're not going to use.
Teacher is you. You may want to go ahead
| | 03:43 | and type in Professor here if you are professor
at a university and you prefer that over teacher.
| | 03:48 | But for Non-editing teacher, this is
really your teaching assistant, or your TA,
| | 03:53 | as most universities call it.
| | 03:55 | And Student is fine to call that.
| | 03:57 | This is not the actual name of your TA.
| | 03:59 | This is just the name
| | 04:01 | TA is what that role is going
to be called within the course.
| | 04:04 | So go ahead and hit Save changes.
| | 04:05 | Don't worry about all of the details
of the specifics of those settings that
| | 04:10 | we made just there.
| | 04:11 | We're going to go into those in a
little more detail in a later movie, but for
| | 04:14 | now, let's go ahead and get this course set up.
| | 04:16 | Now we want to go ahead and enroll our users.
| | 04:18 | So we're going to come over here
and hit the Enroll users button.
| | 04:22 | There's one at the top and the bottom;
it doesn't matter which one you hit.
| | 04:25 | The first thing we want to do is we
want to set up our teacher, so hit the
| | 04:29 | dropdown menu at the top and
select Teacher as the role.
| | 04:33 | And you want to find your account.
| | 04:34 | In this case, here's my
account right here, Chris Mattia.
| | 04:36 | And I'm going to hit the Enroll button,
and that adds me as the teacher here.
| | 04:42 | Now we're going to go up to the dropdown menu
at the top and we're going to select Student,
| | 04:46 | and we're going to go ahead and
enroll all of the other students.
| | 04:49 | We'll enroll Sally Jones, Elvis McNamera,
Eugene Sanches, Johnny Smith, and Al Uminium.
| | 04:59 | To make this all finalized, you need to
click the button at the bottom that says
| | 05:02 | Finish enrolling users.
| | 05:04 | A very important thing to do inside of
Moodle is anytime you make some setting
| | 05:08 | changes, always look at the bottom of
the screen and look for a Save option of
| | 05:13 | some kind because just because you've
made a setting change, doesn't mean it
| | 05:17 | actually got saved somewhere.
| | 05:19 | Let's check over our work here.
| | 05:20 | We've got all of our users installed here.
| | 05:23 | We've got ourselves set up as the teacher.
| | 05:26 | You can see our role here.
| | 05:27 | And we've got a bunch of students
set up and if we decide that Johnny is
| | 05:31 | actually going to be our TA also, we
can even hit the little plus sign right
| | 05:36 | here and we can add an additional role.
| | 05:38 | We can add him as the TA, and there we go.
| | 05:40 | Now Johnny is not only a student,
but he can also be a TA if we want to
| | 05:44 | grant those privileges.
| | 05:46 | If we decide that we don't want Johnny to be
our TA, we just hit the little X next to it.
| | 05:50 | Do you want to remove this privilege from him?
| | 05:52 | Yeah, sure, go ahead and remove it,
and Johnny is back to being a regular
| | 05:56 | student in the class.
| | 05:58 | Let's go ahead and check this real quick.
| | 05:59 | Go ahead and hit the Home button.
| | 06:01 | We can now see in our Available courses
Coral Reef Ecology with us listed as the Teacher.
| | 06:07 | So let's do one final check.
| | 06:09 | Go ahead and log out of the of
the admin account, log back in.
| | 06:14 | This time log in as yourself, so I'll
log in as Chris with my password 12345,
| | 06:20 | hit the Login button. And there we go!
| | 06:23 | Our course is set up right
there, and we're ready to go.
| | 06:25 | In the next movie, we'll go through
a couple of final checks of server
| | 06:30 | administration things and then
get on to building our course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Just enough site administration| 00:00 | Since this is Moodle Essential
Training for Teachers, we are not going to go
| | 00:03 | into a very deep dive into
administering your Moodle server.
| | 00:08 | So we are not going to go into how to
upgrade Moodle or go into any of the
| | 00:11 | very fine settings.
| | 00:13 | There are tons of those available to you.
| | 00:15 | But we just need to go through and make
a few more tweaks, just to make sure that
| | 00:19 | everything is up and
running properly on our server.
| | 00:22 | We've already been able to log out and
log back in, so make sure you are logged
| | 00:26 | in as the admin user.
| | 00:27 | You can see that up here in the upper
right. If you are logged in yourself, I'll
| | 00:30 | go ahead and log out and log back in as Admin.
| | 00:32 | Then scroll on down to the left-hand
side, and we need to make just a few
| | 00:37 | more setting changes.
| | 00:38 | Go into the Site Administration
link and scroll on down until you find
| | 00:43 | the Plugins section.
| | 00:44 | Go ahead and hit Plugins, and now we
want to go down to Activity modules,
| | 00:50 | so go ahead and hit
Activities, and we want to look at the
| | 00:53 | Assignments configuration.
| | 00:55 | Now this is the way that most of the
functionality of Moodle is managed.
| | 01:01 | You just simply navigate
through the menu structure,
| | 01:04 | you find the area that you want to
administer, and most of the items have a user
| | 01:08 | interface dropdown menu
to be able to control them.
| | 01:11 | So in this case the maximum upload size
for an assignment is by default in this
| | 01:17 | installation set to 1 megabyte.
| | 01:19 | Well, we have 128 megs available to us,
so we will go ahead and set that up.
| | 01:24 | This is a setting that's going to
be set by your IT department at your
| | 01:28 | institution, depending on the amount of
storage space available to your Moodle server.
| | 01:33 | If you find out that the size of the
files that you need to upload are larger
| | 01:37 | than what's available, you may need to
contact your IT department to find out if
| | 01:41 | they can boost up the
maximum size for assignments.
| | 01:44 | So here we made a setting change,
and let's go ahead and hit the Save changes to
| | 01:47 | activate that change.
| | 01:49 | Now let's go into one other admin feature here.
| | 01:52 | Let's go again in the Activity modules
section, and I want you to come down here
| | 01:57 | to Forum. Go ahead and click on the
Forum link, and now we want to go in and
| | 02:03 | scroll down--let's see. Where'd it go?
| | 02:05 | There it is, Maximum
attachment size 500 kilobytes.
| | 02:09 | This is really conservative.
| | 02:10 | We don't need to have this set quite that low.
| | 02:13 | Again, go ahead for the training videos and
| | 02:15 | let's set it up to 128 megs. Depending
on what your IT department has set, it
| | 02:20 | may be higher or lower than that.
| | 02:22 | And the last thing that we want to go
ahead and make a setting change for is the
| | 02:25 | Maximum number of attachments.
| | 02:27 | Right now, it's only set to 1, and that's
a little bit restrictive for some users,
| | 02:33 | where it's a very good idea to have
students to be able to post lots of material
| | 02:38 | into the discussion forums and
generate a lot of discussion.
| | 02:41 | We will go ahead and set that up for 9
for now, and let's go ahead and scroll
| | 02:46 | all the way down to the
bottom and hit Save changes.
| | 02:50 | Now let's go ahead and make a few
more activity module setting changes.
| | 02:54 | The next thing we want to do is go
ahead and click on Manage activities here
| | 02:58 | under the Activity modules section,
and you want to make sure that all of your
| | 03:02 | activities are turned on.
| | 03:04 | Now on the Mac version all
they should be turned on for you.
| | 03:07 | But the way to make sure that things
are turned on is you use this Show Hide
| | 03:09 | column where the little eyeball is.
So for instance, for Feedback if I click
| | 03:13 | on that eye, you can see that the eye turns
off and it's disabled this Activity module.
| | 03:18 | Well, to turn it back on, all we have
to do is click the little eye again and
| | 03:22 | make sure that that eye is showing.
| | 03:23 | So you just want to make sure that all
of these are turned on, and this is the
| | 03:27 | way that you turn on or off
all activity modules.
| | 03:31 | The next thing that we want to do
is we want to check our filters.
| | 03:33 | So we are going to come back
over here to the Settings section.
| | 03:36 | We are still under Plugins, but now we
want to scroll down a little bit until we
| | 03:40 | find the Filters section.
| | 03:41 | So go ahead now and click on Filters and
then click on the link for Manage filters.
| | 03:46 | Now this is the other way that Moodle
manages some of its Setting changes.
| | 03:51 | Here instead of having the eye icon, we
have a dropdown menu that allows us to
| | 03:55 | set a particular plugin to be
Disabled; Off, but Available; or On.
| | 04:00 | So you want to make sure that the
following ones are turned on on your server,
| | 04:04 | and depending on the platform that you
are working on, they may or may not be
| | 04:07 | turned on for you automatically.
| | 04:09 | So we want to make sure that
Multimedia plugins is active and set to On.
| | 04:13 | We want to make sure Display emoticons
as images is set to On, TeX notation, or
| | 04:20 | T-e-X notation is set to On, and Glossary
auto-linking should also be set to On.
| | 04:26 | Now the order in which these appear here
is not really very important. The Apply
| | 04:31 | to should still all be set to Content.
| | 04:33 | Okay, that gets all of those set.
| | 04:35 | Now let's go ahead and set
up some user setting changes.
| | 04:39 | So we will come over here and we are
going to go ahead and click on Users, and
| | 04:41 | then we are going to click on
Permissions. And now we want to come down to
| | 04:45 | this option here, Define roles.
Go ahead and click on Define roles, and this
| | 04:49 | shows you all of the different roles that
are currently available on the Moodle system.
| | 04:54 | And the way that this works is
when any user first logs into Moodle
| | 05:00 | they are considered to be an authenticated user.
| | 05:03 | Then once they go into a course,
they can continue to gain additional roles
| | 05:08 | throughout that course, their roles
could change depending on the course they
| | 05:11 | are in, or they could have some of
these main system roles of Manager or Course
| | 05:15 | creator that allow even additional permissions.
| | 05:18 | But what we want to do for this
training is we want to turn on some additional
| | 05:22 | functions that are currently turned off
in the Authenticated users area, and so
| | 05:27 | what we want to do is come over here
on the right-hand side and look for the
| | 05:30 | little hand with the Pencil
icon and click one time on that.
| | 05:34 | This brings up the Editing
role for 'Authenticated user.'
| | 05:38 | So go ahead and scroll down just a
little bit. Don't change any of the base
| | 05:42 | information up there.
| | 05:43 | What you do want to do is you want to
first of all click on the Show advanced
| | 05:46 | button, and this is going to refresh
our screen, and it's going to show a whole
| | 05:51 | bunch more options when we scroll down.
| | 05:53 | So let's go ahead and scroll down a
little bit, and here we can see the basic way
| | 05:57 | that the permissions are set up for users.
| | 06:00 | They have the Capability column and
then what the permission actually is, and
| | 06:04 | there is a Not set, and Allow,
Prevent, and Prohibit. And then there is a
| | 06:09 | little indicator over here that tells
us for each of these settings what are
| | 06:12 | the potential risks.
| | 06:13 | This is normally something that your IT
department would be managing, but since
| | 06:17 | you are going to be setting up this
local server for yourself, these are the
| | 06:21 | permissions that we are going to have to adjust.
| | 06:23 | Now don't go in and just allow everything.
| | 06:26 | That would not be the
appropriate way to do this.
| | 06:29 | Now you should also note that since
Moodle is open source and its code is
| | 06:33 | constantly changing, by the time you've
downloaded a copy of Moodle and installed
| | 06:38 | it, the list of the Settings options
that appear here may not be exactly the
| | 06:42 | same, nor in the same order in which
I'm showing them to you here on screen.
| | 06:47 | But just go ahead and make sure that
the settings that I show you how to change
| | 06:50 | are the ones that you go ahead and change.
| | 06:51 | What we want to do is we want to
look for some very specific setting.
| | 06:54 | So on your keyboard, you can press
Command+F or Ctrl+F to bring up the Find
| | 07:00 | functionality for your browser,
and what we want to do is we want to simply go
| | 07:04 | ahead and search for repository,
so start typing Repositories.
| | 07:08 | What it will do is it will start
jumping down in the list to where the
| | 07:14 | repositories permissions are located.
| | 07:16 | The first one that it
found for me is Repository:
| | 07:19 | Legacy course files.
| | 07:20 | That's not the one we are looking for, so
we will go ahead and hit the Next button
| | 07:24 | and we will jump down to there.
| | 07:26 | Keep hitting Next until you get
down to where it says Repository:
| | 07:29 | Alfresco repository.
| | 07:31 | And what we are going to do is we
are going to turn a bunch of these on.
| | 07:34 | The first one that we are
going to turn on is down here.
| | 07:36 | It's called Repository Dropbox.
Make sure that's set to Allow. Then we are
| | 07:40 | going to check Allow for file system,
for Flickr, for Flickr public, scrolling
| | 07:46 | down a little bit Google Docs, Allow,
Server files, Allow, keep scrolling
| | 07:51 | down, Picasa web album, Allow, Recent
files, Allow, keep on coming down here,
| | 07:59 | Allow Upload a file.
| | 08:02 | This is the really important one.
| | 08:03 | We've got to make sure that this is turned on.
| | 08:06 | URL downloader. Private
files should be On, webDAV,
| | 08:10 | we can turn that On, Wikimedia,
and finally YouTube videos.
| | 08:16 | That's a whole bunch of different
settings that we just turned on.
| | 08:19 | This is not turning on all of these
functions throughout the entire system.
| | 08:23 | All this means is that any
authenticated user, if these repositories--and we will
| | 08:28 | go into what repositories are in a later movie--
| | 08:32 | if these repositories have been turned
on within the Moodle server, then any
| | 08:37 | authenticated user would be able to see
the functionality without having to be
| | 08:41 | in a specific course.
| | 08:43 | There are a lot of discussions online
about whether or not students should have
| | 08:47 | access to all these functionalities.
| | 08:48 | That's up to your individual institution,
but for the purpose of this training,
| | 08:51 | we are going to go ahead and turn all these on.
| | 08:54 | Now go ahead and scroll all the
way down to the bottom and click the
| | 08:58 | Save changes button.
| | 09:00 | Now let's go up and make another setting change.
| | 09:02 | Come up here to the top and
click on the Allow role switch.
| | 09:06 | This tab allows you to control which
roles a particular type of user is allowed
| | 09:11 | to see while they are working inside of Moodle.
| | 09:14 | The role that we want to
adjust is the Teacher role.
| | 09:17 | And if we come over to the Student
column, I want to make sure that the box
| | 09:20 | for Student is checked.
| | 09:22 | This way, as the teacher, you will be
able to see what a student sees at any
| | 09:27 | point and then change
your role back to yourself.
| | 09:30 | Go ahead and scroll down to the
bottom and click the Save changes button.
| | 09:34 | When the page refreshes you can return
back to the main page of your site by
| | 09:39 | clicking on the Home link, then go
ahead and log out by clicking the Logout
| | 09:44 | button, and then log back in as
yourself, and then we'll be ready to carry on
| | 09:49 | with the rest of the title.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Getting StartedLogging in and getting oriented| 00:00 | Let's take a brief look at some of the
general features that are common to most
| | 00:04 | Moodle installations.
| | 00:05 | When you first go to a Moodle site
and you haven't logged in, you are
| | 00:10 | generally presented with some basic
information about the site, usually
| | 00:13 | information about the university,
| | 00:16 | maybe a listing of the courses.
Many institutions will publish even some public
| | 00:20 | calendar information that you're able to see.
| | 00:22 | But you are generally limited in
what you can access, until you log in.
| | 00:27 | To log in, simply look for the
Login link. In this case, it's in the
| | 00:31 | upper right-hand corner.
| | 00:32 | This is a small link that says Login.
| | 00:34 | Click that one time and you're
taken to a generic login page.
| | 00:38 | Now you can enter in your username and
password, or you're able to Login as a
| | 00:41 | guest on many systems, if it's
allowed by the system administrator.
| | 00:45 | In this case, we will go ahead and log in as
our user account that we created for ourselves.
| | 00:49 | So I will select the Username and
type in Chris, and then for the Password
| | 00:52 | I will type in 12345.
| | 00:55 | I hit the Login link and now when the
Moodle page reloads, we are presented with
| | 01:00 | customized information
that's relevant just to us.
| | 01:03 | Here we can see that we are a member
of the Coral Reef Ecology course, and it
| | 01:07 | even shows who the teacher is.
| | 01:09 | That general description that we
typed in earlier when we set up the course
| | 01:13 | appears right here, so we know
information about what this course is.
| | 01:18 | One of the great new features of the
Moodle 2 system is the ability to dock your blocks.
| | 01:24 | Now on the left and right-hand column,
you'll see a series of blocks that
| | 01:28 | contain most of the major functions of Moodle.
| | 01:31 | You have got a Navigation block, and My
courses block, and My settings block.
| | 01:35 | In the upper right-hand corner, if you
move your mouse over top of the icons
| | 01:40 | that are there, you'll see a tooltip
this that says, "Move this to the dock."
| | 01:43 | It's a new feature of Moodle 2. Simply
click that link and a new feature appears
| | 01:49 | on the left-hand side.
| | 01:50 | It's called the dock.
| | 01:52 | And what happens is your blocks are
able to be minimized out of the way and
| | 01:56 | moved over here. As you move your
mouse over top of the dock icon name,
| | 02:00 | you're able to see all of the contents
of that block right there, and you're
| | 02:05 | able to access it without it
cluttering up your screen.
| | 02:08 | So let's go ahead and dock all three of
the blocks from the left-hand column, and
| | 02:13 | those all appear over
here on the left-hand side.
| | 02:16 | This leaves the main portion of our
screen for us to focus on the primary
| | 02:20 | content that we are interested
in. Usually this is our course.
| | 02:24 | Now if you click on a dock icon for a
block over on the right-hand side, those
| | 02:30 | items also go into the one single
dock that's usually located over on the
| | 02:35 | left-hand side. Again, I can hover my
mouse over top of Calendar, move my mouse
| | 02:39 | over top of the day, and I can see
that there are no events for today.
| | 02:43 | To move an item back out of your dock
and back into the column where it was,
| | 02:48 | you can simply move your mouse over
top of the icon up here and click the
| | 02:53 | Undock this item. The block then returns
right back to the location where it was before.
| | 02:59 | Now if you want to reset all of the
blocks back to their original location, if
| | 03:03 | you go down to the lower left-hand
corner, down at the bottom of the dock
| | 03:07 | there's a small icon that you can hit.
It says Undock all. Click on that and
| | 03:12 | your screen returns to normal.
| | 03:13 | So if you choose to use the dock or not,
it's up to you, and that's how you do it.
| | 03:17 | You just use those little minimize icons.
| | 03:19 | Another great feature of Moodle that
is available to you is this Online users
| | 03:25 | section, and many Moodle installations
use this, and what does is it shows you
| | 03:30 | over the course of some set period of
time limit, in this case 5 minutes, who
| | 03:34 | else has been logged in.
| | 03:36 | So it's a good chance that
these people are still logged in.
| | 03:38 | So you can click on the person's name.
In this case I will go ahead and click on
| | 03:41 | Admin, and there's not very many details
here available to me on about the admin
| | 03:46 | user. But what it does do is it opens
up and it shows me this other feature of
| | 03:50 | the navigation and that is the
breadcrumbs up here at the top.
| | 03:54 | The breadcrumbs always show in this
little bar right here, and they show you the
| | 03:57 | path as to where you're currently at.
| | 03:59 | So right now we are looking at a
particular user's profile with no information.
| | 04:05 | So to get back to the homepage, I can simply
come up and I can click on the Home breadcrumb.
| | 04:10 | That takes me right back to the main page.
| | 04:12 | Now if I click on my name in the Online
users section, I can see a more detailed
| | 04:16 | view of the information related to this user.
| | 04:19 | In the next movie, we will go in
and we will customize this page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing private files| 00:00 | One of the most requested features that
I hear from faculty that they're looking
| | 00:04 | for is a way to be able to upload files
into Moodle and then be able to access
| | 00:10 | those same files between
multiple different courses.
| | 00:13 | A lot of times a teacher will teach
many different sections of the same
| | 00:15 | course, where they have certain
files that are just used over and over
| | 00:19 | throughout their courses.
| | 00:20 | In Moodle 2, there is a new feature
called My private files, and in this movie we
| | 00:24 | are going to step to how to go ahead
and set up your Private files area and
| | 00:27 | leverage it for your courses.
| | 00:29 | All you need to do is come over to the
left-hand column in the Navigation block
| | 00:33 | and click on the link for My Profile.
| | 00:35 | If you look down a little bit further in
the list, you will find the list for My
| | 00:37 | private files. Go ahead and click on
that link and now you have a button for
| | 00:41 | Manage my private files. Go ahead and
click on the button and here you're given
| | 00:45 | a place to be able to add files and
create folders into your private files area.
| | 00:51 | Now one thing to note:
| | 00:52 | down at the bottom there is a
button that says Save changes.
| | 00:54 | If you go through and add content
to this area and you don't click Save
| | 00:58 | changes, none of the changes--none of the
uploaded files, none of the folders--will be saved.
| | 01:03 | So you want to make sure that when you are
all finished you click that Save changes button.
| | 01:07 | Let's go ahead and add a picture of
ourselves that we are going to add to our
| | 01:10 | user profile in a later movie.
| | 01:13 | To do this, simply click the Add button,
and now you'll see the standard file picker.
| | 01:18 | Now if you don't see all the options
that are listed here, be sure to go watch
| | 01:21 | the movie on server
administration in the first chapter.
| | 01:25 | All you need to do now is simply go to the
Upload a file area and click the Browse button.
| | 01:30 | We will navigate through our exercise
files and we will go to Chapter 2 and
| | 01:35 | click on file for headshot.
| | 01:36 | If you have your own image of yourself that
you want to add, go ahead and do that now.
| | 01:41 | Click the Open button and if you need to
change the name of the file, you can do
| | 01:45 | that right here. But be warned: if you
change the name of the file, it's a good
| | 01:49 | idea to use no spaces in the file name
and make sure you put the file extension.
| | 01:54 | This has already been done for us in
my file, so I am going to go ahead
| | 01:56 | and leave that blank.
| | 01:58 | You can then set who the author of the file is
and any licenses that you want to attach to it.
| | 02:03 | Go ahead and hit the Upload this file
button and now the file appears here
| | 02:07 | inside of your Private files area.
| | 02:08 | You can click the Save Changes button,
and that file has been added to your
| | 02:13 | My private files area.
| | 02:15 | You can now access this file from any of
the different courses or areas of Moodle.
| | 02:20 | Let's go back into the Manage my
private file areas, and I will show you how
| | 02:24 | to upload some course content to keep
yourself organized for working in your courses.
| | 02:28 | Go ahead and click the Create folder
button, and since our course number is
| | 02:32 | BIOL432, we are going to go ahead
and call this folder that, BIOL432.
| | 02:40 | Hit the Ok button, and now
you can click into that folder.
| | 02:45 | We can tell that we are in the folder
because at the top it says Files Path.
| | 02:49 | We are in the Files section,
and we are in a folder called 432.
| | 02:53 | Let's go ahead and add a file to this.
Click the Add button, and again we are
| | 02:56 | taken to our standard file picker.
Click the Browse button and this time we're
| | 03:01 | going to upload the Lecture_01_01.pdf.
This is a PDF file of our lecture slides
| | 03:08 | and we can use at a later time.
| | 03:10 | Go ahead and click the Open
button and hit Upload this file.
| | 03:13 | Be sure to hit save changes, and now
we've not only uploaded our headshot file,
| | 03:18 | but we've also uploaded a folder, and if
we click little plus sign, we can see the
| | 03:22 | contents of that folder right
here to be able access them.
| | 03:25 | That's all you need to know about getting
in and managing your Private files area.
| | 03:30 | Go ahead and upload some additional
files if you need to into your folders.
| | 03:34 | We are going to go back to the homepage,
and in the next movie we are going to go
| | 03:38 | in and customize our user profile.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing your profile| 00:00 | Now let's go ahead and look at
customizing our user profile.
| | 00:04 | Inside of Moodle you have a personal
profile that contains all of the settings,
| | 00:08 | or preferences, that configures
Moodle for the way that you want to work.
| | 00:12 | It also contains all of your
personal information as well.
| | 00:15 | To customize this, go on down to the
left-hand side and look for the Settings
| | 00:19 | block and click on the My profile settings link.
| | 00:22 | Then click on the link for Edit profile.
| | 00:25 | The first thing to note here are
these items that are listed in red:
| | 00:29 | First name, Surname--or your last name--
Email address, City/town, and Select country.
| | 00:35 | These items are required, and everyone
must go ahead and fill this information out.
| | 00:39 | What we are going to go through now
though, is we are going to look at some of
| | 00:42 | the specific preferences and setup
options that are available to you as a
| | 00:46 | teacher to help make your
life a little bit easier.
| | 00:49 | The first one is Email display.
| | 00:51 | If you click the dropdown menu here,
you can see the various different options,
| | 00:54 | and the one that I like to set all the time
is Allow everyone to see my email address.
| | 00:59 | Now this is great for teachers
because if you have it set like this, then
| | 01:02 | students that are looking to take your
course in the future can be able to find
| | 01:06 | you and find your information on the
Moodle system for your institution.
| | 01:10 | Otherwise, only students in your
class would be able find your information.
| | 01:15 | The next option, Email format,
| | 01:17 | it's a good idea these days to go ahead
and leave it set to the Pretty HTML format.
| | 01:21 | That way any formatting that your
students apply to any forums, posts, or
| | 01:25 | other email messages that get sent to you
through the Moodle system will come in formatted.
| | 01:30 | This next option, Email digest,
| | 01:32 | this one is probably one of
the most important for a teacher.
| | 01:35 | By default, it's set to be No digest,
| | 01:38 | and that means that every single time
one of your students posts a message into
| | 01:41 | one of the discussion forums,
you're going to get an email.
| | 01:45 | We all get way too much email these days,
| | 01:47 | and so the setting that I like
to choose is the Complete option.
| | 01:50 | That means that every day for each
different forum that you're subscribed to, you
| | 01:55 | will get a single email that will
contain all of the full posts from all of your
| | 01:58 | students for that forum for that day.
| | 02:01 | This will help reduce your overall
amount of email and help you manage your time
| | 02:05 | a little bit easier.
| | 02:07 | Forum auto-subscribe, I like to go
ahead and make sure that I'm always
| | 02:10 | subscribed to all the forums
that I create and that I post in.
| | 02:13 | This next option, Forum tracking,
| | 02:15 | by default it's set to No.
| | 02:16 | I really like to set this to Yes.
| | 02:18 | What this will do is that anytime I
go into a forum and I start clicking
| | 02:22 | through the different messages that my
students have posted, Moodle will keep
| | 02:26 | track of all of those messages that
I've read already and it will let me know
| | 02:30 | that I've already read them.
| | 02:31 | So we will set that one to Yes.
| | 02:33 | It's a really good idea to make sure
that when editing text you leave it set
| | 02:36 | to the HTML Editor.
| | 02:38 | And this next feature, AJAX and JavaScript,
| | 02:40 | if you're going follow along with me
throughout the rest of the title, I would
| | 02:43 | suggest setting this one to Yes.
| | 02:45 | That way when I go ahead and I show
some feature that uses AJAX or JavaScript,
| | 02:50 | that function will work on your system
the same way that it's working on mine.
| | 02:54 | If you need assistive devices, such as
screen readers, you can go ahead and set
| | 02:57 | this next option to Yes,
| | 02:59 | but we are not going to do that right now.
| | 03:00 | But what I do want to call attention
to is this small yellow ball with the
| | 03:04 | question mark in it.
| | 03:05 | Moodle has built-in help and if you go
ahead and click on any of those little
| | 03:09 | yellow balls with the question mark in them,
| | 03:11 | it's going to pop up contextually
aware help that will let you know some
| | 03:15 | information about whatever
this option happens to be.
| | 03:18 | You can close it by hitting the
little X in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 03:21 | Now we have the next bit of
things already filled out.
| | 03:24 | So we'll go ahead and scroll
down here to the Description.
| | 03:26 | Now this is a general description about
you, and it can be a short bio if you'd like.
| | 03:31 | I am going to go ahead and just type
in here "Educational Technologist and
| | 03:38 | Instructional Designer."
| | 03:41 | If you'd like, you can go ahead and you
can format the information that you've
| | 03:44 | just typed in here using the WYSIWYG
Editor, or the What You See Is What You Get.
| | 03:48 | There is an entire chapter later on in
this title that will explain how to go
| | 03:52 | ahead and use all of these functions.
| | 03:54 | For now let's go ahead and scroll on
down a little bit further, and we are now in
| | 03:57 | the User picture section.
| | 03:58 | And anytime you make a post of any
content inside of Moodle users are able to
| | 04:03 | see your picture that's been
attached here, if you've put one.
| | 04:06 | Let's go ahead and post our image.
| | 04:09 | So we've got a link for New picture.
| | 04:11 | Go ahead and hit the Choose file
| | 04:12 | and this will bring up the standard
File picker that's gone throughout Moodle.
| | 04:16 | In an earlier movie, we went ahead
and posted an image inside of our
| | 04:20 | Private files section.
| | 04:21 | So we'll go ahead and click on
Private files on the left-hand side,
| | 04:25 | and here you can see we've got the
folder we set up, and there's the link to that
| | 04:29 | graphic, the headshot.jpg.
| | 04:30 | So go ahead and click one time on that,
and it's going to grab that file.
| | 04:34 | The Author and license
information is already set for us, so
| | 04:37 | we will go ahead and hit Select this file.
| | 04:39 | And for the Picture description, we will
just go ahead and put our name in here.
| | 04:43 | Now we'll scroll down a little bit further,
| | 04:46 | and we are going to go
here to the Interests section.
| | 04:49 | You can go ahead and fill in
some of your common interests.
| | 04:52 | This is a nice thing for your students
to be able to have some other things to
| | 04:56 | relate to you other than just the
specific class that you're teaching.
| | 04:59 | So I am going to put in a few of my
interests here: Sailing and Swimming and Kayaking.
| | 05:08 | Great! And we'll scroll down a little bit further,
and now we are down to the Optional section.
| | 05:13 | Here is where if you have a personal web
site that you would like to direct your
| | 05:17 | students to, you can type in that URL here.
| | 05:20 | If you have any of these other
different accounts, such as an ICQ or a Skype
| | 05:24 | account, an AOL Instant Messenger,
Yahoo!, MSN, you can go ahead and type that
| | 05:28 | information in here.
| | 05:29 | By default, the plug-ins are not
available right now inside of Moodle to be able
| | 05:34 | to link to those services.
| | 05:35 | But there are third parties that have
developed modules that will allow you,
| | 05:39 | for instance, to be able to make Skype calls
available directly from inside of your course.
| | 05:45 | Now the bottom sets of the Optional
information here, ID number, Institution,
| | 05:49 | these are a lot of times used by your
institution to fill in additional metadata
| | 05:54 | on your user account.
| | 05:55 | We are going to go ahead and leave
those blank for now and go ahead and hit the
| | 05:58 | Update profile button. And there we go!
| | 06:01 | When screen refreshes, you can see that
our picture that we posted is showing up
| | 06:05 | here on the left-hand side.
| | 06:07 | And we've got our little description here,
| | 06:09 | and we even have our interests listed in here.
| | 06:12 | So that worked out pretty well.
| | 06:14 | Now one quick note about the
images that you're posting:
| | 06:17 | it will be a good idea to use an
image that's cropped in a square format.
| | 06:21 | I've gone ahead and made this
image to be 200 pixels x 200 pixels.
| | 06:26 | And you can use most of the
common different formats of images.
| | 06:29 | I've gone ahead and used a
JPEG image for this image.
| | 06:33 | So that's all there is to setting up your
personal preferences in your personal profiles.
| | 06:38 | If you needed to do something like
change your password, you're able to do that
| | 06:41 | right here on the left-hand side.
| | 06:43 | And you can also access the
built-in messaging service within Moodle.
| | 06:48 | If we go ahead and click on that link
right here, this is going to bring up a
| | 06:52 | set of preferences for us to be able
to say how we would like to be contacted
| | 06:56 | depending on the various different
systems that are available inside of Moodle.
| | 07:00 | So we can just scroll
through these pretty quickly.
| | 07:03 | We've got Assignment notifications
are both set to Email, whether we are
| | 07:07 | logged in or logged out.
| | 07:08 | Course creation request, approvals,
I am going to set that to Email.
| | 07:12 | Course rejection notifications,
Essay graded notifications, Personal
| | 07:17 | messages between users.
| | 07:18 | This is one that may be appropriate for you
| | 07:20 | if you want when you're online to have a
pop-up so that if another user wants to
| | 07:25 | message you through Moodle,
that will just pop up a pop-up.
| | 07:28 | Otherwise, if you're offline,
it's going to send you an email.
| | 07:31 | Feedback reminder, if there's some
feedback that's required, whether or not
| | 07:35 | you've subscribed to
posts and some notifications.
| | 07:38 | We can scroll on down to the very bottom.
| | 07:40 | Now one final feature that is a great
new little addition here, and that is for
| | 07:46 | the Email notifications
| | 07:48 | many institutions require that all
communication go directly through a
| | 07:52 | particular campus email system.
| | 07:54 | And many of us have our own outside
email accounts that we would like to use.
| | 07:59 | So if you'd like to fill in your
outside email account that may be outside from
| | 08:04 | your institution, or one that you kind
of check all the time and you may not
| | 08:07 | check your institution mail all the time,
| | 08:08 | you can go ahead and fill that in right here,
| | 08:11 | and you can then hit the Update profile
button, and those preferences should be saved.
| | 08:15 | So let's go ahead and return back to the
Home link in the upper left-hand corner.
| | 08:20 | And that gives you a quick
walkthrough of the personal profile settings
| | 08:24 | for Moodle 2.0.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing course settings| 00:00 | Now let's go ahead and look at some
of the various different course setting
| | 00:03 | options that are available
to you within your course.
| | 00:06 | The first thing you want to do is go
ahead and click on the name of your course.
| | 00:09 | That should be listed right here in
the middle, in the My courses section.
| | 00:12 | I'm going to me ahead and click on Coral Reef
Ecology and that will take me into my course.
| | 00:16 | Now what you see and what your
students see is pretty much exactly the same,
| | 00:20 | although you do get a few more
options over here on the left-hand column in
| | 00:23 | Settings, and you have this magical
button up here in the upper right, the
| | 00:27 | Turn editing on button.
| | 00:28 | We are going to be using that one
quite a bit throughout the training.
| | 00:30 | But what we want to go to is we want to
go directly into the Settings block on
| | 00:35 | the left-hand side and click
on the link for Edit settings.
| | 00:40 | We saw a similar page to this when
we were setting up this course in the
| | 00:43 | administrative movie, but let's go
through now in a little bit more detail and
| | 00:47 | fine-tune some of these settings
specifically for how we want to work.
| | 00:51 | So we are just going to start here at the top.
| | 00:53 | The first item is Category, and a lot of
times this is going to be chosen for you
| | 00:56 | by your institution if your institution
has set up their Moodle server, so that
| | 01:01 | they've got categories that break down
either by department or by term or by
| | 01:05 | year. And a lot of that will be already be
set for you, as well as the course full
| | 01:10 | name and short name; both
of these items are required.
| | 01:13 | As we mentioned earlier, the Course ID
is oftentimes used as a reference number
| | 01:17 | that will link your course into
your campus information system.
| | 01:20 | So this top part is generally not
used by the teachers quite so much.
| | 01:24 | If we scroll down just a little bit
though, we get here to the Course summary.
| | 01:27 | In the Course summary we just filled in
a general course on Coral Reef Ecology
| | 01:31 | in an earlier movie,
| | 01:32 | this is normally the place where you
can post exactly what it is that your
| | 01:36 | course is going to be teaching, so
that when a student first goes on to their
| | 01:40 | Moodle server and they see your course listed
| | 01:42 | they can find a more detailed
description as to what your course is.
| | 01:46 | If I quickly jump down into my doc,
I can go over to Microsoft Word where I have
| | 01:51 | a copy of the course syllabi.
| | 01:54 | Right here at the top of file I've
got the Objectives for the course, and
| | 01:58 | this is a pretty good overview as to what we
are going to be doing inside of this course.
| | 02:02 | So rather than retyping all of this,
I am going to go ahead and just select it
| | 02:05 | and copy it, using Command+C or Ctrl+C
on my keyboard. Then I will go ahead and
| | 02:10 | minimize this out of the way.
| | 02:12 | Come on back over here into Moodle.
| | 02:13 | I am just going to go ahead and select
"A general course on coral reef ecology,"
| | 02:17 | and paste using Command+V or Ctrl+V. If I
wanted to, I could go in and apply some formatting.
| | 02:22 | In this case, I don't really need to.
| | 02:24 | So let's scroll down a little bit further,
and let's look at the next section here.
| | 02:28 | The very next option here is Format and
when we click on this menu, there are a
| | 02:33 | couple of different options for you.
| | 02:35 | There is a SCORM and a Social format.
| | 02:37 | Now these are generally not used for
full classes that are being taught.
| | 02:42 | The two options that are generally used
by teachers for their classes more than
| | 02:47 | likely are going to be
Topics format or Weekly format.
| | 02:49 | The Topics format takes the center
section of your course and breaks it down as
| | 02:54 | a series of topics that you will be
covering, or units that you are going to be
| | 02:57 | covering, throughout your course.
| | 02:59 | The Weekly format is pretty much exactly that.
| | 03:01 | It takes and looks at the start date
of your course and then calculates out
| | 03:05 | the number of weeks in the term and gives you
one block of content for each week of the term.
| | 03:10 | This is the preferred way that many
faculty choose to organize their courses,
| | 03:15 | because it keeps the students
all together on the amount of information that is
| | 03:19 | being presented as the course
unfolds throughout the semester.
| | 03:23 | So we are going to go ahead and
make sure we are set to Weekly format.
| | 03:26 | Then we want to know how many weeks
of the term that our course is going to
| | 03:30 | run for and when we looked at our
syllabi, we can see that our course is going
| | 03:34 | to run for 15 weeks,
| | 03:36 | so we have got that set here. And that's
going to create 15 open blocks for us to
| | 03:40 | be able to post our content in.
| | 03:42 | We can then set up the Course start date,
and I have gone ahead already and set
| | 03:46 | this to the 23rd of January 2012.
| | 03:50 | Then we are going to go
on here in Hidden sections.
| | 03:53 | Hidden sections are completely invisible, or
you can have them show as a collapsed view.
| | 03:59 | Now I like to go ahead and leave these
completely invisible, so that when your
| | 04:03 | students start are working through your
course material, you can hide specific weeks
| | 04:08 | or specific sections of your course
content and the students don't even see it,
| | 04:12 | so they're not tempted to try and look
in and see what's wrong with this, why
| | 04:16 | can't I see what's in here?
| | 04:17 | It allows you to have a little bit more
control to keep the entire class moving
| | 04:21 | forward at a steady pace.
| | 04:23 | If you are setting your course up
so that you want to have it so that the
| | 04:26 | students come in and they work entirely
at their own pace and are able to work
| | 04:29 | through all of the content,
| | 04:30 | you may want to go ahead and leave this
set so that hidden sections are shown in
| | 04:34 | the collapsed form, so the students
know where they're trying to get to.
| | 04:37 | They can see that there's more stuff
for them to go and do in the future.
| | 04:41 | The News items to show,
| | 04:43 | I like to leave this at a fairly small value.
| | 04:45 | I usually leave this at about 3 or 5.
| | 04:47 | So let's go ahead and set this down to 3.
| | 04:50 | And what this is going to do is in the
upper right-hand corner of our course, we
| | 04:53 | have had a latest news section for you
to post announcements and updates as to
| | 04:57 | information that's going to go on in
your class, and this is only going to show
| | 05:01 | the current last three items that
have been posted by you in that section.
| | 05:06 | They can still access all of the
latest news items from the News forum
| | 05:10 | that's always by default up in
the top block of your course.
| | 05:15 | The next option, Show Gradebook
to students, this is up to you;
| | 05:18 | it's a personal preference.
| | 05:19 | If you want your students to be able
to monitor their grades as you're going
| | 05:22 | along through the course, this will get
you out of the hassle of having students
| | 05:27 | constantly ask you, how am I doing
in this course, what's my grade?
| | 05:30 | If you leave this set on,
and you're keeping your grades inside of your
| | 05:33 | Gradebook in Moodle, then your students
don't ever have to go and ask you that
| | 05:37 | again; they can just
click and look for themselves.
| | 05:39 | So we are going to leave at set to Yes.
| | 05:41 | Show activity report,
| | 05:43 | I like to leave this set to No.
| | 05:44 | What this means is that as students
are coming in and they're working through
| | 05:48 | the course material within your course,
Moodle will keep track of every single
| | 05:52 | thing that they do; every time they
hand in an assignment, every time they log in,
| | 05:55 | when they click on a resource to be
able watch it, it's going to keep track of
| | 05:59 | all of that. And if you have the
activity report shown, they can they can see
| | 06:03 | what Moodle has been keeping track of for them.
| | 06:05 | That may not be the kind of thing that you
want your students to constantly be seeing.
| | 06:09 | That information is always available
to you, and we'll look at that in the
| | 06:13 | Reports section in a later movie for
the teacher. But for students, I would go
| | 06:18 | ahead and leave this set to No.
| | 06:19 | The Maximum upload size,
| | 06:22 | generally I like to set this value
to the highest value that has been made
| | 06:25 | available to me by my IT department
who is managing the Moodle server.
| | 06:30 | So in this case I will go ahead
and set this to 128 MB here.
| | 06:33 | That way later on inside of the course
when I am creating an assignment, or I
| | 06:37 | am creating a forum, and I want to set
up the students to be able to upload a
| | 06:41 | file, I have the maximum amount of
flexibility in how large or how small I want to
| | 06:46 | make the files that the students upload.
| | 06:49 | Here we will set that to the high value.
| | 06:51 | Scroll down a little bit further.
| | 06:53 | The next area is for guest access.
| | 06:55 | If you want other members of your
campus community to be able to access your
| | 06:59 | course, go ahead and set this to Yes,
and that means anyone, regardless of
| | 07:03 | whether or not they're enrolled in your
course or not, is able to get access to it.
| | 07:07 | Now you can also set this to Yes,
and anyone can get in here, or you can come
| | 07:11 | down here to where it says
Password, and with it set to Yes,
| | 07:14 | you can add a password, such as 12345.
| | 07:19 | I'll go ahead and unmask that, so
we can see what we typed in there.
| | 07:22 | You can add a password in here,
and then you have opened up your course to
| | 07:27 | anyone, but you are requiring them to
type in a password that you give them.
| | 07:31 | It's a way of opening up your course to
people who are not necessarily enrolled,
| | 07:35 | but you are not opening it up to everyone.
| | 07:37 | In general, for the training purposes
here, I am going to go ahead and leave
| | 07:41 | this set with no password and set to No.
| | 07:45 | Let's scroll down a little bit.
| | 07:47 | Moodle has the ability to set up
and manage groups within your course.
| | 07:51 | So later on in this course we are going
to come back in at a later time and turn
| | 07:55 | these features on, but for right now
we're going to go ahead and leave Group
| | 07:58 | mode off, to simplify some of the
earlier set up in the earlier content that we
| | 08:02 | are going to go through.
| | 08:03 | Let's go on down here to the
next section, which is Availability.
| | 08:07 | By default, this one is turned on, so it
says, "This course is available to students."
| | 08:11 | If this option is set to This course
is not available to students, then any
| | 08:16 | student, whether or not they are enrolled in
your course, is not able to get into your course.
| | 08:21 | So before the term starts if you're
still building content and you are building
| | 08:25 | material, but you don't want other
students to be able to log in and see what's
| | 08:28 | there, go ahead and leave this
option set to the course is not available.
| | 08:32 | But as soon as your course starts, you
want to make sure that you come in here
| | 08:36 | to the Settings and you select this option
and set This course is available to students.
| | 08:41 | The course will then show up
right on their Moodle homepage.
| | 08:43 | They will be able to click on it and
go in and access all of the material and
| | 08:46 | information within your course.
| | 08:49 | If you want to force the language to a
specific target language, then you're
| | 08:54 | able to do that here.
| | 08:56 | Now the additional language packages
would need to be installed on your server
| | 09:01 | to have them to be available to you,
and you could contact your IT department to
| | 09:04 | have them install those for you.
| | 09:06 | And this may be a very useful thing, for
instance, if you're teaching a language
| | 09:10 | course and you want all of the
material to be in the target language that you
| | 09:14 | are teaching, say Spanish or
French or Chinese or German.
| | 09:17 | For now we are going to
leave it as Do not force.
| | 09:19 | And the final section down here, Role renaming,
| | 09:22 | in an earlier movie we showed some of
the various different system roles that
| | 09:26 | are available, and these are the actual
names of those roles: Manager, Teacher,
| | 09:31 | Non-editing teacher, and Student.
| | 09:33 | A Non-editing teacher technically
is the teaching assistant usually.
| | 09:38 | What we did is we typed in TA.
| | 09:40 | This way throughout Moodle anytime the
role name of Non-editing teacher within
| | 09:46 | our course would show up
| | 09:47 | it will actually display as TA.
| | 09:49 | Now you would not enter in the name of your TA.
| | 09:52 | So, in this case if I had Sally as my TA,
that wouldn't make any sense at all.
| | 09:58 | What it really just wants to know is,
what do we want to call that role?
| | 10:00 | So we are going to change it back to TA.
| | 10:03 | We will go and hit the Save
changes link down here at the bottom.
| | 10:05 | It will set up those settings that
we've made in all of our preferences, and
| | 10:10 | that's all we need to look at
for editing our course settings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing the header block| 00:00 | Inside of every course in Moodle the
main content of the course is located in
| | 00:05 | the center section,
| | 00:07 | and it's broken down as a
series of blocks of content.
| | 00:10 | Since we set up this course as a
weekly course, you can see that there's one
| | 00:13 | block for each week of the term.
| | 00:15 | At the very top of the course though,
there's one special block called the header block,
| | 00:20 | and this is a place to post general
information that's relevant to the entire course.
| | 00:25 | It's a good place to post a little
header graphic maybe or a description of your
| | 00:28 | course and a good place to post
things like your course syllabi,
| | 00:32 | and that's what we're going to
get started doing in this movie.
| | 00:34 | So to begin, go to the upper right-hand corner
and click on the button for Turn editing on.
| | 00:39 | Now this button is the first button
that you want to click on when you first
| | 00:43 | come into your course all the time as
the instructor, because this is the button
| | 00:47 | that gives all of the
different controls for your course.
| | 00:51 | Now to edit the header block, we can
begin by coming up here to the very top
| | 00:55 | of the header block and click on the
little icon of the hand with the pencil
| | 00:59 | which says Edit summary.
| | 01:00 | This will take us into
the summary for this block.
| | 01:05 | Every single one of the blocks within
your course, all of the weekly blocks as
| | 01:09 | well as the header block, has
one of these summary headers.
| | 01:12 | Now there are a couple of ways to go
about setting up this header, and we're
| | 01:15 | going to step though each of them real quick.
| | 01:17 | The first one is to go ahead and
uncheck the Use default section name.
| | 01:22 | And then in the blank for Section
name, we'll simply type in the name of
| | 01:26 | the course, BIOL432:Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 01:33 | We'll come on down at the bottom and
hit Save changes to see what effect
| | 01:36 | that has in our course.
| | 01:39 | Now we can see that there is a light
header that's shown up here at the very top
| | 01:43 | of the header block that just
denotes what the name of the course is.
| | 01:46 | You can see that it's listed in gray
just as the dates are listed in gray at the
| | 01:50 | top of each of their blocks.
| | 01:52 | So that's what that little section does.
| | 01:54 | Let's go ahead and hit the Edit
summary link again and click back on the Use
| | 01:59 | default section name so that
nothing shows up in that part.
| | 02:03 | Now we'll come down here to the Summary section.
| | 02:05 | In this part we could type
in the same thing, BIOL432:
| | 02:11 | Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 02:14 | And we can apply some formatting to this.
| | 02:15 | We'll go ahead and select the text and
come up here to the third dropdown menu
| | 02:21 | that says Paragraph, click on
that, and come on down to Heading 1.
| | 02:24 | And this will apply a little
bit of HTML styles to this.
| | 02:28 | It makes some nice big text there,
and then we'll come down at the end of this,
| | 02:32 | hit Return, and we'll type in that simple
tagline: "A general course on Coral Reef Ecology."
| | 02:41 | We'll go ahead down at the bottom
and click the Save changes button,
| | 02:46 | and we can see how that looks.
| | 02:47 | It applies the HTML formatting for us,
for the Heading 1, and then it has our
| | 02:51 | single line of text description underneath.
| | 02:54 | Well, that does work,
but its a little plain vanilla;
| | 02:56 | it's not quite very nice.
| | 02:58 | Let's go ahead and let's
edit this one more time.
| | 03:01 | I'm going to hit the Edit summary.
| | 03:03 | This time I'm going go ahead and just
select all of the text that we've typed in
| | 03:07 | so far and I'm going to hit Delete
on my keyboard to get rid of it all.
| | 03:11 | And what I've done is I've gone
ahead and I've created a header graphic.
| | 03:16 | And we're going to insert that right here.
| | 03:17 | So what we're going to do is in this
lower line where you see the little icon of
| | 03:21 | a tree, go ahead and click on that
| | 03:23 | and that's going to take us
to the Insert/edit image tool.
| | 03:27 | Let's go ahead and click the Find or
upload an image link right here at the top
| | 03:31 | and it takes us to our standard File picker.
| | 03:34 | We can go over here to our Upload a file,
and we're going to go over and hit the Browse button.
| | 03:39 | And we're going to go into the
Chapter 02 exercise files, and go ahead and select
| | 03:44 | the logoBIOL432.png.
| | 03:49 | If you don't have access to this, you can
go ahead and create your own header graphic.
| | 03:53 | This is just a very simple file.
| | 03:54 | It's about 500 pixels x 80 pixels high,
and it's just got some text written in here.
| | 04:00 | So go ahead and select
that and hit the Open button.
| | 04:02 | And I'm going to leave the Save as
blank, because the name that I've chosen in
| | 04:07 | file name is just fine.
| | 04:09 | It's got my author and a specific
license, all rights reserved, and I'll go ahead
| | 04:13 | and upload this file.
| | 04:14 | And you can see that
image gets added right here.
| | 04:18 | You don't want to just go ahead and hit Insert;
| | 04:20 | what you want to do is you really do
need to go into the Image description and
| | 04:24 | fill something in here.
| | 04:25 | This is going to make your image 508-compliant.
| | 04:29 | It's going to accessible to screen readers.
| | 04:31 | So we're going to go ahead and
type in BIOL432:Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 04:40 | Go ahead and hit the Insert button,
| | 04:42 | and that image is inserted
right here at the top of our page.
| | 04:46 | Go ahead and hit Save changes. And there we go!
| | 04:49 | We now have our Coral Reef Ecology with
a nice graphic up at the top, and we've
| | 04:54 | been able to include all of the
pertinent information for our course.
| | 04:58 | We've got the course number, we've
got when the course meets, and the
| | 05:01 | room number information.
| | 05:03 | If you wanted to add some additional
course description information, you could
| | 05:07 | go back into the Edit and add
that underneath of the text.
| | 05:10 | But I like having my
screen nice and clean like this.
| | 05:12 | And in the next movie, we'll go
ahead and post our course syllabi into
| | 05:16 | the header section.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting a course syllabus| 00:00 | Perhaps, the most common first thing
that a teacher wants to do inside of the
| | 00:04 | Moodle course is to post their course syllabi,
| | 00:07 | and that's what we are going to do right now.
| | 00:09 | The first thing you want to do is make
sure that editing is turned on, so make
| | 00:11 | sure you have hit the little button
here in the upper right-hand corner, and
| | 00:14 | then up here in the Header block, go ahead
and click on the dropdown for Add a resource.
| | 00:19 | And the first item here is File, so go
ahead and select File and this will bring
| | 00:24 | up the Add a file page inside of Moodle.
| | 00:27 | We will give this file a name--in
this case we are just going to type in
| | 00:31 | "Syllabus"--and under the Description,
we are going to go ahead and just type in
| | 00:37 | "The course syllabus."
| | 00:40 | Go ahead and scroll on down a little
bit further and under the Content section,
| | 00:43 | hit the button for Add.
| | 00:45 | This is going to take us to our standard
File picker inside of Moodle, and we are
| | 00:49 | on the Upload a file link, and we are
going to come over here to the attachment,
| | 00:53 | hit the Browse button,
| | 00:54 | and inside of the Chapter 02, exercise
files we have got a copy of the Syllabus.doc.
| | 01:00 | If you have syllabi in a newer
format, either a DOCX or a PDF file or any of
| | 01:06 | those other formats, those
will be just fine as well.
| | 01:09 | We will go ahead and just select
our syllabus and hit the Open button.
| | 01:12 | And we have all the rest of
information set up properly here.
| | 01:15 | We will just go ahead and hit the
Upload this file button, and we can see the
| | 01:18 | file is posted right
here inside of Content area.
| | 01:21 | Let's go ahead and scroll on down a little bit.
| | 01:24 | In the Options section,
the first option is Display > Automatic.
| | 01:28 | When we click that dropdown menu there
are a couple of choices available to us:
| | 01:32 | Embed, Force download, Open, or In pop-up.
| | 01:36 | I'd suggest we go ahead leave this to
Automatic; the Moodle developers have done
| | 01:39 | a great job of making this
Automatic feature work very well,
| | 01:42 | so when a user clicks on the link for
your syllabus, depending on how their
| | 01:47 | machine is set up, it will either open
directly in the browser, or it will download
| | 01:52 | that file directly onto their computer.
| | 01:55 | Now we don't need to display the
resource name, but we are going to leave the
| | 01:58 | Display resource description checked.
| | 02:00 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit
further, and we've got the Common module settings.
| | 02:05 | For Visibility, we want to go
ahead and leave this set to Show.
| | 02:09 | Your two options are Show and Hide,
and if you were building content ahead of
| | 02:14 | when your students were going to be
looking at it and you don't want them to
| | 02:17 | quite see it yet, but they're in your course
and they are already working with the material,
| | 02:21 | you can go in here and you can hide
specific content and then come back into the
| | 02:25 | Edit feature and show it back to them later.
| | 02:28 | In this case with the course syllabi we
want to have that visible all the time,
| | 02:31 | so we will leave that to show.
| | 02:33 | We are going ignore the ID number for right now.
| | 02:35 | Go ahead and click the Save and
return to course, and there we go.
| | 02:39 | We are taken back into our course,
and if we scroll up just a little bit, we can
| | 02:44 | see how this all looks together.
| | 02:45 | We've got our header graphic, and we
have our News forum here that we are going
| | 02:49 | to go into in the future movie,
and underneath that we have our syllabus.
| | 02:54 | I'd like to have my syllabi be the
very first item that's available to my
| | 02:58 | students directly under the header
graphic, but Moodle has gone ahead and it's put
| | 03:03 | it down here below the News forum.
| | 03:04 | Well, it's very easy to do.
| | 03:06 | If we look at this very first icon here,
just to the right of the word Syllabus
| | 03:11 | we have a little crosshairs arrow.
| | 03:14 | We can click and drag that.
| | 03:15 | We are going to drag it just up above
the News forum and drop it in place, and
| | 03:19 | now we've been able to reorder these items.
| | 03:21 | To see what your students would see,
we will just come on up here to the
| | 03:24 | upper right and click the button for
Turn editing off, and that's what your
| | 03:28 | students would see when they come
into your class. They get the nice header
| | 03:31 | graphic here and a link to the
syllabi, and they can click on that link to
| | 03:35 | the syllabi and their browser is going
to automatically try and download and
| | 03:39 | open that file for them.
| | 03:40 | That's exactly what we want.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Communicating news to students| 00:00 | One of the most common things that all
faculty want to do with their students
| | 00:04 | is to communicate news, updates,
and announcements out to their students in an
| | 00:10 | easy and effective way.
| | 00:12 | They also want to have a way to be
able to communicate out to the students
| | 00:15 | where it not just goes to their email
but is recorded in some other location, and
| | 00:20 | the tool for that in Moodle is
called the Latest News section.
| | 00:23 | It's usually located up here in the
upper right-hand corner of your Moodle
| | 00:27 | course in a block called Latest news.
| | 00:30 | It's very easy to use.
| | 00:31 | All you need to do is hit the
link that says Add a new topic.
| | 00:34 | This will take you to the General
news and announcements news forum that is
| | 00:39 | available in all Moodle courses.
| | 00:41 | Filling out the information is quite easy.
| | 00:43 | You simply give the message a subject.
| | 00:46 | In this case, we will send a welcome
message and let the students know that
| | 00:48 | we've posted the course syllabi to our course.
| | 00:51 | So we will say, "Welcome to Coral Reef
Ecology" in the Subject line and then down
| | 00:58 | here in the Message section we will
just go ahead and say--scroll down a
| | 01:03 | little bit further.
| | 01:04 | Here you can add an attachment if you'd
like. If you would want to go ahead and
| | 01:08 | post the Course syllabi again to have
that go out to the students, we can go
| | 01:12 | ahead and do that as well. Go ahead
and hit the Add button and the standard
| | 01:15 | File picker shows up, and we will come
over here to the Recent files link, go
| | 01:20 | ahead and click on that one time,
and you can see all the recent files that we
| | 01:23 | have used so far throughout our
training, and here's the Syllabus.doc.
| | 01:27 | We can go ahead and click on that one time.
| | 01:29 | Because Moodle remembers that file was
there, we can go ahead and access it and
| | 01:32 | go ahead and hit the Select
this file button, and there we go.
| | 01:35 | We've attached the document here.
| | 01:38 | The final option here is there
is a check box here for Mail now.
| | 01:41 | Now if we don't check this, most Moodle
servers are set up so that about every
| | 01:45 | 30 minutes or so all of the email that
has been set up for all the different
| | 01:50 | courses and all the different accounts
will get send out in batches, but if you
| | 01:55 | need to get your message out right now
at this very instant, you can go ahead
| | 01:58 | and check the Mail now button, and if
your server has been configured to do this
| | 02:03 | and you hit Post to forum,
| | 02:04 | that email message should go
out to all of your students.
| | 02:07 | I am going to go ahead and uncheck that,
because I don't need the message to go
| | 02:09 | out right this second.
| | 02:11 | This is not quite that time sensitive.
| | 02:13 | We'll go ahead and hit the Post to
forum link, and it's giving us a warning,
| | 02:16 | letting us know that the post was sent out.
| | 02:18 | Now when we return back to our course, a
couple of little things to note. First of
| | 02:23 | all, in the Latest news section we can
see that I have posted at this date and
| | 02:28 | time the first message "Welcome to
Coral Reef Ecology," and there is a small link
| | 02:32 | for more that I can click on and get
to more information and see the complete
| | 02:37 | post, including seeing a copy of
syllabus document that I've posted.
| | 02:41 | Now remember when we set up in our profile,
we set up our profile picture. Here we go.
| | 02:45 | Here is our profile picture showing
up here, attached to our post as well.
| | 02:50 | That's one way that we can get into this.
| | 02:52 | Now if this was a question or a topic
that needed some additional discussion,
| | 02:57 | your students would be able to come in
here and they could reply to this message
| | 03:01 | and have additional
information to post back to it.
| | 03:04 | Let's go ahead and go back to the course.
| | 03:06 | We will look at another way to get
access to this Latest news section.
| | 03:09 | So go ahead and hit link to BIOL432.
| | 03:13 | That'll take us right back to our course.
| | 03:15 | If you hit Home, you are going to go all the
way back to the homepage of your Moodle site.
| | 03:18 | So here we are back at our course.
| | 03:21 | Right here in our header
block we have the News forum.
| | 03:24 | Now this News forum link here is the
exact same thing as all the content that
| | 03:28 | gets displayed over here in the Latest
news block, but it will present it to us
| | 03:32 | in a little bit different format.
| | 03:33 | So we'll go ahead and hit the News
forum, and here you will be able to see a
| | 03:36 | listing of all of the different topics that
have been posted, who the post was started by.
| | 03:42 | You will be able to keep track of
any replies or unread messages that you
| | 03:45 | haven't looked at in here, and you can
also see when the last post was made.
| | 03:51 | Let's go ahead and go back to our
course homepage, click on BIOL432 in your
| | 03:56 | breadcrumbs right up there, and that's
how you use the Latest news section to be
| | 04:00 | able to communicate out to all of your students.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing files and folders| 00:00 | We've already seen how to upload an
individual file into the My private files
| | 00:05 | section, and we've even created a
folder to be able to contain a lot of the
| | 00:09 | materials for our course, but we were only
able to upload a single document at a time,
| | 00:14 | and in this movie I'd like to show you
how you can go ahead and upload multiple
| | 00:18 | documents at a time using the Zip function.
| | 00:22 | So, the first thing we want to set up
here inside of our course is a way to be
| | 00:26 | able to quickly access
our Private files section.
| | 00:29 | So, to do that, make sure you have
editing turned on and then scroll down in
| | 00:33 | the right-hand column. You should find an
Add a block block and a dropdown menu for Add.
| | 00:39 | We'll go ahead and select that
and click on My private files.
| | 00:42 | Now, the screen will refresh,
| | 00:44 | and we'll scroll back down,
and there is the Private files section.
| | 00:47 | You can see the folder that we created
previously and the JPEG image that we
| | 00:51 | uploaded for our profile picture,
and there is a single link here that says
| | 00:55 | Mange my private files.
| | 00:56 | Go ahead and click on that, and it's going
to take us to the private files manager.
| | 01:01 | We ca, of course go into the folder
for BIOL432, and we're able to see the one
| | 01:06 | lecture file that we posted earlier,
but if we were to click the Add button,
| | 01:11 | we'd still only be able to
upload one file at a time.
| | 01:15 | It would be nice to be able to do multiples.
| | 01:17 | In order to do that, we need to a
little bit of set up on our desktop first.
| | 01:22 | So, let's come on up here and
minimize our browser, and now we are back in
| | 01:27 | our exercise files.
| | 01:29 | We have a bunch of documents that are in
here that we want to upload all at one time.
| | 01:34 | We want to upload some graphics and some
additional presentations which are listed here.
| | 01:39 | Now to do a multiple selection on
the Mac, you are going to hold down the
| | 01:43 | Command key, and on the PC, you are
going to hold down the Ctrl key, and
| | 01:47 | simply click on the
assignments.png. We are going skip the PDF for
| | 01:52 | Lecture_01, but we are going to
select the PowerPoint, the keynote for
| | 01:55 | Lecutre_02, another PDF, another PowerPoint.
| | 01:59 | We are going to get the PNG file
for the lecture materials and the one
| | 02:03 | for reading materials.
| | 02:04 | Now, that I have all of those done,
I can let go of my Command or my Ctrl key,
| | 02:09 | and now if you are on the Mac, you can
Ctrl+Click, or on the PC, right-click. And the Mac side
| | 02:15 | you are going to go ahead and select
Compress 8 Items from the dropdown menu.
| | 02:19 | On the PC, you are going to
select Send To and Compressed (zipped).
| | 02:24 | Now, what your operating system is
going to do is it's going to take all of
| | 02:28 | these files and stuff them all
together in this one single document.
| | 02:32 | On the Mac, it's called Archive; on the PC,
| | 02:34 | it will choose a different name, but
| | 02:36 | it will have the .zip file extension,
and this one file has all of these other
| | 02:40 | documents contained in it,
and that's what we are going to upload.
| | 02:43 | We are going to essentially kind of
pull a fast one on Moodle by telling it
| | 02:47 | we're only uploading one file, but in
reality, we've got a whole bunch in here.
| | 02:51 | Let's go ahead and go back to our browser.
| | 02:53 | We are going to go back down to our dock and
grab that, and we're going to come back up here.
| | 02:57 | We are going to hit the Add button,
and we're going to make sure we are on the
| | 03:00 | Upload a file section, and we're going
to simply hit the Browse button, and we're
| | 03:05 | going to navigate to the exercise files
and find that Archive.zip file, select
| | 03:11 | it, and then come on down
to the bottom and click Open.
| | 03:14 | Now, we don't need to
save it as any special name.
| | 03:17 | We'll just go ahead and hit the Upload this
file button and the Archive.zip came up here.
| | 03:22 | Now if you look just to the right of
that file, you'll see a little menu icon.
| | 03:27 | We'll go ahead and hit that, and it
gives us a few options, and the second option
| | 03:32 | in the list is the one that we want, Unzip.
| | 03:34 | Go ahead and click Unzip and all of
those files that were packaged up have now
| | 03:39 | been expanded out into our file structure.
| | 03:42 | Now, you'll notice that in my screen
I've got both Archive.zip and I have this
| | 03:47 | _MACOSX, and I have that one
because I packaged this up on a Mac.
| | 03:52 | If you did this on PC, you wouldn't
have this file. And what we are going to
| | 03:56 | do is we are going to go ahead and
get rid of both of these documents,
| | 03:58 | so we can just click the little menu
next to the _MACOSX file and select Delete
| | 04:04 | and confirm, yes, we want to do that,
and we can also get rid of the ZIP file.
| | 04:08 | So we can hit the little menu next to it,
come on down here to Delete that one,
| | 04:12 | and say Yes, and there we go.
| | 04:14 | That has all those files in.
| | 04:16 | This is the part that is going to get
you, over and over and over, and that is,
| | 04:22 | you think you've got all of these
files up here and everything is great and
| | 04:26 | golden, but nothing has been saved.
| | 04:29 | You have to come down here to the
bottom and you have to click Save changes.
| | 04:33 | If you don't click Save changes,
those uploads that you made are not going to
| | 04:38 | be retained, and as soon as you click
Save changes, Moodle returns you right
| | 04:42 | back to your course.
| | 04:43 | You don't have to navigate anywhere else.
| | 04:45 | It's going to take you right back here.
| | 04:47 | If you're trying to get back into your
course and you notice there is no link in there,
| | 04:51 | that's because you haven't saved.
| | 04:53 | So, take that as a warning.
Go ahead and save that.
| | 04:56 | Let's go ahead and check our work.
| | 04:57 | Scroll on down and look for the My private
files block down in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 05:03 | You can hit the little plus sign next to
the BIOL432 folder, and there are all of
| | 05:08 | your files that you are
able to access right from here.
| | 05:11 | Where this becomes incredibly helpful--
if we go ahead scroll back on up in the
| | 05:15 | course--is if you click on Add a resource,
and we're going to just point to File
| | 05:22 | and do this in the top header block,
and we're going to skip the top part
| | 05:25 | because we just want to
have a quick look at this.
| | 05:27 | Hit the Add button.
| | 05:29 | We can come over here to My private
files from the File picker, BIOL432, and
| | 05:35 | there are all of those
files that we're able to access.
| | 05:39 | It's exactly what we wanted.
| | 05:40 | So, I am going to go ahead close this
file picker and I am going to come on all
| | 05:45 | the way to the bottom and hit Cancel.
| | 05:48 | That's how you can better organize
your files and keep them organized.
| | 05:53 | Create some ZIP files on your local machine
and be able to batch-upload lots of files.
| | 05:58 | Many of you have already created an
entire folder that contains all of the
| | 06:02 | materials for your course, and a great
way to get all those materials posted up
| | 06:05 | into your Moodle course quickly so you
can start building and presenting those
| | 06:09 | files to your students is to
batch-upload them by creating a ZIP file.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting lecture slides| 00:00 | One of the most powerful features of
Moodle is its ability to post information,
| | 00:05 | resources, and documents to your
students, so that your students always have
| | 00:10 | access to the latest
information about your course.
| | 00:13 | In this movie we're going to go through
posting a lecture slide file, such as a
| | 00:18 | PowerPoint file, into your course, so that
your students always have access to it.
| | 00:23 | All you need to do is make
sure that editing is turned on.
| | 00:26 | You go to the appropriate week in your course.
| | 00:28 | In this case we're going to go to the
23rd January to 29 January week, and hit
| | 00:33 | the dropdown menu for Add a resource.
| | 00:35 | From here simply select the File option
and we'll be taken to the Add a new file
| | 00:41 | to this week option.
| | 00:42 | We're going to go ahead in the name
and simply type in "Lecture 1 Slides."
| | 00:48 | I like to put a dash in
here and then type in PPT.
| | 00:53 | You don't really need to put in that
this is a PowerPoint file or a Keynote file
| | 00:58 | or PDF because Moodle is going to
automatically detect that information from the
| | 01:03 | file extension itself and
it's going to post a small icon.
| | 01:07 | I like to do it just because it's
one more little piece of information that
| | 01:11 | the student gets just by simply looking
at the link, and they know then exactly
| | 01:15 | what kind of file that when
they click on they're going to get.
| | 01:18 | Here is the Lecture 1 Slides - PPT,
and then in the Description we'll put--go
| | 01:24 | ahead and scroll down a little bit and in
the Content section you click the Add button.
| | 01:30 | We're going to go to the Private files
section of the File picker, go into
| | 01:35 | BIOL432, and you want to look for the
Lecture_01_01.p and if it's displaying
| | 01:44 | more characters there for you, it's
going to be the full extension of that.
| | 01:47 | So we will just go ahead and click on that file.
| | 01:50 | It's got the PPT file extension on there.
| | 01:52 | We know who the author is,
and we'll simply hit Select this file.
| | 01:55 | The file gets attached right
here as part of the document.
| | 01:59 | Go and scroll on down to the
Options, Display > Automatic. That's fine.
| | 02:03 | Moodle is going to detect this file
and figure out what's the best option to
| | 02:07 | do with this document.
| | 02:08 | We do want it to be visible to our students,
| | 02:10 | so I'm going to simply hit
Save and return to course.
| | 02:13 | When the screen refreshes--let me
scroll back up here--we can see that Moodle
| | 02:18 | did in fact detect that this was a
PowerPoint presentation, and it posted the
| | 02:22 | little PowerPoint icon just
to the left of that slide.
| | 02:27 | You may want to post your slides as
both PowerPoint or Keynote format and as a
| | 02:32 | PDF format, so that any student,
regardless of if they have a copy of Microsoft
| | 02:36 | Office or if they've got a copy of
Keynote or whatever different presentation
| | 02:40 | program that you're using, that
they can always access the file.
| | 02:43 | So I like to go in here into the Add a
resource section and just add a second one.
| | 02:47 | I am going to go ahead and do this Lecture 1.
| | 02:51 | Actually, we can even go down here and
we can select it right from there, and we
| | 02:53 | can back up and type in
PDF as our file format there.
| | 03:01 | Scroll on down, hit the Add button.
Again in the Private files we're going to go
| | 03:06 | to BIOL432, and look for the PDF now this time.
| | 03:11 | Go ahead select that and hit select this file.
| | 03:14 | You can see it's got the PDF icon there.
| | 03:17 | We'll scroll on down.
| | 03:18 | We'll leave all of these other
settings just the same as they were, Save
| | 03:21 | and return to course.
| | 03:23 | Both of those files have
been added to our first week.
| | 03:26 | So if we click the Turn editing
off button so we see pretty much what
| | 03:30 | the student would see,
| | 03:31 | they can come into our course, they
can see our syllabi, and they can see
| | 03:34 | our lecture slides.
| | 03:35 | If they go ahead and click on one of
those files, they're presented with it.
| | 03:40 | There they have to click on
the file to actually view it.
| | 03:42 | It's going to open that
file up, and there we are.
| | 03:45 | We've got the slides to the
major tropical ecosystems.
| | 03:50 | I'll close that and we come on back to here,
and let's return back to our course by
| | 03:53 | clicking on the BIOL432 in the breadcrumbs.
| | 03:57 | Now if you're like to, you're able to
go in and post all of your slides for all
| | 04:02 | of the upcoming lectures.
| | 04:04 | It is a good idea to go ahead and post
your slides before your lectures; that way
| | 04:08 | students can have time to go
ahead and grab those files.
| | 04:11 | They can print them out.
| | 04:12 | They can copy them onto their computers.
| | 04:14 | And then when they come to class,
they've got the slides in front of them.
| | 04:17 | They can take notes on what is that
you're saying rather than trying to copy
| | 04:21 | down all the information that's on the slide.
| | 04:23 | They're also much more likely to
focus and pay attention on the information
| | 04:27 | that you're saying and that you're
discussing in class, rather than trying to
| | 04:32 | worry about copying down all of that
information, because they know they've got
| | 04:35 | it available to them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing course content| 00:00 | While it's perfectly fine to go
ahead and just post all of the lecture
| | 00:04 | slides--the materials that your
students are going be using--within the
| | 00:07 | particular week for your course,
| | 00:09 | it's much nicer to them to be able to
have a little bit of organization to
| | 00:14 | that information and a little bit
of context so that they know what
| | 00:18 | information is where and what they're
supposed to be doing, and that's what we
| | 00:21 | are going to set up in this movie.
| | 00:22 | To begin, let's go on the top of the
Week 1 block, which is designated as 23
| | 00:28 | January - 29 January, and simply hit the
hand with the pencil icon up here at the
| | 00:32 | top that says Edit summary.
| | 00:34 | This will take us into the Summary
section for this block, and every single block
| | 00:39 | in the center section of your
course has one of these summaries.
| | 00:42 | So what I'd like to do is I come up here
to the default section name and that is
| | 00:46 | presenting the date that you have up here.
| | 00:49 | I'd like to go ahead and uncheck that
so it no longer shows the date, and I type
| | 00:53 | in the week of the term because to me
| | 00:55 | that's how I really tend to think about
the content that's going on in my course.
| | 00:59 | What's the first week of the term?
| | 01:00 | It's the second week, so we are
going to put that in here, Week 1.
| | 01:04 | If you tend to keep track of your
courses in terms of the specific dates that
| | 01:08 | they're taking place in, then by all
means, go ahead and leave the default
| | 01:12 | section name checked so it shows the dates.
| | 01:15 | Inside of the Summary section, what I
am going to do is I am going to type in
| | 01:19 | the kind of overall theme
for this particular week.
| | 01:22 | So this is "Introduction to tropical
marine ecosystems." And to make this look a
| | 01:31 | little bit nicer, I am going to go
ahead and select that text and come up here
| | 01:35 | in my WYSIWYG Editor, the
What You See Is What You Get--
| | 01:38 | t his is my HTML Editor--and I'll hit the
dropdown menu for that and select Heading 1.
| | 01:44 | That is going to apply the current
Moodle theme's Heading 1 style, so
| | 01:49 | it's going to be bolded.
| | 01:50 | It's going to be a little bit larger to
see, but I'd like to customize it just
| | 01:54 | a little bit further.
| | 01:55 | I think the text, if I deselect it real
quick, you can see the text is black and
| | 01:59 | in order to match my header,
I'd like to make it blue.
| | 02:02 | So I am going to go ahead and select
all this text again and in the second row,
| | 02:06 | here you can see this icon that looks like a
little A and there's a line underneath it.
| | 02:10 | If I am going to hit--there's a small
dropdown arrow just to the right of it.
| | 02:13 | When we click that, we get a listing of all the different
colors that are readily available to us.
| | 02:19 | And I am going to come over here and select
this nice blue color right here at the top.
| | 02:23 | The code for it is 000080.
Go ahead and select that, and there we go;
| | 02:28 | now our text, the Introduction to
tropical marine ecosystems, is blue.
| | 02:33 | Let's go ahead and hit Return on our keyboard.
| | 02:35 | Now underneath of this section heading
it would be great to let the students
| | 02:40 | know exactly what that week's objective is.
| | 02:44 | Let's use the "tell them what we are
going to tell them and then tell them what
| | 02:47 | we are telling them."
| | 02:49 | It's a very simple line, but one of
these during-this-week-you-will-learn
| | 02:54 | statements really sets the learner up to know
what it is that they're going to be learning.
| | 02:59 | That's all we're going to
do inside of this section.
| | 03:01 | We can go ahead and scroll on down and
click the Save changes button, and now we
| | 03:06 | have our Week 1 heading is right here
in gray, and we have our little tagline
| | 03:11 | for that week. And we can see the
information is already starting to look a
| | 03:15 | little bit easier to navigate.
| | 03:18 | Now we are going to take this another
step further and we are going to further
| | 03:21 | organize the information that is going
to be down here in the lower part of our
| | 03:27 | content, and we are going to do that
by using something called a label.
| | 03:32 | So if we come over here and we click on
Add a resource and the Week 1 block and
| | 03:38 | we select Label from the dropdown menu,
we get a screen that looks very similar
| | 03:42 | to what we were just working on,
but this is a bit of content that is going to
| | 03:46 | be displayed right on this front page
of our course. And we could go ahead and
| | 03:51 | use the same trick that we just did--
type in the text, use a dropdown menu to
| | 03:56 | set it as a Heading 2 maybe and then
format it as a different color--but we've
| | 04:00 | gone ahead and we've created a
graphic in a graphic design program.
| | 04:05 | So instead of going ahead and typing
that in, we come up here and we find in the
| | 04:09 | third row, the Insert image.
| | 04:11 | It's an icon that looks a little bit
like a tree, go ahead and click on that and
| | 04:15 | it's going to bring up our Insert image tool.
| | 04:18 | We can click the Find or upload an image,
and we're inside of our Private files
| | 04:23 | in the File picker and go into our
BIOL432 folder, and it's going to show us just
| | 04:29 | the icons that are images.
| | 04:31 | So these are just the ones that are
related to what we are doing, and what we're
| | 04:35 | looking for is this middle image right here.
| | 04:36 | If we hover our mouse over it,
we can see it's lectureMaterials.
| | 04:39 | Now it makes it a little bit difficult
to read because the icons are all kind of
| | 04:44 | slammed together here.
| | 04:45 | If you want, you can hit this View as
list button and then when we open up our
| | 04:49 | BIOL course, it makes it a
little bit easier to see.
| | 04:52 | So lectureMaterials is the one
that we are looking for, .png.
| | 04:57 | It's got that selected. We have our name.
| | 04:59 | We are going to go ahead and select this file.
| | 05:01 | LECTURE MATERIALS, it's in a nice font.
| | 05:04 | We've gone ahead and spread out the
text on this font a little bit, so it's a
| | 05:07 | little easier to read on the eye,
and put a little line to underscore it.
| | 05:11 | For the Image description, again,
we want to make sure that our site is
| | 05:15 | accessible, so we're going to go ahead
and just type in "Lecture Materials" and
| | 05:21 | click the Insert button. That image is
going right in there, and we can simply hit
| | 05:26 | the Save and return to course button,
and now we have our LECTURE MATERIALS.
| | 05:31 | Now if you'll look though, our
lecture slides are up here and the lecture
| | 05:36 | heading is below it.
| | 05:38 | Well, that's very easy to remedy.
| | 05:40 | All we have to do is when you're
looking at any label or any bit of content
| | 05:45 | that's here on your Moodle page,
| | 05:47 | you'll notice all these little icons
that are just to the right-hand side, or
| | 05:50 | maybe they're showing up just
underneath of that bit of content, and these icons
| | 05:55 | allow you to control a lot of the
functionality for this piece of material.
| | 06:00 | So in this case, we'll take the LECTURE
MATERIALS, this little crosshairs at the
| | 06:03 | very beginning, the first icon,
| | 06:05 | we'll just click on that and drag it.
And we are able to drag it just up
| | 06:09 | above, and you can see a
small gray line that appears.
| | 06:12 | We get in the right spot.
| | 06:13 | We'll go ahead and drop it right there,
and now we have our major heading, and we
| | 06:18 | have our little graphic heading that's
showing up here, and we are going to do
| | 06:21 | one more thing to make this even cleaner.
| | 06:24 | And let's go ahead, just so you
can see what the current effect is,
| | 06:28 | I am going to go ahead and turn editing
off very briefly, and you can see that
| | 06:31 | right now, already the
information is a little bit easier to read.
| | 06:34 | It's much smoother. The flow of
information is better. But it would nice if
| | 06:39 | it was even more emphasized by having
these two slide presentations to be tabbed
| | 06:43 | in, so that they show up indented.
| | 06:45 | So this does look a
little bit more like a heading.
| | 06:48 | So let's go back here and click on Turn
editing on one more time and scroll back down.
| | 06:54 | Next to the PowerPoint file, you can see
there's the crosshairs in order to move
| | 06:58 | it, but the next icon is an
arrow that's pointing to the right;
| | 07:01 | it says Move right.
| | 07:02 | Go ahead and click that one time
and you'll see that the PowerPoint slide is just
| | 07:06 | tabbed in, just a little bit.
| | 07:08 | We'll do the same thing to
the PDF file, tab that one in.
| | 07:12 | Now that we have all these files
tabbed in, let's add one more heading, and we
| | 07:16 | are going to do that by clicking the
Add a resource menu and selecting Label
| | 07:21 | again. And once again, we're just going
to click into the label text, hit the
| | 07:26 | Image icon, go to find or upload
an image, just like we did before.
| | 07:31 | We are here back in our Private files
in the BIOL432, and this time we want to
| | 07:36 | insert the readings.png files,
| | 07:39 | so go ahead and select
that and hit Select this file.
| | 07:42 | It puts the REQUIRED READINGS image
right here and again, in order to make this
| | 07:47 | image to be accessible, we are going to type
in "Required Readings" into the Image description.
| | 07:56 | So that will show as a tooltip if we
need to, or be accessible to screen readers.
| | 08:00 | Go ahead and hit the Insert button
and hit Save and return to course.
| | 08:05 | That is looking much
better. To really emphasize this,
| | 08:09 | I am going to go ahead and
turn editing off for a second.
| | 08:13 | If you notice, we now have our
Required Readings heading is showing up
| | 08:18 | really close to this last PDF file,
whereas the lecture materials has this
| | 08:24 | nice open space above it.
| | 08:26 | Well, the reason is is that in the
end of this description that we've typed
| | 08:31 | here in the header there is some
HTML formatting that says that this is a
| | 08:36 | paragraph, and a paragraph adds an
extra blank line down below it, and it's
| | 08:41 | forcing this image to go down below,
where we are not having that same effect
| | 08:46 | that is taking place down here.
| | 08:48 | So in order to remedy that, let's go
ahead and turn editing back on, and we're
| | 08:52 | going to scroll back down. And just
underneath the required readings, here's our
| | 08:57 | little set of icons, and now we are
going to use the third icon which is the
| | 09:00 | little hand with the pencil--
| | 09:02 | we are going to click on that. And what I
would like you to do is just come right
| | 09:05 | back up here, and just in front of
where it that says REQUIRED READINGS, click
| | 09:09 | your mouse right in that space
that's in between the red of the REQUIRED
| | 09:14 | READINGS and the left-hand edge here,
and hold down the Shift key on your
| | 09:18 | keyboard and hit Return.
| | 09:20 | And what that's going to do is it's
going to insert a line break, and it's going
| | 09:24 | to force it down just one line.
| | 09:27 | Let's come on back down here and click
Save and return to course now. And if we
| | 09:32 | go ahead and we turn editing off, we can see
the results, and that's looking much better.
| | 09:39 | Now our information is very neatly organized.
| | 09:43 | The headings are very easy to read, and it's
real easy to go in and look at this information.
| | 09:48 | Now we've done all of this work and
more than likely, we're going to have
| | 09:52 | lecture materials and readings for
additional weeks throughout the term.
| | 09:57 | There is another button right here
that's going to make that even easier.
| | 10:00 | So let's turn it on, scroll down just
a little bit, and underneath of LECTURE
| | 10:06 | MATERIALS, there's a
little x2, or duplicate, button.
| | 10:10 | This is brand new in Moodle 2.
| | 10:12 | It wasn't in previous versions.
| | 10:14 | Go ahead and hit that option, and it's
just going to say, "Are you sure you want
| | 10:17 | to duplicate this 'Label'?"
| | 10:18 | Yeah, I clicked that button, and that's what I
meant to do, and hit the Continue button,
| | 10:22 | and now it's asking us that it's duplicated.
| | 10:24 | Do we want to edit the copy
or simply return to the course?
| | 10:27 | Let's go ahead and return to the course,
and we can see now there're two copies
| | 10:31 | of this LECTURE MATERIALS.
| | 10:32 | We'll want to come down to our little
crosshairs so we can move this item, and
| | 10:36 | we are just going to click and we are
going to drag it down here into Week 2.
| | 10:39 | Go ahead and drag and drop it right there in Week 2,
and we'll do the same thing for REQUIRED READINGS.
| | 10:44 | We'll go ahead and hit the x2 button
there, and go ahead and say Continue and
| | 10:50 | then go ahead and say, yeah, we want to
return to the course, and scroll on down
| | 10:55 | and the once again, grab the crosshairs,
and just drag it right on down here. There we
| | 10:59 | get our lines, so we know
where we're dropping it.
| | 11:01 | We'll drop it in place.
| | 11:02 | And if we come back up to our course,
we'll turn editing off and scroll on
| | 11:09 | down, and there you go.
| | 11:10 | Now you have your headings that you can
start creating throughout the rest of the course.
| | 11:16 | It's not so nice to see these right here, so
we'll make one final tweak. Turn Editing on,
| | 11:22 | scroll down into Week 2 and to hide
these items so that your students don't see
| | 11:28 | them because it's not necessary,
| | 11:30 | we are going to click the little i icon.
| | 11:32 | that's in the little row
of icons, and there we go.
| | 11:34 | You can still see them because you're
the instructor, and you can see all the
| | 11:37 | materials that are here, but your
students won't see them if your students are
| | 11:41 | looking at the course.
| | 11:43 | So now the course content that you
want your students to see is cleanly
| | 11:47 | organized. You are able to go in
and prep the rest of the material.
| | 11:52 | What I would suggest before the
next movie is to go ahead and continue
| | 11:55 | duplicating these lecture materials and
required readings, and you can go ahead
| | 12:00 | and post those further down.
| | 12:02 | There is also in the Personal files
folder one more of these icons, and that is
| | 12:07 | one for assignments.
| | 12:09 | So go ahead and add the Assignments
heading, add it underneath of here, and then
| | 12:14 | duplicate that out as well. And if you're
really industrious, inside of the course
| | 12:19 | syllabi, you can find the other course
headings that you can add in here, and in
| | 12:24 | the next movie I'll have all of
those added in for you into this course so
| | 12:29 | they're all ready to go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up the Gradebook| 00:00 | Before you begin creating assignments
for your students to complete inside of
| | 00:04 | Moodle, it's a good idea to take a few
minutes and set up some grade categories
| | 00:09 | inside of your Gradebook
| | 00:10 | so when you create an assignment,
you're able to assign that assignment to a
| | 00:14 | specific Gradebook category, thus
reducing the amount of time that you need to
| | 00:19 | spend setting up and creating and building
your Gradebook all along during your course.
| | 00:25 | Moodle will go ahead and take
care of all of that for you.
| | 00:28 | Before we get into the Gradebook though,
I'd like to quickly jump over to our
| | 00:32 | course syllabi where I've got
the Grading section up on screen.
| | 00:37 | And here you can see we have a few categories.
| | 00:39 | We've got a few exams.
| | 00:40 | We have some assignments
that we're going to handout.
| | 00:42 | We have a research project,
| | 00:44 | and that's broken into both a
group evaluation score and an
| | 00:48 | individual evaluation score.
| | 00:49 | So we're going to set up all of these
different categories within our Gradebook.
| | 00:54 | So back in Moodle, what we're going to
do is come over here on the left-hand
| | 00:58 | column in the Settings section and look for the
link for Grades and go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:03 | When the Grades section opens, you'll
notice that your Settings section now has
| | 01:07 | a new area that has a bunch of
links related to the Gradebook.
| | 01:11 | We'll explore a lot of these in a later
chapter specifically on the Gradebook.
| | 01:16 | But for right now, let's go ahead and just
set up the specific categories that we need.
| | 01:20 | At the top of the middle section you
have a dropdown menu that says Grader report.
| | 01:25 | Go ahead and click on that,
| | 01:27 | and from the Categories and
items section, select Simple view.
| | 01:31 | We can go ahead and at the bottom
click the button that says Add category and
| | 01:37 | add a Category name.
| | 01:38 | The first category we'll add is Exams.
| | 01:41 | And for Aggregation, click the
dropdown menu, and I like to use the option
| | 01:46 | that is Sum of grades.
| | 01:48 | What this one is going to do is it's
going to go ahead and allow me to just
| | 01:52 | enter in the number of points
that I want to assign to each exam,
| | 01:56 | and then it'll simply calculate a total
of all of those points for me at the end.
| | 02:02 | There are a lot of other options
available to you, but for all of these
| | 02:05 | different categories, at least
initially, we're going to set Sum of grades.
| | 02:09 | Now we can simply come down at
the bottom and click Save changes.
| | 02:13 | And we can see that we have an Exams
category added in our Coral Reef Ecology course.
| | 02:18 | So let's go ahead and add another category.
| | 02:21 | This one is going to be Assignments,
and again we're going to hit the Aggregation
| | 02:25 | type and select Sum of grades.
| | 02:28 | And when we scroll down, now
because we have a new category created, we
| | 02:33 | automatically get this new area
down here called Parent category.
| | 02:37 | And because the Assignments section is
one of our major areas, we're going to go
| | 02:41 | ahead and leave its Parent
category set to Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 02:44 | Go ahead and click the Save changes button,
| | 02:47 | and now let's go ahead and add another category.
| | 02:50 | This time we're going to go ahead and we're
going to add the Research Projects category.
| | 02:56 | And again Aggregation, we're going to
set that to Sum of grades, scroll on down,
| | 03:00 | and hit Save changes.
| | 03:03 | And let's go ahead and add another category.
| | 03:05 | This time we're going to
add the Group Evaluation,
| | 03:10 | and once more, Sum of grades.
| | 03:12 | Now this time when we scroll down,
under Parent category, we're not going to
| | 03:16 | leave it set to Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 03:18 | The Group Evaluation is going to
be part of the Research Projects.
| | 03:22 | So we're going to go ahead and simply
select Research Projects from the Parent
| | 03:25 | category here and hit Save changes.
| | 03:28 | And now when we look in our tree,
we've got our Exams, our Assignments,
| | 03:33 | Research Projects, and then Group
Evaluation is a subcategory of Research
| | 03:37 | Projects right there.
| | 03:39 | So let's go ahead and scroll down.
We need to add one more, the Individual
| | 03:43 | Evaluation, so we'll add one more.
| | 03:45 | There's our Individual Evaluation. Once again
we're going to set that Sum of grades,
| | 03:52 | and its Parent category is also
going to be Research Projects.
| | 03:56 | Hit the Save changes button
and go ahead and scroll on down.
| | 04:01 | And it now looks like everything is set up
inside of our Gradebook the way that we need it.
| | 04:05 | And so we'll come on back up here to
the top, and we'll hit the main dropdown
| | 04:08 | menu, and we'll go back to that Grader
report that we were looking at initially.
| | 04:13 | And here we can see all of our students.
| | 04:15 | We have categories set up--Exams,
Assignments, Research Projects--and we can see
| | 04:21 | the Research Projects spans over top
of the Group and Individual Evaluations.
| | 04:25 | And we have a space to be able to add in
a grade for each individual student for
| | 04:31 | each different type of grade category.
| | 04:33 | In later movies when we go ahead and we
create assignments, we'll assign those
| | 04:37 | assignments to each of these categories,
and then Moodle will take care of adding
| | 04:42 | an additional column here underneath of
that area in order to keep track of the
| | 04:48 | grades for the student for
that assignment automatically.
| | 04:51 | Now we'll explore more about
the Gradebook in a later chapter.
| | 04:55 | But for now we have all the setup
done that we need to in our Gradebook,
| | 04:59 | so let's go ahead and use the
breadcrumbs and return back to our course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a simple assignment| 00:00 | Now that we have our Gradebook set
up inside of Moodle with the grade
| | 00:04 | categories, it's time to start
creating assignments and linking those
| | 00:07 | assignments to the Gradebook.
| | 00:10 | During the first week of the term we
are going to be giving the students an
| | 00:12 | introduction to tropical marine ecosystems,
| | 00:15 | so they'll have a little bit of experience
about what types of ecosystems are available.
| | 00:20 | So let's give them an assignment so they
can start thinking about the specific area
| | 00:24 | that they want to focus on during
their field studies in Belize during the
| | 00:28 | spring-break portion of the trip.
| | 00:30 | To do this we have already gone ahead
and added the assignments area, and we are
| | 00:35 | going to hit the dropdown menu for
Add an activity, and there are a lot of
| | 00:39 | different options here,
| | 00:40 | but the one that we are going to
start off with is the Online text.
| | 00:44 | This is one of the simple assignment
types, and it's perhaps even the most simple.
| | 00:48 | We can simply give this assignment a
name, "Research Project Ideas," and in the
| | 00:56 | Description field we just want to go
ahead and put the instructions as to what
| | 00:59 | it is that we want the students to do.
| | 01:03 | This tells the students what it is that they
need to do, very cleanly, gives it a nice focus.
| | 01:07 | Let's go ahead and scroll down and look at
some of the options for creating this assignment.
| | 01:13 | The first couple of options here,
Available from and Due dates,
| | 01:17 | by default both of these are set as
Enabled, and it gives a range of dates that
| | 01:23 | is usually set to the weeks of the course.
| | 01:26 | A couple of things to note: First of
all, that when you can go ahead and click
| | 01:29 | the Day you now get a pop-up
menu that has a clickable calendar.
| | 01:34 | The second thing to note is, over
here in the Time--we've got the Day, the
| | 01:38 | Month, the Year--and then the Time and the
Time is always set up on a 24-hour clock.
| | 01:45 | If you want your assignment to be
available starting at 2 o'clock in the
| | 01:49 | afternoon, you would not select
02, because that would be 2 a.m.
| | 01:54 | This is not so bad when you're
starting an assignment, but it can be really
| | 01:57 | frustrating for the students when
you're ending an assignment and they think
| | 02:01 | it's due at 2 o'clock in the
afternoon, but you've set the time to be 2
| | 02:05 | o'clock in the morning, and by the time they
get up the assignment is already unavailable.
| | 02:10 | So unless you have a really good
reason for going ahead and forcing your
| | 02:14 | students to complete an assignment in a
specific time period, you may want to go
| | 02:18 | ahead and simply uncheck
both of these Enable buttons.
| | 02:22 | That will make it so that the
assignment is always due for the students, no
| | 02:26 | matter when they come into the
course and access the materials.
| | 02:29 | You can if you would like, if you have
these two enabled, you can though set a
| | 02:33 | Prevent late submissions option here,
which would prevent the students from
| | 02:37 | going in and submitting the
assignment after a specific time.
| | 02:42 | So if this assignment is set to expire
at 2 o'clock in the afternoon, or 1400
| | 02:47 | hours, then you could hit the Prevent
late assignments and at 3 o'clock in the
| | 02:52 | afternoon the student would not be able
to complete that assignment any longer.
| | 02:56 | This can be very helpful if you have
some students that are not really following
| | 03:01 | along, you really need to kind of
enforce the rules a little bit more on them.
| | 03:05 | This is a great way to be able to do that.
| | 03:07 | But for now we are going to ahead
and leave these options turned off.
| | 03:10 | The next section is the section on Grades.
| | 03:13 | All assignments generally start off
being worth a hundred points, and what I
| | 03:17 | would like to do is I am going to go
ahead and make this assignment, because it's
| | 03:20 | just a getting started thing,
| | 03:21 | I am going to bring this down and I am
going to make it only worth 10 points.
| | 03:26 | The next option here is Grade category.
| | 03:29 | I can go ahead and
select that, and look at this.
| | 03:30 | Here are the Grade categories that we just
set up in our Gradebook in the last movie.
| | 03:36 | So in this case, we are going
to categorize this 10 points.
| | 03:40 | We kind of put it in the Individual
Evaluation portion of the research project.
| | 03:44 | So we'll go ahead and select that
category and after we create this assignment,
| | 03:48 | we will see what that has done to our Gradebook.
| | 03:50 | And come on down here,
Online text, Allow resubmitting.
| | 03:53 | If you would like the students to
be able to come in, enter in their
| | 03:56 | information, hit Submit, and then
come back in at a later time and resubmit--
| | 04:00 | change their mind, essentially--
| | 04:02 | you can set this to Yes.
| | 04:04 | And I am going to go ahead and set
this to Yes, because one of the challenges
| | 04:08 | that may happen is, especially in the
beginning, when you're first getting the
| | 04:11 | students used to using the Moodle
system, they may make a few mistakes.
| | 04:16 | They may submit an assignment and
not realize that they've submitted it, or
| | 04:20 | you have to know where to go into that
assignment and open it back up for them.
| | 04:25 | And it can be a little bit of a hassle,
especially in the beginning portion of
| | 04:28 | your course, to be able to have to go
in and constantly reset those things.
| | 04:32 | So it's a personal option for you to go ahead
and choose whether or not you want to do this.
| | 04:35 | I am going to go ahead and set this to Yes.
| | 04:37 | The next option, Email alerts to teachers.
| | 04:40 | If you want to get an email every
time one of your student submits their
| | 04:44 | assignment so that you know
immediately when that assignment has been
| | 04:48 | submitted so you can go in and you can grade it
right away, go ahead and set this item to Yes.
| | 04:53 | Personally, I get enough email already,
and one of the great things about Moodle
| | 04:57 | is the students can go in and they can
complete their assignments and then when
| | 05:01 | I am ready to grade it, I can log in to Moodle,
| | 05:03 | I can go into the Grade section,
and I can grade that assignment. All the
| | 05:07 | materials are right there.
| | 05:09 | So I am going to go ahead
and leave that one set to No.
| | 05:12 | And this third option here, Comment inline.
| | 05:14 | I am going to go ahead and
set that one to Yes right now.
| | 05:17 | What that's going to allow you to do
is to go ahead and add some feedback to
| | 05:21 | your students inline within their
online text that they've submitted.
| | 05:25 | It will put your text in a different
color, and we will explore how that works at
| | 05:29 | a later time, but for right now
I'll go ahead and set this to Yes.
| | 05:32 | Go on down here to the bottom and
we've got the Common module settings.
| | 05:37 | These are for group.
| | 05:38 | We don't have group set up yet, so we
are going to leave that set to No groups.
| | 05:42 | Visible, this is, remember, if we want
this assignment to be visible all the time,
| | 05:46 | or if we want to have this essentially
prepped up for the students and then at
| | 05:51 | the specific time when we want to
release that information to them, we can go in
| | 05:54 | and edit this file and
change the Show to Not show.
| | 05:58 | But we are going to leave it to Show for right
now. We are not going to use an ID number.
| | 06:02 | So let's go ahead and hit Save and
return to course, and let's see what happens.
| | 06:05 | Come on down here and we see
underneath of our Assignment section we have our
| | 06:09 | Research Project Ideas, and we will
do a little bit of a clean up her.
| | 06:12 | We will use the Move Right button
here to bump it in underneath of that
| | 06:17 | heading. And if we come up to the top--we'll
turn Editing off to see what this looks like--
| | 06:22 | we can scroll on down, and there we go.
| | 06:26 | We have our Assignment, and Research
Project Ideas is right here underneath of it.
| | 06:31 | Now let's have a quick look at our
Gradebook and see what happened in our Gradebook.
| | 06:35 | Over in the Settings section, click on
Grades, and right here under Individual
| | 06:40 | Evaluations you can see Research Project Ideas.
| | 06:43 | It's gone ahead and added that item in
the right category, and we are able to be
| | 06:48 | able to grade that assignment right there.
| | 06:50 | Let's go ahead and go back into our course.
| | 06:53 | Let's go to BIOL 432.
| | 06:55 | I will scroll back down.
| | 06:57 | We are going to go ahead and click on the
Research Project Ideas to see what it looks like.
| | 07:01 | And if you were a student, you would
have a little field right here for you to
| | 07:05 | be able to enter in that information right here.
| | 07:07 | You wouldn't have to go any further.
| | 07:09 | As an instructor, you're able to see
right here at the top that currently no
| | 07:14 | attempts have been made on this assignment.
| | 07:16 | As soon as your students begin completing
the assignment and they'll submit their work,
| | 07:20 | this link right here will change and
it will tell you how many students have
| | 07:24 | submitted the assignments.
| | 07:25 | Now since this is a link, we can go
ahead and click on this and it will take us
| | 07:30 | into the grading for this assignment.
| | 07:33 | So here we have all of our students listed out.
| | 07:36 | We have a field that will show all
of the grades, any comments that we've
| | 07:40 | submitted back to them, any information
about last modified of the submission--
| | 07:47 | so the submissions is going to have the
final text that they've had--and anything
| | 07:51 | that we finally grade on it.
| | 07:53 | For each of these assignments you are
able to click on the individual link for
| | 07:57 | grade that's over on the right-hand side
for Status, and you are able to see the
| | 08:01 | submission that the student has made.
| | 08:03 | You're able to assign them a grade,
and notice it's already given us a 0-to-10
| | 08:07 | scale because we told it this
assignment is only worth 10 points, so Moodle has
| | 08:10 | done all that work for us.
| | 08:12 | We can scroll down a little bit further.
| | 08:13 | We have a section where we can provide
some feedback directly to the student
| | 08:16 | right here, and we can save our changes.
| | 08:19 | And I am going to go ahead and hit
Cancel though, so it will take us back
| | 08:22 | into this page, and there is one other
quick thing that I want to show you right here.
| | 08:25 | If we scroll down just a little bit
further, there are some Optional settings here.
| | 08:30 | We can say Show > All, Show just
submitted grades, or just the required to grade.
| | 08:35 | So as you are going along, if you have
some students that have submitted their
| | 08:37 | work early, and you've
gone in and graded it already,
| | 08:40 | you can go ahead and hide those that
you have already graded, so it reduces the
| | 08:44 | amount of clutter that you need to see.
| | 08:46 | You can see the Submissions to show,
per page, and I really like this option
| | 08:51 | here, Allow quick grading.
| | 08:52 | Go ahead and hit the check box
for that and hit Save preferences.
| | 08:56 | Now you're able to see all the work
right here in this one table view.
| | 09:01 | You're able to add comments back
to the students, and you're able to
| | 09:04 | assign grades to them.
| | 09:05 | Now one bit of warning here:
| | 09:07 | if you do use this function and you've
gone in and you've entered a whole bunch
| | 09:12 | of information, make sure you scroll
all the way down to the bottom as soon as
| | 09:16 | you are finished and click
the Save all my feedback button.
| | 09:19 | If you don't click the Save all my
feedback button, you will have done an
| | 09:22 | enormous amount of work and
Moodle won't save your feedback.
| | 09:26 | So you always have to make sure you
scroll down and hit that button right there.
| | 09:30 | Let's scroll back up to our course,
and we're going to go back to BIOL 432 in
| | 09:35 | our breadcrumbs, and that's going to
take us back into the main view of our
| | 09:38 | course, and that gives you a quick
overview of setting up and working with a
| | 09:44 | simple assignment.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Messaging students| 00:00 | There are varieties of ways in order to
send messages and emails to your students.
| | 00:05 | In this movie we'll
explore one of these methods.
| | 00:08 | To begin with, make sure you're inside of
your course and you have editing turned on.
| | 00:12 | Then go ahead and scroll down on the
right-hand side and look for the Add a
| | 00:16 | block block, click the dropdown menu,
and look for the listing for People.
| | 00:21 | Click People and when your screen
refreshes, scroll back down again until you
| | 00:26 | find the People block. Go ahead and
click on the link for participants.
| | 00:29 | This will take you to a page that'll show
you all the participants in your course.
| | 00:34 | In order to send a message to all of
the students but not include yourself, go
| | 00:39 | down to the bottom of the page
and click the Select all button.
| | 00:42 | You can then come up in the right-hand
column and uncheck the box next to your name.
| | 00:47 | This way only your students are selected.
| | 00:50 | Then, back down in the bottom,
click the dropdown menu for Choose.
| | 00:54 | Now you have a couple of options here: Send
a message, Add a new note, Add a common note.
| | 01:00 | In this case, we're going to
use the Send a message to,
| | 01:02 | so go ahead and click Send a message,
and a new message window appears.
| | 01:07 | All we need to do is type in the
message that we want to send to all of our
| | 01:10 | students here in the main body.
| | 01:12 | We can use the HTML Editor in order
to format this message if we want to.
| | 01:16 | In this case, we'll just let the
students know that their Week 1 lecture
| | 01:19 | materials have been posted
to the course Moodle site.
| | 01:22 | We can see our message that we want to send.
| | 01:25 | We can then simply scroll down to the bottom.
| | 01:28 | Here we get one more chance to check and see
what students we want to send this message to.
| | 01:33 | The next step is to simply click the
Preview button to preview our message.
| | 01:37 | This is how the message is going to
look when we send it to our students.
| | 01:41 | If we want to make any edits, we can
get the Update button; or if we are happy
| | 01:44 | with our message, we can
hit the Send message button.
| | 01:47 | The students on our list have now been
sent this message through the internal
| | 01:51 | Moodle messaging system.
| | 01:53 | You can control your preferences to
your messaging system by going over to the
| | 01:57 | left-hand column and clicking on the
My profile Settings dropdown menu and then
| | 02:02 | selecting Messaging.
| | 02:04 | Here you can see all of the different
settings for how you'll be contacted if a
| | 02:08 | message is sent to you.
| | 02:09 | If we scroll down just a little bit,
I like to go ahead and check the box for
| | 02:13 | Personal messages between users to be
sent via email, even when I'm logged in.
| | 02:18 | That way if I'm working within Moodle and
another user messages me, as we just did,
| | 02:23 | that message will pop up
on screen so I can see it.
| | 02:26 | But if I dismiss that message, it will
still go to my email and I'll be sure to
| | 02:30 | be able to follow up with that user.
| | 02:32 | Go ahead and scroll all the way to
the bottom and click the Update profile
| | 02:35 | button, and now your
messaging profile has been set up.
| | 02:40 | Go ahead and click back on the Home
button in your breadcrumbs and then click
| | 02:44 | back on the Coral Reef Ecology course
listing to go back into your course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Using the HTML EditorHTML Editor overview| 00:00 | The most common tool that you'll use
while building your Moodle course is the
| | 00:04 | built-in HTML Editor, which
stands for Hypertext Markup Language.
| | 00:09 | This is the language that most every
single web page on the Internet is created in,
| | 00:13 | and Moodle has a built-in What
You See Is What You Get Editor.
| | 00:18 | You can access this editor
through a variety of different ways.
| | 00:21 | In this case, simply make
sure you have editing turned on
| | 00:25 | and then click on the dropdown menu
for Add a resource from any block and go
| | 00:29 | down and select the link for Label.
| | 00:32 | This will open up a simple
page and show us our HTML Editor.
| | 00:35 | Now the HTML Editor that's built into
Moodle is from our project called TinyMCE.
| | 00:42 | This is a greatly improved
editor over previous versions.
| | 00:45 | And some of nice things that you'll
notice is when you click on the dropdown
| | 00:48 | menu to set your font, you'll notice
that the fonts are all displayed in the
| | 00:52 | font face that they will appear in.
| | 00:55 | You can also set the font
size, the paragraph heading.
| | 00:58 | There's an Undo and Redo button, a
Find function, a Find/Replace function,
| | 01:06 | a tool that will allow you to
enter a fullscreen editing mode.
| | 01:11 | On the next row, you'll see some common
formatting tools such as bold, italics,
| | 01:16 | underline, strikethrough,
subscript, and superscript.
| | 01:21 | You can align your text either
left, center, or right justified.
| | 01:27 | The next set of tools work with HTML that
you're bringing in from other locations.
| | 01:32 | The first one, Cleanup messy code,
allows you to paste code into your editor and
| | 01:37 | then hit this tool in order to
clean up any poorly formatted code.
| | 01:42 | Now I will note that not all
browsers work with this tool the same way.
| | 01:47 | And so you may want to use the Edit
HTML Source button, paste your code in
| | 01:52 | there, and then when you return back
into the WYSIWYG view, or What You See Is
| | 01:57 | What You Get, your code will be
automatically cleaned up for you.
| | 02:02 | The next button here is also
very helpful, Remove formatting.
| | 02:06 | Many times when you're trying to format
some text inside of the HTML Editor and
| | 02:10 | you've added a couple of
different layers of formatting--
| | 02:12 | you've maybe bolded, italicized,
changed the font color and changed the
| | 02:17 | background color--and you're trying to
select a particular parameter to get rid
| | 02:21 | of it, oftentimes it can be difficult.
| | 02:23 | Simply selecting that text and hitting
the Remove formatting button and starting
| | 02:27 | over will allow you to move
forward with your project much quicker.
| | 02:30 | The next two tools allow you to
paste in code from other applications.
| | 02:34 | The first one allows you to take
formatted text, select it, and paste it in as
| | 02:39 | plain text, allowing you to control the
formatting strictly inside of this HTML Editor.
| | 02:46 | The other one allows you to paste in
text from Microsoft Word and it'll clean up
| | 02:50 | some of the additional
formatting that Word applies.
| | 02:53 | The next tools allow you to control color:
| | 02:56 | the first one allows you to control the
color of text, and the second one allows
| | 03:00 | you to control the
background color of text or objects.
| | 03:04 | The next set of tools allows you to
control the direction of flow of your text.
| | 03:08 | So, for many languages, text is read
from left to right, but other languages,
| | 03:12 | text is read from right to left,
| | 03:14 | and these two buttons will allow you
to select the default direction that
| | 03:17 | your text will flow.
| | 03:19 | On the third row, you have the ability to
create lists, both unordered and ordered lists.
| | 03:25 | You can then also use the Outdent and
Indent tools to create an outlined effect
| | 03:31 | inside of your documents.
| | 03:33 | The next box allows you to control
links, both internal and external links, by
| | 03:38 | inserting and editing them, breaking
links that you've already created, or using
| | 03:43 | this third tool which is a link with
a red X through it that allows you to
| | 03:47 | prevent auto-linking.
| | 03:49 | In a later movie, we'll explore
auto-linking to a great extent.
| | 03:54 | The next set of tools allows you to
control a variety of different media types
| | 03:58 | to add interest to your documents.
| | 04:00 | The first one allows you
to insert and edit images.
| | 04:04 | Then you can insert or edit emoticons.
| | 04:07 | You can insert and work with
media, such as audio and video.
| | 04:12 | This tool allows you to create equations.
| | 04:15 | Sometimes you need to add some
non-breaking spaces between characters.
| | 04:20 | And this tool will allow you to
insert those special characters.
| | 04:24 | Other times you may need to add special
characters, such as the degree sign, plus
| | 04:29 | or minus, or a per mille sign,
| | 04:32 | and Select special
characters allows you to do that.
| | 04:35 | Next, you have the Insert a table tool.
| | 04:37 | If you need to insert a table of
numbers or data, you can use this tool
| | 04:41 | to create your table.
| | 04:42 | Finally, you have the Edit HTML
Source tool and a spellchecker.
| | 04:47 | And if you notice on the spellchecker
there's a small dropdown menu to the
| | 04:50 | right-hand side, and Moodle now
allows you to spell-check in multiple
| | 04:54 | different languages.
| | 04:55 | Now that's a quick overview of the various
tools that are included in the HTML Editor.
| | 05:01 | Over the course of the next several
movies, we'll put a lot of these tools into
| | 05:05 | practice and format some content for our site.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting text| 00:00 | Now that we've had a chance to look at
the HTML Editor that's built into Moodle,
| | 00:04 | let's go ahead and put some
of those tools into practice.
| | 00:07 | To begin, make sure editing is turned
on in your course and then scroll down to
| | 00:11 | the bottom of Week 1.
| | 00:12 | We're going to add some text into the
REQUIRED READINGS section to let our
| | 00:17 | students know what things they need
to read for this first week's lecture.
| | 00:22 | Go down to the bottom of the block
and click the dropdown menu for Add a
| | 00:25 | resource and simply select Label.
| | 00:28 | Now the Label will allow us to
display text right on this front page.
| | 00:32 | The standard HTML Editor opens up.
Go ahead and click inside the box and then
| | 00:37 | open up the week 1 references.txt
file from the Exercise folder.
| | 00:41 | I've gone ahead and typed out
some references for you.
| | 00:44 | Go ahead and select the references, press
Command+C or Ctrl+C on your keyboard to copy.
| | 00:49 | You can go ahead and minimize that file.
Then come back to your browser and
| | 00:53 | simply press Command+V or
Ctrl+V to paste the text.
| | 00:57 | Let's go ahead and look and
see what we've got so far.
| | 01:00 | Simply press the Save and return to
course button and then as we scroll down,
| | 01:04 | we can see that our references are showing up,
but they're not quite in the right place.
| | 01:08 | So use the little Move tool to drag
your text up into the REQUIRED READINGS
| | 01:12 | section and now as we look at this,
we can see that the information is laid out
| | 01:17 | here, but it's not very pretty right now.
| | 01:19 | So hit the Edit tool, which is the hand
with the pencil, and let's go back in and
| | 01:24 | apply some HTML formatting.
| | 01:26 | The first thing that we want to do is
convert all of this text into a bulleted list.
| | 01:31 | So simply click and drag to make a
selection of all the text and then press the
| | 01:35 | Unordered list button.
| | 01:38 | As we scroll back up in the listing,
you'll see that the very first item got a
| | 01:42 | bullet point, but the rest of the
listings did not, and you can see there's some
| | 01:48 | blank spaces in here and the
returns have not been set correctly.
| | 01:52 | To fix this, simply click to deselect
and then click your mouse right in front
| | 01:57 | of the second reference and hit the
Delete, or Backspace, on your keyboard a
| | 02:01 | few times, until you get rid of all
those extra spaces and the previous
| | 02:05 | reference wraps up to the end of the first one.
| | 02:08 | Then hit Return on your keyboard,
and now you can see that the second reference
| | 02:12 | has a bullet in front of it,
indicating that this is now a proper list item.
| | 02:17 | Let's go ahead and repeat that
process for the rest of the items.
| | 02:19 | So scroll down a little bit, put
your cursor right in front of the next
| | 02:23 | reference, press Delete, or Backspace, on
your keyboard a few times and then hit Return.
| | 02:28 | Let's do that again, pressing Delete,
hit Return, scroll down, and one final
| | 02:36 | time, press Delete a few
times and then hit Return.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to scroll to the very bottom
and make sure there are no extra spaces
| | 02:45 | down here at the bottom by
clicking into the blank space.
| | 02:47 | I can see my cursor is jumping up here.
| | 02:49 | Let's go ahead and see how that looks.
| | 02:51 | Press Save and return to course,
and now we can see we have bullet items out in
| | 02:56 | front of each of the different
references, but they're much harder to read now,
| | 02:59 | because there's no empty white space
that's left in between the references.
| | 03:04 | Let's go ahead and fix that and
apply a little bit of other formatting.
| | 03:06 | Go ahead and hit the Edit tool.
| | 03:09 | Now click your mouse at the
end of the first reference.
| | 03:12 | Hold down the Shift key on
your keyboard and press Return.
| | 03:16 | This is going to put a single
line break at the end rather than an
| | 03:21 | entire paragraph return.
| | 03:22 | Go ahead and do the same thing
for the rest of the references.
| | 03:26 | Hold down the Shift key and press Return.
| | 03:28 | Scroll down a little bit,
Shift+Return, and one more.
| | 03:33 | Click Shift+Return.
| | 03:36 | We've got those in now.
| | 03:37 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the top,
and let's go ahead and bold the text for our journals.
| | 03:43 | So click and select around the entire
reference at the end of the first article
| | 03:47 | and then simply hit the Bold button.
| | 03:50 | Do the same thing for the rest of the articles.
| | 03:52 | Here we'll select Coral Reefs all the
way down to 17, make sure that's bolded,
| | 03:57 | scroll down a little bit further.
| | 03:58 | Now we're going to select The
Coral Reef Journal and bold that.
| | 04:04 | Come down a little bit further,
Proceedings the Royal Society of London, we're going to
| | 04:08 | bold that, and the very final one,
we're going to go ahead and for right now
| | 04:12 | we're going to bold web site.
| | 04:15 | Okay, one last thing we need to do.
If we scroll all the way back up to the top,
| | 04:18 | we can see that in the first reference,
here we have Acropora palmata and that
| | 04:23 | is a proper scientific name,
| | 04:25 | so it needs to be italicized.
| | 04:27 | So we'll go ahead and simply select
that text and press the Italics button.
| | 04:32 | Now I'll go ahead and click the Save and
return to course button and as we scroll
| | 04:37 | down, we can see that all of
our text is much better formatted.
| | 04:41 | The only thing we have left to do is
make sure that we indent this entire block
| | 04:45 | of text and just bump it over a little
bit, and we can simply use the Move Right
| | 04:49 | button that's built into Moodle
and that formats our text properly.
| | 04:54 | Let's go ahead and turn editing off
so we can see what this looks like.
| | 04:57 | So scroll back up to the top, hit the
Turn editing off button, and scroll back
| | 05:02 | down, and now all of our students can
very clearly see all of the articles that
| | 05:07 | they need to read for this first week's lecture.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating internal links| 00:01 | Now that we have our required readings
posted for our students, it would be nice
| | 00:04 | for our students to be able to simply
click on a link of one of those articles
| | 00:08 | and access the full text of that
article, if we have permission to distribute
| | 00:12 | that document to them.
| | 00:13 | So make sure you have editing turned on
and then simply click the Edit tool for
| | 00:18 | the list of required
readings that we've been working on.
| | 00:22 | Next go ahead and scroll down until you
find the Mattia, C. article. Select the
| | 00:28 | text that says Mattia, C (1997),
including the parentheses.
| | 00:33 | We're going to make this text
a link to an internal PDF file.
| | 00:37 | Go ahead and click the Insert a
link tool and you're taken to the
| | 00:42 | Insert/edit link window.
| | 00:44 | The first line, Link URL, has an icon on
the far right-hand side of it that allows
| | 00:49 | you to browse to find a file
that you've already uploaded.
| | 00:54 | Go ahead and click on that link and
you're taken into your standard File picker.
| | 00:58 | Make sure you're in your Private files
section and go into your BIOL432 folder
| | 01:02 | that we created earlier.
| | 01:04 | We need to upload a file into here.
Go over to the Upload a file button and
| | 01:10 | then click on Browse.
| | 01:12 | Navigate to the Chapter 3 exercise
files and click on the Mattia1997.pdf file,
| | 01:19 | hit the Open button, and then
simply hit Upload this file.
| | 01:23 | The file will get uploaded and
automatically linked into your Moodle course.
| | 01:28 | We can give the article a title by
simply clicking in the Title section and then
| | 01:33 | typing in "Mattia 1997." Go ahead and
hit the Insert button and that article is
| | 01:41 | now linked to this page.
| | 01:42 | Hit the Save and return to course
button, and now when we go ahead and scroll
| | 01:46 | down we're not seeing anything different
inside of our window, until we move our
| | 01:51 | mouse over top of that article.
| | 01:53 | Now we can see the title that we
typed in, Mattia 1997, and we can see that
| | 01:58 | this item is a link.
| | 02:00 | Now it'd be nice to call this out to the
students a little bit more, so let's do
| | 02:04 | that by changing the font color of this text.
| | 02:07 | That is normally controlled inside of
the specific theme that you're using, and
| | 02:11 | the theme that we're currently using
does not have the text show up for a link
| | 02:15 | in a different color.
| | 02:17 | To fix this, simply come on
down and hit the Edit button again.
| | 02:21 | Scroll down until you find our link.
| | 02:24 | Select the text and even though it's
showing up in blue inside to the HTML
| | 02:29 | Editor, indicating that the
Editor knows that this is a link,
| | 02:32 | it's not showing up in blue for our students.
| | 02:35 | So come on up to the second line and
click the dropdown menu for select text color.
| | 02:41 | Then I'm going to choose the top
blue, which is 000080, so that it matches
| | 02:46 | our other headings.
| | 02:48 | The text should now change to a little
bit darker blue, and then we can click
| | 02:52 | the Save and return to course button.
| | 02:55 | Now, when we look at our required
readings, it's very clear to see which item
| | 03:00 | has an article that's linked to it
and if we click on that link, our browser
| | 03:04 | tells us that we want to open that
file with our default PDF viewer.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to go ahead and hit Cancel
and if you'd like, you can go ahead and look
| | 03:12 | at the article that's there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating external links| 00:01 | As we continue to look at our Required
Readings section, we'll notice the last
| | 00:04 | item down here, NOAA's
Coral Reef Information System.
| | 00:08 | What are Coral Reefs? page is a
website that we want the students to look at.
| | 00:12 | I've gone ahead and opened up
that page here in my browser.
| | 00:14 | This is a great resource that has a lot
of information about coral reefs that we
| | 00:19 | want our students to be able to read.
| | 00:21 | Let's go ahead and go back to our course.
| | 00:23 | Let's go ahead and edit the Required
Readings. Scroll on down to the bottom of
| | 00:28 | our page where we have our references.
| | 00:31 | The next thing we want to do is
to go ahead and enter in that URL.
| | 00:35 | So I'm going to jump over to my tab,
| | 00:37 | I'm going to select that URL,
and press Command+C or Ctrl+C on my keyboard to
| | 00:41 | copy it to the clipboard.
| | 00:43 | Now I'm going to back to my Moodle page,
hit the spacebar one time, and press
| | 00:48 | Command+V, or Ctrl+V, to paste that URL.
| | 00:51 | Because my text was right up against to
where I had bolded the web site link, my
| | 00:57 | URL is showing up in bold.
| | 00:58 | Well, I don't want that,
| | 00:59 | so I'll go ahead and select that URL
and go ahead and use the Remove formatting
| | 01:05 | button from the toolbar to get
rid of all the current formatting.
| | 01:09 | I'll go ahead and press the
Insert/edit link tool so that I can convert this
| | 01:13 | text into an actual link.
| | 01:16 | Inside of the link URL now all I have
to do is press Command+V, or Ctrl+V, on my
| | 01:20 | keyboard again to paste that
same URL into the Link URL.
| | 01:25 | I then tell Moodle how I want that link to open.
| | 01:28 | By default, it would open in the same
window, which would clear out my Moodle
| | 01:32 | page, and I don't want to do that.
| | 01:34 | I want the students to have a new
window opened up with that link in it,
| | 01:38 | so they can always get back to my Moodle page.
| | 01:41 | So I'll click the dropdown menu, and I'll
select the second item, Open in a new window.
| | 01:47 | I'll give the page a title.
| | 01:48 | So this is the NOAA CoRIS - What is a Coral.
| | 01:58 | I'll hit the Insert button.
| | 01:59 | That will convert all of that
information into an active link.
| | 02:04 | We want to make sure that this link
shows up in a color that's different from
| | 02:08 | what our default theme would have it show.
| | 02:11 | So I'll simply select the link one more time.
| | 02:13 | Then I'll hit the Select text color
button dropdown menu and select the top blue
| | 02:18 | item that I have here.
| | 02:19 | Next, I'll hit the Save
and return to course button.
| | 02:23 | Now I can see that my web site URL is
listed in blue and when I hover my mouse
| | 02:28 | over it, I get my title text and
when I click on the link, a new tab is
| | 02:33 | automatically opened up for
me that has the page in it.
| | 02:36 | I'll go ahead and close both of these
tabs and simply return back to my course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting local pictures with HTML| 00:00 | We've now seen how to use the
standard HTML Editor in order to format text
| | 00:05 | within our Moodle page.
| | 00:07 | Let's use that same editor to insert
an image here in the Lecture Materials
| | 00:10 | section to show our students where coral
reefs are predominantly located around the world.
| | 00:16 | To do this, simply scroll down to the
bottom of your Week 1 block, click the
| | 00:20 | dropdown menu for Add a
resource, and let's add another label.
| | 00:26 | Click inside of the HTML Editor and now
let's insert an image. On the bottom row
| | 00:31 | of tools press the Insert/edit image tool.
| | 00:35 | Next, click the link for
Find or upload an image.
| | 00:38 | This should take us to a standard File picker.
| | 00:41 | Before we upload our file, let's make
sure we know exactly where we are at.
| | 00:45 | So click on Private files, make sure
you're in your BIOL432 folder, and then
| | 00:51 | click the link for Upload a file.
| | 00:54 | In the Attachment section, click the
Browse button and in the Chapter 03 exercise
| | 00:58 | files, you want to upload the coralReefMap.jpg.
| | 01:02 | Go ahead and click the Open button and
then hit the Upload this file button.
| | 01:08 | That will upload a map of the world
that has highlighted the 30 degrees North and
| | 01:13 | 30 degrees South lines of latitude. All the
world's coral reefs live within these two lines.
| | 01:21 | So let's go ahead and add an image description
to make our image accessible to screen readers.
| | 01:27 | So we'll simply put "Map of
Major Coral Reefs around the world."
| | 01:34 | We'll click the button for Insert
and that image is now inserted into our page.
| | 01:42 | Click your mouse just to the left of the
image, hit Enter, or Return, and press the
| | 01:47 | up arrow on your keyboard.
| | 01:49 | This will bring your
cursor to just above the image.
| | 01:54 | Now we can go ahead and add in a
label to the top of the image that will
| | 01:57 | display on our main page.
| | 02:00 | "Major Coral Reefs are located between
30." Now to insert the degree symbol,
| | 02:10 | simply press the Insert common
character button from the bottom row of the
| | 02:14 | tools in the HTML Editor and then in
the third row, about the sixth column,
| | 02:20 | you'll find the degree sign.
| | 02:22 | Press that button one time and you'll
see that the degree symbol has been added.
| | 02:27 | Press capital N, space, and, 30,
and insert another degree symbol, south, latitude.
| | 02:38 | Now before we finish this off, let's
add a little bit of color and add a line
| | 02:43 | break to create a little bit of separation.
| | 02:46 | Let's start with the color.
| | 02:47 | So select our text and then press the
Select Text Color dropdown menu, and the
| | 02:52 | color that we want is not one of the
ones listed here, so simply press the More
| | 02:56 | colors button at the bottom, and now
we can go ahead and type in our own
| | 03:00 | specific custom color.
| | 03:02 | In this case, we're going to type in the
color of #990000. Hit the Apply button
| | 03:10 | and you can see we have the same
red color inside of our course.
| | 03:13 | Let's go ahead and bold this text by
pressing the Bold button and then put your
| | 03:18 | cursor right at the beginning of the M
in Major. Then hold on the Shift key on
| | 03:23 | your keyboard, and we'll use that
insert-a-line-break trick that we learned
| | 03:26 | earlier to bump all of this
text and image down just one line.
| | 03:31 | That will add a little bit of white
space and separation between this image and
| | 03:36 | the items that are displayed
currently on our main page.
| | 03:39 | Go ahead and hit the Save and return to
course button and if we scroll down just
| | 03:43 | a little bit, we can see our image with
its heading right here, but we want to
| | 03:48 | have it displayed up in the
Lecture Materials section.
| | 03:51 | So scroll down a little bit further,
use the Move tool to click and drag that
| | 03:56 | item up and drop it underneath of our
lecture slides, and then we'll use the
| | 04:00 | Move Right tool to bump that image
in to the right just a little bit.
| | 04:05 | Now to see what this looks like, go ahead
and scroll up to the top and turn editing off.
| | 04:11 | As we scroll back down, now we can see
that Week 1 has the Lecture Materials posted,
| | 04:17 | we have a nice map indicating where
the coral reefs around the world are
| | 04:20 | predominantly located, and we also
have all of our Required Readings that
| | 04:25 | have been formatted.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating equations| 00:00 | If you teach math or science, at some
point you're going to need to display an
| | 00:05 | equation to your students.
| | 00:08 | The equation that you see on screen is
in a file called Attenuation of Light.png,
| | 00:13 | located in the Chapter 03 exercise files.
| | 00:16 | But most teachers do not have the time
or resources to be able to go through and
| | 00:21 | create every single equation that they
may need to use throughout their course
| | 00:25 | in a graphics editor.
| | 00:28 | So in this movie, we're going to step
through using the built-in Equation Editor
| | 00:32 | that's inside of the HTML Editor in Moodle.
| | 00:35 | So to get started, make sure you're inside of
your course and you have editing turned on.
| | 00:41 | Now we want to add a link to the
vertical attenuation of sunlight with depth
| | 00:45 | equation right here
inside the Lecture Materials,
| | 00:48 | but we don't want to display
that right on the main page.
| | 00:51 | We want to have it so that it's a link
that takes the students to a secondary
| | 00:54 | page that has that information.
| | 00:57 | So to do this, simply scroll down to
the bottom of the Week 1 block, click the
| | 01:01 | dropdown for Add a resource,
and this time we're going to create a page.
| | 01:07 | We need to name the page Vertical
attenuation of sun light with depth equation.
| | 01:16 | For the Description, simply select that
text, press Command+C, or Ctrl+C, on your
| | 01:21 | keyboard to copy it, and then simply
paste it into the Description field.
| | 01:26 | Next, scroll down to the Content
section and paste that text one more time into
| | 01:32 | the Page content description.
| | 01:34 | Hit the Return key on your keyboard,
and let's go ahead and access the Equation
| | 01:39 | Editor by hitting the Insert
Equation tool in the bottom row of icons.
| | 01:45 | The DragMath Equation Editor begins to open up.
| | 01:48 | Now, you may get a warning saying that
an applet from your localhost, or your
| | 01:52 | local computer, is
requesting access to your computer.
| | 01:56 | Go ahead and hit the Allow button and
the default Equation Editor comes up.
| | 02:01 | Let's go ahead and use this editor to
enter in the equation that we saw earlier.
| | 02:05 | To do this, simply click inside of the
bottom section and begin by going to the
| | 02:10 | second tab, and we want to start
with using the Subscript tool.
| | 02:15 | So click on the Subscript tool and
you'll see two boxes appear on your screen.
| | 02:19 | We'll type a capital I in the primary box,
and in the Subscript box, we're going
| | 02:25 | to type a lowercase z. Click back on the
first tab in order to access the common
| | 02:31 | math functions and hit the equals
sign and then click down in the bottom.
| | 02:36 | This will insert the equal into the equation.
| | 02:40 | Getting the next part of the equation
is kind of tricky, and for many equations
| | 02:44 | it's going to require you to spend a
little bit of time figuring out the exact
| | 02:48 | order in which you need to create items.
| | 02:51 | To create the second part of our
equation, we're going to go back to the second
| | 02:56 | tab and we're going to start off by adding
the Superscript tool and clicking in the box.
| | 03:01 | This will add the two boxes for us,
for our primary letter and our superscript.
| | 03:07 | Let's begin by editing the superscript.
| | 03:10 | Click up in the top, and now we want
to go to the third tab where it has
| | 03:14 | our groupings and click on the
parentheses box, and click that into the superscript.
| | 03:20 | Now, simply type "-k," go up to the first tab,
| | 03:27 | we'll access our Product tool, and then
type in a capital Z. You will notice that
| | 03:34 | the Equation Editor automatically put
an extra set of parentheses around our
| | 03:38 | lowercase k. We're going to go ahead
and just leave this here like that.
| | 03:42 | Finally, let's add our I
subzero to the first term.
| | 03:47 | Go back to the second tab, and now we
want to insert the Subscript tool by
| | 03:52 | clicking on the subscript and
then clicking in the box again.
| | 03:54 | This will then allow us to type in a
capital I for our primary letter and in our
| | 04:00 | subscript, type in the number 0.
| | 04:04 | Our equation is looking pretty good now.
| | 04:06 | This is pretty much what we want.
| | 04:07 | There are a lot of other tools that are
here available to you if you need some
| | 04:11 | additional functions for the
particular equation that you're writing.
| | 04:15 | Go ahead and hit the Insert button
and you'll see a strange line of text.
| | 04:21 | This is the actual code that it
would take in order to duplicate the
| | 04:24 | equation that we wrote out.
| | 04:27 | Simply hit Return on your keyboard,
and now we're going to provide the students
| | 04:31 | with a listing of the various
different variables that we've added.
| | 04:34 | We're going to type in "I = Available
sun light," hit Return, "Z = Depth," hit
| | 04:51 | Return, and "k = Attenuation coefficient."
| | 04:58 | Go ahead and scroll all the way to
the bottom of the page and click Save
| | 05:03 | and return to course.
| | 05:05 | Now, when we scroll down to the bottom
of our first block, we can see here is
| | 05:09 | the link to our page.
| | 05:10 | Let's go ahead and click the Move tool
and drag it up to the top, just above
| | 05:15 | where our image is located, and let's
go ahead and use the Move Right tool to
| | 05:19 | bring it back into alignment.
| | 05:21 | Now, let's go ahead and
check and see what it looks like.
| | 05:23 | Go ahead and click on the
link and our page shows up.
| | 05:27 | We can see that our equation
has been added in here nicely,
| | 05:31 | we have our description as to what the
item is, and we have our listing of our
| | 05:37 | variables down below.
| | 05:38 | Go ahead and click on the BIOL432 in your
breadcrumbs to return back to your main course.
| | 05:46 | This walkthrough of the HTML Editor has
been just a quick overview as to all of
| | 05:51 | the basic tools that are built
into the HTML Editor for you.
| | 05:54 | I encourage you to spend some time
exploring all of the different tools, so that
| | 05:59 | you can make sure that your page
shows up in its best possible way.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Working with MediaPreparing images| 00:00 | Many of us today have digital cameras
that are capable of taking images at
| | 00:04 | incredibly high resolutions.
| | 00:07 | We pull those images directly out of
our cameras, and then we go to work
| | 00:10 | with them inside of our courses in Moodle,
and we find out that the images are just too big.
| | 00:14 | To truly learn how to do image compression
properly can take a long time and a lot of work.
| | 00:22 | In this movie, I'm going to show you a
trick that you can use in virtually any
| | 00:26 | image editing program that can export a
web gallery in order to compress a large
| | 00:31 | number of images with a fairly
good set of compression settings.
| | 00:36 | If you have a copy of Adobe
Bridge, go ahead and open up that.
| | 00:40 | If you have iPhoto or some other image
editing program, you may have to hunt
| | 00:44 | around to find these tools, but they're
in basically any image editing program
| | 00:49 | that you can find today.
| | 00:50 | There's a lot of web-based
tools as well that you can use.
| | 00:54 | Right now, I've got the Images
folder from the Chapter 04 exercise files
| | 00:58 | opened up in Bridge.
| | 00:59 | All I'm going to do is go ahead and hit
Command+A, or Ctrl+A, to select all of these images,
| | 01:04 | and then I'm going to go over
to the Output tab at the top.
| | 01:09 | By default, I'm brought to the PDF tab,
| | 01:11 | but what I want is the Web Photo Gallery tool.
| | 01:14 | The next option here for Template,
| | 01:16 | if we hit that dropdown menu, you'll
see that there are a whole bunch of
| | 01:19 | different options here.
| | 01:21 | The one that we really want to use
though is the one called HTML Gallery.
| | 01:25 | This is going to produce a basic web
site that has each of these images linked
| | 01:30 | together between a thumbnail
image and a larger size image.
| | 01:34 | If you want, you can go ahead and
type in some basic information about this
| | 01:38 | gallery into these blanks,
although it's not necessary for the specific
| | 01:43 | technique that we're showing. I'm going to go
ahead and fill in for Gallery Title Week 2 Images.
| | 01:50 | For Gallery Caption, I'm going
to type in "Coral Reef Diversity."
| | 01:56 | About This Gallery, I'm just going to
simply type "Images for the Week 2 Lecture."
| | 02:04 | For Your Name, I'll type in my name.
| | 02:06 | So I'll go ahead and fill in my email address.
| | 02:10 | Now go ahead and scroll down.
| | 02:11 | For the section under Color
palette, go ahead and leave that as is.
| | 02:15 | It's not important for what we're doing here.
| | 02:18 | Scroll down a little bit further.
| | 02:20 | Now make sure you checked
the button for Show File Names.
| | 02:23 | And this is in a lot of
different editing programs as well.
| | 02:27 | Next we want to set the preview size,
and in some programs this is called the
| | 02:31 | large size or the full-size image.
| | 02:33 | And I like to set this to a
nice size of about 450 pixels.
| | 02:38 | For Image Quality, Good or 70%,
something along those lines is what you're
| | 02:44 | looking for generally.
| | 02:45 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit further.
| | 02:48 | For the Create Gallery, type in "Week 2 Gallery."
| | 02:52 | And for the Save Location, hit the
Browse button, and we could point directly to
| | 02:57 | our Desktop for this case.
| | 02:58 | And then click the Open button. All right!
| | 03:01 | That's all we've set here.
| | 03:02 | The important thing again here is to
make sure that you set your image size to
| | 03:07 | be about 450 pixels.
| | 03:10 | At the very bottom, click the Save button.
| | 03:12 | What Bridge is going to do now is it's
going to go through, one by one, each of
| | 03:16 | your images and it's going
to compress it for the web.
| | 03:19 | And it's also going to create a little
HTML web page that's going to link all of
| | 03:24 | those images together.
| | 03:25 | In a later movie, we'll show
you how to post that gallery.
| | 03:28 | Hit the OK button when
Bridge tells you it's done.
| | 03:31 | We can go ahead and minimize Bridge and
we'll go ahead and minimize our browser
| | 03:34 | if that's still open as well.
| | 03:35 | So we're back out here to our desktop,
and we can see the folder that it's created.
| | 03:40 | Go ahead and double-click that folder,
and let's look at the contents of it very quickly.
| | 03:45 | To look and see overall what happened,
you're looking for the file called index.html.
| | 03:51 | That's the front page of the web
gallery that got created for you.
| | 03:55 | Go ahead and double-click that file and
it should open up in your web browser.
| | 03:59 | You can see all of the images.
| | 04:01 | Now depending on the specific program
that you use to create your web gallery,
| | 04:04 | your results may look a
little bit different than mine.
| | 04:07 | But it's generally going to have the
images in thumbnail form that you're able
| | 04:11 | to click on, see the overall image,
and then have some kind of built-in
| | 04:15 | navigation to be able to
navigate around those images.
| | 04:18 | Now this is a great way to
distribute these images out to your students.
| | 04:22 | Go ahead and close your browser window.
| | 04:25 | Let's look at the files that
we're really interested in here.
| | 04:28 | And those files are in the content folder.
| | 04:30 | So go ahead and click on content and
you'll see all of these individual HTML files.
| | 04:35 | Scroll down until you find the bin folder.
| | 04:37 | When you click on bin, you'll find
another folder inside called images.
| | 04:42 | Go ahead and click on the images folder,
and now you have two folders inside of that:
| | 04:46 | large and thumb.
| | 04:47 | And these are the two that
we're really interested in.
| | 04:49 | If we click on the large folder, we can
see each of those JPEG images that have
| | 04:53 | been compressed for us.
| | 04:55 | The pixel dimensions are now 450 x 300 pixels.
| | 04:59 | This is down from the nearly
2500 pixels x 2000 pixels that we started with initially,
| | 05:05 | and the file size is
significantly smaller as well.
| | 05:10 | In the next movie, I'm going to show
you how to batch-upload all of these large
| | 05:14 | images, the thumbnail images
and the overall gallery itself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting image files| 00:00 | In the last movie we used Adobe Bridge
to create a web photo gallery for us.
| | 00:06 | Here it's on my desktop called Week 2 Gallery.
| | 00:08 | It's also in the Chapter 4 exercise
files, under the Exports from Bridge folder.
| | 00:13 | Let's go ahead and batch-upload this
image gallery and the two internal folders
| | 00:19 | that we'll go through and
work with in just a second.
| | 00:22 | If you're on a Mac, go ahead and
Ctrl+Click on Week 2 Gallery folder.
| | 00:26 | If you're a Windows, right-click and
choose Send To > Compressed (zipped).
| | 00:31 | On the Mac choose Compress "Week 2 Gallery."
| | 00:34 | What this is going to do
| | 00:35 | is it's going to create a zip file for
us that contains all of the individual
| | 00:39 | files that are inside of
this Week 2 Gallery folder.
| | 00:42 | Once that file is created, go ahead
and double-click on the Week 2 Gallery
| | 00:46 | folder and then go into the contents
folder, scroll down until you find the bin
| | 00:52 | folder, and then find the images folder.
| | 00:55 | This folder contains both
large and the thumb folders.
| | 00:59 | Again, right-click or Ctrl+Click on
images and on a Mac choose Compress "images"
| | 01:04 | and on Windows choose Send
To > Compressed (zipped).
| | 01:08 | The ZIP file will get created and go
ahead and make sure that gets dragged out
| | 01:12 | to the desktop as well.
| | 01:13 | Since we compressed the images folder
rather than the individual large and thumb
| | 01:18 | folders, that's going to save us a step
later on, because now we've compressed
| | 01:22 | not only just a folder, but all of
the containing subfolders as well.
| | 01:27 | Let's go ahead and upload all
these files into our Moodle course.
| | 01:31 | We go back to our browser and we're
logged into our Coral Reef Ecology course,
| | 01:36 | go ahead and scroll down until you
find the My private files block on the
| | 01:40 | right-hand side and click the
button for Manage my private files.
| | 01:44 | Go into your BIOL432 folder
and then click the Add button.
| | 01:50 | This'll bring up our standard File
picker. Go ahead and click the Upload a file
| | 01:54 | button and under the
Attachments link, click the Browse button.
| | 01:58 | Now navigate back out to your desktop
and you want to upload the images.zip
| | 02:04 | file, click Open, and press Upload this
file, and then go ahead and add, press the
| | 02:11 | Browse button again, and this time we
want to upload the Week 2 Gallery.zip file.
| | 02:16 | Press Open and press the
Upload this file button.
| | 02:20 | So now both of the zip files have been
uploaded. Let's go ahead and unzip just
| | 02:24 | the images.zip file. Don't unzip
the Week 2 Gallery folder, though.
| | 02:28 | So we're going to hit the little
icon to the right of that file and press
| | 02:32 | the button for unzip.
| | 02:34 | Now if you're on a Mac, you've got this
_MacOSX file. Simply go ahead and hit the
| | 02:39 | dropdown next to that and hit Delete.
That's a resource file that's created only
| | 02:43 | on the Mac and it's not necessary,
so go ahead and just delete that file.
| | 02:47 | Now you can see we have our images
folder that you can go into, where we have our
| | 02:51 | large and our thumbnail size images,
and there we can see each of those files
| | 02:56 | that we've uploaded.
| | 02:57 | Go ahead and scroll all the way to
the bottom now and press Save changes.
| | 03:02 | This will make sure that all of our
folders that we've just created in our
| | 03:05 | course have been saved properly.
| | 03:08 | Now we have those images' files and
we're able to use those images now anywhere
| | 03:12 | within our Moodle course.
| | 03:13 | In the next movie, I'll show you how
to display that web photo gallery that
| | 03:17 | we created.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting a photo gallery| 00:00 | Now that we've created our web photo
gallery in an outside image editing program
| | 00:05 | and we've batched-uploaded that
folder as a zip file to our private files,
| | 00:10 | now let's go ahead and post an
entire gallery into our course.
| | 00:13 | Make sure that editing is turned on
and scroll down to the Week 2 Section.
| | 00:19 | Here we've already gone ahead
and added our section headings.
| | 00:22 | You can find these in the Chapter 4
exercise files if you haven't already posted them.
| | 00:26 | Click the dropdown menu and
choose the option for Add a file.
| | 00:31 | We're going to go ahead and
name this the Week 2 Image Gallery.
| | 00:38 | And under the Description we're
going to put "Images presented in class to
| | 00:45 | display the ecological
diversity of a coral reef."
| | 00:50 | Go ahead and scroll down to the Content section.
| | 00:54 | Click the Add button. In the standard File
picker go ahead and select Private files.
| | 01:00 | Go into your BIOL432 folder and
inside of here you should find the Week 2
| | 01:06 | Gallery.zip file that we
uploaded in the last exercise file.
| | 01:09 | Go ahead and select that file and then
simply click the Select this file button.
| | 01:15 | Next click the dropdown menu that's
just to the right of Week 2 Gallery.zip and
| | 01:21 | choose the option for Unzip.
| | 01:23 | You want to make sure that you
haven't unzipped the file previously.
| | 01:27 | You want to just do that here.
| | 01:28 | So we'll unzip the file. Again, if we
compress this on a Mac, you'll have this
| | 01:34 | _MacOSX resource file.
| | 01:36 | You can simply click on that menu
and select Delete to get rid of it.
| | 01:40 | Next go into the Week 2 Gallery folder,
and you want to look for the index.html
| | 01:46 | file and click the small
dropdown menu just to the right of that.
| | 01:50 | You want to set this option to Set main file.
| | 01:53 | This means Moodle will then look to
open to this index.html file, and it will in
| | 01:59 | turn be able to open all of the other
relative files. Go ahead and scroll down
| | 02:05 | a little bit further.
| | 02:06 | Next we want to click the button for
Show advanced in the Options section.
| | 02:10 | Here we have a variety of different options,
| | 02:12 | but what we want to do is hit the
dropdown menu for display and we want to
| | 02:16 | display this gallery in a pop-up window.
That's going to spring open a whole new window for us.
| | 02:22 | We can also set the pixel dimensions
that we want that window to open up in.
| | 02:27 | The default of 620x450
is not quite large enough,
| | 02:30 | so we're going to go ahead and select
that and we are going to type in 1024x768.
| | 02:37 | That's going to be a
pretty standard-size window.
| | 02:39 | We can then scroll all the way to the
bottom and click the button for Save
| | 02:43 | and return to course.
| | 02:45 | When our page refreshes go ahead and
take the Week 2 Image Gallery and drag
| | 02:50 | it up into our LECTURE MATERIALS
section and go and use the Move Right button
| | 02:55 | to tab in it and underneath of gallery
materials. Let's go ahead and see if this worked.
| | 03:00 | Click on the link for Week 2 Image
Gallery and you should get a pop-up window
| | 03:05 | that opens in a new browser window that
has your photo gallery with the names of
| | 03:09 | each of your images that your students
can then click on one by one and be able
| | 03:14 | to navigate through your slide deck one
image at a time. They can then close this
| | 03:19 | browser window and get back to your main course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating header graphics in Fireworks| 00:00 | Perhaps one of the most common
questions that I am asked by faculty when I
| | 00:04 | began working with them to build their courses
in Moodle is, how do I make my page look better?
| | 00:11 | In this movie, I am going to show you
how I created these header graphics that
| | 00:15 | I use as separators that I've shown how to
display as labels inside of the Moodle course.
| | 00:22 | I obviously can't show you every
single technique in every single application
| | 00:26 | that's out there in order to build graphics.
| | 00:28 | There are a lot of titles here in the
lynda.com Training Library that can help
| | 00:32 | you become much better at
producing effective web graphics.
| | 00:36 | But in this movie, I am going to show
you how to use Fireworks in order to
| | 00:38 | create these basic headers.
| | 00:40 | So I am going to go ahead and minimize
my browser, and I am going to go ahead and
| | 00:44 | I am going to use Adobe Fireworks CS5
in order to show you the technique that I
| | 00:48 | use to create those graphics.
| | 00:50 | If you've got any version of Fireworks,
the process is basically the same.
| | 00:54 | In most any other image editing program,
you can do a similar kind of technique.
| | 00:59 | Let's begin by creating a new
Fireworks document, or a new PNG file.
| | 01:03 | You can also use JPEGs or GIF images as well.
| | 01:06 | The important part is the size of the image.
| | 01:09 | Now, I'd like to use images that
are about 500 pixels wide and about 30
| | 01:14 | pixels tall when I am making my graphics that
I am going to use as labels within my course.
| | 01:20 | The resolution should generally be
about 72 pixels per inch, and I like to set
| | 01:25 | the canvas to be
transparent in my background color.
| | 01:29 | I could also use white because the particular
theme that I am using has a white background.
| | 01:33 | If the background of your Moodle page
that your particular institution uses is
| | 01:38 | a particular color, you can choose
that color right here to use that as your
| | 01:42 | background, and you can make your
graphics stand out just a little bit more.
| | 01:47 | Go ahead and select OK, and now
we have our basic image here.
| | 01:51 | Let's go ahead and add some text by
clicking on the Text tool over in the Tool
| | 01:56 | palette on the left-hand side and
then simply clicking inside of this area.
| | 02:01 | Don't worry about the size right now;
| | 02:02 | we'll fix that in just a second.
| | 02:03 | I'd like to go ahead and
put my heading in all caps.
| | 02:08 | That helps them stand out just a little bit.
| | 02:10 | So I am going to go ahead and press my
Caps Lock key on my keyboard and just
| | 02:13 | call this LECTURE MATERIALS.
| | 02:16 | Now you'll notice that my
text is larger than the image.
| | 02:21 | That's not a problem.
| | 02:22 | Next, I am going to go ahead,
| | 02:23 | I am going to select that text, and I
am going to come down here to the bottom,
| | 02:27 | and I am going to set just a
couple of quick parameters.
| | 02:30 | First of all, I am going to set the font size.
| | 02:32 | Right now it's set to 29, or some other level.
| | 02:35 | I am going to go ahead and change
that to 18 and hit Enter on my keyboard.
| | 02:39 | You can see that my text has changed in size.
| | 02:43 | The next thing I am going to set is I
am going to go ahead and set the font.
| | 02:46 | Now for my font I like to choose
something that's going to be fairly
| | 02:49 | universal and something that I am going
to be able to match within my browser.
| | 02:54 | You'll notice as we've clicked into
some of the font menus in the HTML movies
| | 02:58 | that there are not a whole lot of
fonts available on the web that are common
| | 03:01 | across all platforms.
| | 03:03 | I am going to go ahead and I am going to use
Helvetica, because I'd like the way that it looks.
| | 03:06 | It's very easy to read
and it's a nice clean font.
| | 03:09 | Now I am going to make two other changes.
| | 03:12 | The next change is down here.
| | 03:13 | That's my kerning, or tracking,
and the default has the kerning or tracking,
| | 03:18 | which is the width, which is the space
that's in between the letters here, set down to 0.
| | 03:24 | I am going to go ahead and set this to
the same value that I set my font size at.
| | 03:28 | So I set my font size at 18, so I'll
set my kerning, or tracking, also at 18.
| | 03:33 | Type that in and I'll hit Return.
| | 03:35 | What happens on screen is you can see
the text is just spread out just a little
| | 03:39 | bit to make this text a
little bit more readable.
| | 03:42 | The final thing that I am going to do to
my text is I am going to change the color.
| | 03:45 | Now I try and come up with maybe one
or two colors that I am going to use
| | 03:49 | consistently throughout my page.
| | 03:51 | Now, I am obviously not a graphic artist,
so my color choices may not always be
| | 03:55 | the best ones out there, and you may
want to contact the art department at your
| | 03:58 | school and try and get a couple of
choice of colors that you could use that
| | 04:02 | would go well with your school's theme.
| | 04:04 | In this case, I am going to go ahead
and I am going to hit the little color
| | 04:07 | palette here, and I am going to
choose this upper-left red color.
| | 04:10 | You can also see the
number value for it is #990000.
| | 04:16 | It's that nice red color that we've been using.
| | 04:18 | Okay, I've got my text in here.
| | 04:20 | I am going to click the Pointer tool
up here in the upper left to deselect my
| | 04:24 | text, and now I drag it
around to right where I want it.
| | 04:27 | Now what I want to do is I usually try
and get the text fairly close over to
| | 04:31 | the left-hand edge, and I can use my
arrow keys on my keyboard now to kind of
| | 04:36 | nudge the text over.
| | 04:37 | But what I don't want to do is I don't
the text to go all the way off to the edge.
| | 04:40 | And then come in maybe two
clicks off of the right-hand edge.
| | 04:44 | I want the text to be generally pretty
well centered within that space. All right!
| | 04:48 | I am going to deselect, and now I have
my nice clean LECTURE MATERIALS text.
| | 04:54 | The last thing I want to do is I want to
go ahead and create a single horizontal
| | 04:58 | line to provide a little baseline to this text.
| | 05:02 | So over here in the Vector section
there's the Line tool.
| | 05:06 | I'll go ahead and click on that one
time, and I am going to come down just
| | 05:09 | underneath of the L, and I am going to click
and hold down, and I am going to start dragging.
| | 05:13 | Now notice my line is
kind of all over the place.
| | 05:16 | What I want to do is I want to get most of
the way over and keep holding my mouse down.
| | 05:19 | I am going to hold down the Shift key,
and the line is going to snap into a
| | 05:24 | perfectly horizontal line.
| | 05:26 | Fireworks is really helping me out here
quite a lot, and I am going to go ahead
| | 05:30 | now and just release my mouse click,
and now I have a perfectly straight line.
| | 05:34 | The line is currently black,
we can see down here in our color.
| | 05:38 | So I'll go ahead and click the Color
tool here and select that same red that we
| | 05:42 | had before, and our line
is now only 1 pixel wide.
| | 05:46 | So it's going to be a nice
thin line underneath of there.
| | 05:49 | I'll go ahead and use my Arrow tool
again and deselect, so I can get a good
| | 05:53 | visual as to where this line actually is.
| | 05:55 | So I'll select it one more time and use
my arrow keys to kind of nudge it over a
| | 06:00 | little bit. I am trying to just
make sure that the left-hand edge comes
| | 06:03 | pretty close to lining up with the L there.
| | 06:05 | It should be just about half way between the
text and the bottom of the image. So there we go.
| | 06:12 | It's not really fancy, but it
provides a nice separation for us.
| | 06:17 | Now that I have this file once, I could
duplicate it, and type over top of the text
| | 06:22 | and change for all of my
different image headings.
| | 06:25 | Okay, the last step is just simply
saving this file. Because we created the file
| | 06:29 | as a PNG, we don't really have to
worry too much about the image compression.
| | 06:33 | Fireworks is going to go
ahead and handle that for us.
| | 06:35 | I am just going to go up here to File,
and we are going to choose Save, and we
| | 06:39 | can go ahead and point this file out
to our desktop, and I am going to call
| | 06:44 | this lectureMaterials.
| | 06:47 | Now notice I didn't put a space in here.
| | 06:49 | I try really hard, especially when I am
creating images for my Moodle pages, to
| | 06:54 | not put spaces in my file names because
that just helps Moodle as it's storing
| | 06:58 | the file in being able to call
them up for the web, so we know extra
| | 07:01 | characters get put in there.
| | 07:02 | So there we go,
lectureMaterials onto the desktop.
| | 07:05 | I'll go ahead and hit Save.
| | 07:07 | Go ahead and close this
Fireworks document. Here we are.
| | 07:11 | Here's our lectureMaterials.png.
| | 07:13 | I'll go ahead and spacebar on my Mac,
and I can see that I've got my nice clean
| | 07:17 | text here with my line, and now I can
go ahead and upload this file as we've
| | 07:22 | seen in earlier movies and add it in as a
label to separate the text in our documents.
| | 07:29 | If we go ahead and go back to Fireworks,
this is what it looks like when it's put in place.
| | 07:34 | So now you know how to
create some basic headers.
| | 07:37 | If we scroll down a little bit, you can
see the other ones that we've been using
| | 07:40 | throughout this title that have
been Required Readings and Assignment.
| | 07:43 | So I encourage you to explore, play
around, try some different font choices, try
| | 07:48 | some different colors,
and some different headings.
| | 07:50 | Again, the image sizes that I use
to create these is 500 pixels wide by
| | 07:56 | 30 pixels tall.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preparing audio| 00:00 | Another type of media file that many
teachers find is incredibly helpful as a
| | 00:05 | teaching tool is audio files.
| | 00:07 | Audio files can be used in a whole
variety of different ways within your teaching.
| | 00:11 | And Moodle allows you to
very easily post audio files.
| | 00:15 | It can post MP3, WAV, AIFF,
several different other formats as well.
| | 00:21 | The trick is getting Moodle to play the
files, and in this movie I'll step you
| | 00:26 | through a series of compression
techniques using a very easy and common tool
| | 00:30 | that's available on all platforms,
the iTunes music player, and in order to
| | 00:35 | compress a series of audio files.
| | 00:38 | Now we're going to start off
in a Chapter 04 exercise files.
| | 00:41 | There's an Audio folder and inside of
there is a folder called RAW, and inside of
| | 00:45 | here I've created a whole series of
audio recordings of myself simply saying the
| | 00:51 | name of a bunch of different Coral Reef species.
| | 00:53 | I'll go ahead and play one of these for you
now, so you can hear what we're going to use.
| | 00:57 | Acropora palmata.
| | 00:59 | They are pretty basic files.
| | 01:01 | The size of the file is about 2.9 MB,
but we can do better than that, and
| | 01:06 | the default file format that I left them in
after I recorded them are QuickTime movies.
| | 01:10 | Now what we want is we want to get them
first converted into AIFF so that they
| | 01:15 | have the correct bit rate, and then
we're going to go ahead recompress these
| | 01:18 | files into MP3 files that are
appropriately compressed for displaying within the
| | 01:24 | Moodle browser, and they will
play within the default players.
| | 01:28 | Let's begin by opening up a copy of iTunes.
| | 01:31 | Now if you don't have a copy of iTunes,
you can go to www.apple.com/itunes and
| | 01:36 | download a copy for free.
| | 01:38 | Get it installed on your machine and
once you've iTunes set up all, you need to
| | 01:42 | do is go into the RAW folder.
| | 01:45 | Now if you're using a Mac, go ahead and
use the RAW Mac folder, and all of these
| | 01:48 | files are MOV files or QuickTime movies.
| | 01:51 | If you're using Windows go ahead and
go into the RAW Windows folder, and
| | 01:56 | that folder has a bunch of WAV or WAV files,
which is more common on the Windows platform.
| | 02:01 | Go ahead and click on the first file
and then press Command+A, or Ctrl+A, on your
| | 02:04 | keyboard to select all of the files.
| | 02:07 | Then simply drag them all down into the
iTunes music player, and iTunes will go
| | 02:13 | ahead and automatically
import all of those files for you.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to go ahead and minimize my
Finder window and my browser to get them
| | 02:20 | both out of my way for right now,
so we can just focus on iTunes.
| | 02:24 | And the next thing that's helpful is to
add another column of information here.
| | 02:27 | Either Ctrl+Click or right-click on the
menu bar at the top and you will get a
| | 02:32 | dropdown menu that lists all of the
additional headings that you can add.
| | 02:36 | Come down until you find the Kind option.
| | 02:38 | Select Kind and we're going to go ahead
and get rid of the sidebar here for Ping,
| | 02:43 | and I'm going to grab
right here in between the Kind.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to drag that out a little bit,
so you can clearly see that all of these
| | 02:49 | files that we have are now QuickTime files.
| | 02:52 | The next thing we need to do is to
go ahead and change our compression
| | 02:56 | settings within iTunes.
| | 02:58 | So if you're on a Mac, go up to the
iTunes menu; on a PC go to the Edit menu, and
| | 03:02 | then select Preferences or Settings.
| | 03:05 | You want the General tab. Then you want
to come about three quarters of the way down
| | 03:09 | and find the section where
it says, "When you insert a CD."
| | 03:12 | Click on the button for Import Settings.
| | 03:15 | The default settings here are
generally set to AAC Encoder.
| | 03:19 | Click that dropdown menu, and we want to
do the first step here, by converting all
| | 03:23 | of these files to AIF files. So select
the AIFF Encoder and then under Settings,
| | 03:29 | instead of Automatic, choose Custom.
| | 03:32 | The AIFF Encoder settings come up.
| | 03:34 | What we want to do is hit the
dropdown menu for Sample Rate.
| | 03:37 | The player that's built into
Moodle likes some multiple of 11.127 kHz.
| | 03:41 | So we're going to select a
44.100 kHz as our default sample rate.
| | 03:49 | We're going to leave the Sample Size
set to Auto and the Channel set to Auto
| | 03:53 | and simply click OK.
| | 03:54 | We'll click the OK button for the
Import Settings, and then we'll click the OK
| | 03:58 | button to close our Preferences.
| | 04:01 | Click on the first item in our
list of audio files, in this case
| | 04:05 | Acropora_palmata, scroll down to the
bottom, hold down the Shift key on your
| | 04:09 | keyboard, and click on the bottom item,
in this case Yellow_Tubes_Sponge.
| | 04:14 | This selects all the
files that we just imported.
| | 04:16 | Go up to the Advanced menu and
you'll notice you've a new option in here,
| | 04:20 | Create AIFF Version.
| | 04:22 | Go ahead and click on that and iTunes
will step through and automatically create
| | 04:27 | a new version of each of these
files for us in the new file format.
| | 04:31 | You can see that all of those files
have now shown up interspersed amongst the
| | 04:36 | original QuickTime files.
| | 04:38 | Now this would be a little tricky to go
through and individually select each of
| | 04:41 | these, but since we have the
Kind heading, this is not a problem.
| | 04:44 | Simply click on Kind and iTunes
automatically sorts all of the audio files by Kind.
| | 04:51 | We have the first step done.
| | 04:52 | Now we've to convert all these AIF files
into a specifically configured MP3 file.
| | 04:59 | So let's go back up to either the
iTunes or the Edit menu and go down to
| | 05:03 | Preferences or Settings, back to
General, click on Import Settings again, and
| | 05:08 | this time for Import Using, click the
dropdown menu and choose MP3 Encoder.
| | 05:15 | Again, click the dropdown menu
for Settings and select Custom.
| | 05:18 | This will bring up the MP3 Encoder settings.
| | 05:22 | You want to set the Stereo
Bit Rate down to 64 kbps.
| | 05:27 | You want to make sure that Using
Variable Bit Rate Encoding or VBR is deselected.
| | 05:33 | Under the Sample Rate click the
dropdown menu and select the same 44.100 kHz
| | 05:39 | that we selected in the previous step.
| | 05:42 | Under Channels go ahead and select
Stereo and under Stereo mode, make sure it's
| | 05:47 | set to Joint Stereo.
| | 05:49 | You want to uncheck the box for Smart
Encoding Adjustments, and you do want to
| | 05:54 | leave the box checked for
Filter Frequencies Below 10 kHz.
| | 05:59 | So with these settings go
ahead and click the OK button.
| | 06:02 | iTunes will ask if you want to
change your recommended settings.
| | 06:05 | Just go ahead and leave those as they
are, because you're probably going to use
| | 06:08 | iTunes for some of your music as well.
| | 06:10 | Click OK and click OK for the
Preferences to close that window.
| | 06:15 | Now this time when we go to
select our files, simply click on
| | 06:18 | Acropora_palmata at the top.
| | 06:20 | Make sure you're getting the AIFF version.
| | 06:22 | Scroll down until you
find the Yellow_Tubes_Sponge.
| | 06:25 | That's the last one of the AIFF
versions. Hold down the Shift key on your
| | 06:29 | keyboard and click on Yellow_Tubes_Sponge.
| | 06:32 | This will select all of just the AIFF files.
| | 06:35 | Next, go back up to Advanced, and there
again you have a new item to Create MP3 Version.
| | 06:42 | Click the menu item for that, and now we
can see that all of the MP3 versions of
| | 06:49 | all of our files have been created for us.
| | 06:51 | The final step with iTunes is to export
these files out and into a folder on our desktop.
| | 06:56 | Let's start by creating that folder on
our desktop and either right-click or
| | 07:00 | Ctrl+Click on the desktop and choose New Folder.
| | 07:04 | Name the file Audio and then simply
click on the first Acropora_palmata for MP3
| | 07:10 | in iTunes, scroll down to the bottom of
the MP3 listings, hold down the Shift key
| | 07:15 | and click on the Yellow_Tubes_Sponge,
and then simply click and drag all 34 files
| | 07:21 | and drop them into the Audio folder.
| | 07:23 | If you double-click on the Audio folder,
you can now see that all those MP3s
| | 07:28 | have been created. And I'm going to go
ahead and play one of these files for us,
| | 07:32 | so we can hear what the file sounds like now
that it's been compressed.
| | 07:36 | (text-to-speech reader: Acropora palmata.)
| | 07:39 | So this file that used to be
2.5 megabytes is now only 29 KB.
| | 07:44 | The audio sounds pretty good, and we're ready
to go ahead and post this up to our course.
| | 07:49 | Not every audio file is going to
compress with exactly these settings, so you
| | 07:53 | may need to go through and try your
audio files one by one to make sure that
| | 07:58 | they all sound good with
these particular settings.
| | 08:01 | Now if you're also exporting music or
some other type of audio, you may need to
| | 08:05 | go in and adjust some of the settings.
| | 08:07 | But these setting should hold pretty well,
and they will work with the Moodle player.
| | 08:12 | Let's go ahead and close our folder here,
and in order to upload a whole folder
| | 08:17 | of files to Moodle, we first need to zip them.
| | 08:19 | So either right-click or
Ctrl+Click on the folder and on a Mac choose
| | 08:23 | Compress Audio, on a PC choose Send to >
Compress Zip, and our Audio.zip file has been created.
| | 08:31 | We can then bring back up our web browser.
| | 08:33 | We're back in Moodle, and we can go
ahead and scroll down until we find our My
| | 08:38 | private files section. Go ahead and
click the Manage my private files button.
| | 08:42 | We can go into our BIOL432 course, and I'm
going to go ahead and hit the Add button now.
| | 08:48 | Make sure you've got the Upload a
file item selected from your File picker
| | 08:53 | on the left-hand side.
| | 08:55 | Click the Browse button, and we
should be at our Desktop already;
| | 08:58 | if not, go ahead and navigate out to your
desktop and select on the Audio.zip file.
| | 09:03 | Go ahead and click the Open
button. Hit the Upload this file.
| | 09:07 | Audio.zip is right there.
| | 09:09 | We can hit the little menu
item next to it and say Unzip.
| | 09:12 | Here is our _MACOSX file since we did
this on the Mac, and we can just go and
| | 09:16 | delete that resource if you're on a Mac.
| | 09:19 | Go ahead and hit the Yes
button, and there we go.
| | 09:21 | We have our Audio folder.
| | 09:23 | We'll go ahead and click inside of
there, and now we can see all of our MP3
| | 09:26 | files have been uploaded to Moodle.
| | 09:28 | Go ahead and scroll all the way to the
bottom of the page and be sure to click
| | 09:31 | the Save changes button so all those
files remain in your private files section.
| | 09:36 | And in the next movie, we'll show
you how to post those audio files into
| | 09:39 | your Moodle course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting audio files| 00:00 | Now that we have our audio files
compressed and they've been uploaded to our
| | 00:04 | course, let's go ahead and begin
creating a species identification guide
| | 00:09 | where we can post the name of an organism,
the pronunciation, and an image of that organism.
| | 00:14 | So to begin make sure that editing is
turned on on your course and scroll down
| | 00:18 | to Week 2, where we are going to talk
about Coral Reef Structure and Diversity.
| | 00:22 | Click the dropdown menu for Add a
resource, and let's select Page.
| | 00:26 | We will give this page a name,
Coral Reef Species Identification.
| | 00:33 | In the Description, we will simply go
ahead and type in "Learn how to identify
| | 00:39 | and pronounce the names of common reef species."
| | 00:46 | Go ahead and scroll down to the Page
content section, and now we are going to
| | 00:51 | make a couple of really simple headings.
| | 00:52 | We are going to type in "Name," hit
Return and type in "Pronunciation," hit a
| | 00:59 | colon and hit Return.
| | 01:00 | Let's go back up to the Name
field and put a space in here, and let's type
| | 01:05 | in the name of the coral,
"Acropora palmata."
| | 01:07 | Go ahead and select the name and
since this is a proper scientific name, we
| | 01:13 | should italicize it,
| | 01:14 | so we will hit the Italicize button.
| | 01:17 | For the Pronunciation hit the spacebar,
and we are going to use the Insert Moodle
| | 01:21 | Media tool, which is down here on the
toolbar, so go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:26 | Under the General section click the space
that says Find or upload a sound or video file.
| | 01:31 | This should open up our File picker.
| | 01:33 | You want to make sure that you're in
your Private files section and navigate
| | 01:37 | into your BIOL432 folder.
| | 01:40 | Go into your Audio folder, and you
should have a listing of all the audio files
| | 01:44 | that we compressed from earlier,
and this first one right here the Acropora
| | 01:47 | palmata, this should be right up in the front.
| | 01:49 | I will go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:51 | The name looks good here.
| | 01:52 | We will go ahead and select the file.
| | 01:54 | Now you may get a pop-up warning saying
that QuickTime needs some components in
| | 01:59 | order to be able to play this file.
| | 02:02 | Go ahead and hit Cancel if
that does pop up for you.
| | 02:04 | There's no need to worry about it.
| | 02:06 | You don't really need to have QuickTime
to be able to play this. Moodle is going
| | 02:09 | to be able to identify
and play the file just fine.
| | 02:12 | So come down to the bottom and hit
the Insert button, and here we go.
| | 02:16 | We have got the
Pronunciation: Acropora_palmata.
| | 02:19 | There is just right now a link to
this MP3 file, but don't worry; when we
| | 02:23 | refresh the page it's going to show up properly.
| | 02:26 | Go ahead and click down on the last
line where we had that extra return, and we
| | 02:30 | want to go ahead and insert an image this time.
| | 02:33 | Let's use the Insert/edit image tool,
and it's going to ask us, what do we want to do?
| | 02:37 | We want to Find or upload an image.
| | 02:39 | Make sure you're in your Private files section.
| | 02:41 | Again, in the File picker, go into BIOL432.
| | 02:45 | Let's go into the Images folder, and we
are going to go into the large folder.
| | 02:49 | And your file names may be a little odd.
| | 02:52 | They may not have the exact names of
the organisms, but the one that we're
| | 02:56 | looking for, if you have uploaded it
from the exercise files, is 1001110222.jpg.
| | 03:04 | If you used another image compression
tool than I used, that file may already be
| | 03:08 | named properly, and the correct name
for this should be Acropora_palmate.
| | 03:16 | So notice I have got the underscore in
between the two names here, so that there
| | 03:20 | are no spaces in that file name.
| | 03:22 | So then Select this file.
| | 03:24 | We can see that that is the correct image.
| | 03:27 | Come back up here to Image
description, and we need to go ahead and type
| | 03:29 | in Acropora palmate.
| | 03:30 | That will make our image
accessible to screen readers.
| | 03:35 | Then come on down here and click the
Insert button, and that image should then
| | 03:38 | appear inside of our page.
| | 03:40 | We can scroll down and look and see.
Yes, in fact that is the Acropora
| | 03:44 | palmata coral that we wanted to show.
| | 03:46 | Now we have got everything
added to our page that we want.
| | 03:49 | We can go ahead and scroll down to the
bottom, click Save and return to course.
| | 03:54 | Our screen should refresh and bring us
right back down to Week 2 where we were
| | 03:57 | working, and here's that Coral
Reef Species Identification guide.
| | 04:01 | Let's go ahead and drag that up into
the Lecture Materials section, and we will
| | 04:04 | go and indent that over to the right
to make it align nicely with our other
| | 04:08 | items, and let's go ahead and check our work.
| | 04:10 | Go ahead and click on the Coral Reefs
Species Identification link that we just
| | 04:13 | created, and notice that before even
though we weren't seeing the little player,
| | 04:17 | here's our audio player right here.
| | 04:18 | We have the proper name of the organism,
| | 04:21 | we have an image of the organism, and we can
go ahead and press the button to listen to it.
| | 04:25 | (text-to-speech reader: Acropora palmate.)
| | 04:28 | So now the students have a very good
way to strongly identify the organism with
| | 04:34 | the name of the file, both
the spelling and pronunciation.
| | 04:38 | Let's go ahead and hit back on the
BIOL432 link in our breadcrumbs to take
| | 04:43 | us back to the main page, and in the
next movie we will start exploring how
| | 04:47 | to compress video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preparing video| 00:00 | Compressing video for the web truly is
an art form in and of to itself, and in a
| | 00:06 | single movie there's no way that I
could cover every single type of compression
| | 00:11 | algorithm, file format.
| | 00:13 | But as a teacher, there are a lot of
times when you're going to have some piece
| | 00:17 | of video that you've maybe captured off
of your digital camera or some piece of
| | 00:21 | footage that you've captured within
your classroom that you want to be able to
| | 00:24 | post within your Moodle site.
| | 00:26 | So in this movie, I am going to show
you one technique that you can use to be
| | 00:29 | able to get your videos compressed and in a
format that can be posted easily to your
| | 00:34 | Moodle course and
distributed out to your students.
| | 00:38 | To begin, I am going to go
ahead and minimize my browser.
| | 00:41 | I have opened the exercise files,
Chapter 04, the Movies folder, and there's a
| | 00:45 | file in here called GreenMorayMASTER.mov.
| | 00:48 | I am going to go ahead and open up that file
and go ahead and begin playing it for you.
| | 00:52 | The video is just a couple of seconds long
of a green moray eel that I shot in Belize.
| | 00:57 | There is no audio
associated with the file at all.
| | 01:01 | It's just a plain video.
| | 01:02 | It's about 12 seconds long.
| | 01:04 | You can see that the video player
that I've opened it up with is the
| | 01:07 | QuickTime player, version 7.
| | 01:09 | Now, if you don't have a copy of
QuickTime, it's available for both Mac and
| | 01:13 | Windows, and you can download
it from www.apple.com/quicktime.
| | 01:18 | Now, I will note, if you're using one of
the more recent Macs, Apple has gone to
| | 01:22 | a newer version of QuickTime called
QuickTime Ten, or QuickTime X. I would still
| | 01:27 | suggest downloading the
QuickTime player version 7.
| | 01:31 | The other thing that you should note
about this player is that you need to
| | 01:34 | unlock the Pro version of the player
and if you're on a Mac, you can click on
| | 01:38 | the QuickTime player 7 menu,
and go to Registration.
| | 01:42 | On Windows, go to the Edit
menu, and select Properties.
| | 01:45 | The QuickTime player is a $29 upgrade,
but what it does is it unlocks an enormous
| | 01:50 | amount of tools that will allow you
to compress video and export video in a
| | 01:55 | variety of different formats.
| | 01:57 | So this video that we are working with
is about a 10-megabyte file, and we are
| | 02:01 | going to step through some basic
compression settings so that you can export it
| | 02:04 | to a smaller format.
| | 02:06 | To begin, go up to the File menu
and come down to the Export menu.
| | 02:10 | Now, you will notice that there is an
Export for web option, but don't select that.
| | 02:15 | The Export menu is going to
give us even more control.
| | 02:18 | So go ahead and select Export, and now
in our standard File > Export menu, we
| | 02:22 | are going to get rid of
the MASTER in the file name,
| | 02:25 | do we're just going to
Backspace over top of that.
| | 02:27 | It's going to ask us, where
do we want to save this file?
| | 02:30 | Let's go ahead and make sure we save that
out to our desktop so it's easy to access.
| | 02:34 | We have our Export options down here.
Click the dropdown menu, and here you can
| | 02:39 | see there are a variety of different
formats that you can export your video to.
| | 02:43 | We're going to select Movie to QuickTime Movie.
| | 02:47 | Under the Use menu, hit that
dropdown menu and select Broadband-High.
| | 02:52 | This is going to produce good quality of video.
| | 02:55 | Let's go ahead and tweak some of our settings.
| | 02:58 | Click on the Options button and now we
are going to go ahead and look at the
| | 03:02 | three different types of settings we have.
| | 03:04 | We have our settings for video,
for sound, and prepare for fast
| | 03:07 | Internet streaming.
| | 03:09 | We can see here that for Video settings
we are going to compress this video as
| | 03:13 | H.264, using a High Quality
rate and a Keyframe rate of 150.
| | 03:18 | The Bitrate will be set to 672,
and Frame reordering is going to be set to yes.
| | 03:24 | The Encoding mode will be set to
multi-pass, and the Dimensions currently
| | 03:27 | are set to 480x360.
Well, our video doesn't match that.
| | 03:32 | So let's go ahead and adjust that.
| | 03:33 | So hit the Size button and under the
Custom Setting, go ahead and type in 640
| | 03:38 | for the first value.
| | 03:40 | You can leave the second value set to 360.
| | 03:41 | Now, in the next line, check the box
that says Preserve aspect ratio using: Letterbox (if required).
| | 03:48 | This way, our video won't skew.
| | 03:51 | Go ahead and hit the OK button.
| | 03:52 | Now, since this video that we are
compressing does not have any sound, we're
| | 03:55 | going to go ahead and uncheck the
Sound setting, but we are going to leave
| | 03:58 | Prepare for Internet Streaming set.
| | 04:00 | So that's all we are going to
change off of the default settings.
| | 04:04 | Hit the OK button, and now
everything looks correct.
| | 04:07 | Go ahead and hit the Save button and our
video should begin exporting out to our Desktop.
| | 04:14 | Now that our video is finished,
let's go ahead and check the file.
| | 04:17 | We can note again that our
first file was only 10 megabytes.
| | 04:21 | So now we can click on our file.
| | 04:22 | I am going to press Command+I for
Get Info on my Mac; on Windows, you can
| | 04:26 | right-click and choose Properties.
| | 04:30 | Now we can see that our
video is now 1.1 megabytes.
| | 04:32 | So a fair amount of
compression has been applied.
| | 04:35 | We have shrunk the file size down quite a bit.
| | 04:37 | Go ahead and close that and
double-click it to open it again.
| | 04:40 | So now we have both files open side-by-side.
| | 04:43 | We can see that we did get a little bit
of a color shift, but when we go ahead
| | 04:47 | and play the video, we can see that
we're not really getting any pixelation in
| | 04:51 | here, and the video looks pretty good,
even though we've compressed the video
| | 04:56 | down from 10 megs to just over 1 meg.
| | 04:58 | So that's quite good.
| | 04:59 | Go ahead and close these two files,
and now we are going to go ahead and
| | 05:04 | upload our GreenMoray.mov.
| | 05:07 | We are also going to upload a
GreenMoray.flv, which is a movie that's been
| | 05:11 | compressed already into the Flash video
format. And then we are going to upload
| | 05:15 | this movie.zip which, has a few other
files in it for us that we'll be able to
| | 05:19 | use in later movies.
| | 05:20 | So let's begin by going back down to
our browser, and we are going to make sure
| | 05:25 | we have Editing turned on, and we are
going to just scroll back down in our
| | 05:28 | Course to our My private files section.
Go ahead and click on the button for
| | 05:32 | Manage my private files.
| | 05:35 | We want to go into your BIOL432 folder
and then hit the Create folder button.
| | 05:40 | We are going to create a Movies folder, so
I will just type in movies and click OK.
| | 05:46 | This way we can keep ourselves organized.
| | 05:48 | Go ahead and click into that movies folder,
and now let's go ahead and add some files to it.
| | 05:53 | So we hit the Add button.
| | 05:54 | Your standard File picker should show up.
| | 05:56 | We want to make sure you have the
Upload a file selected, and in the Attachment
| | 06:01 | section, go ahead and hit the Browse button.
| | 06:02 | We are going to go ahead and start
off here in the movies folder, and we
| | 06:06 | are going to go ahead and upload this
movies.zip out of the Chapter 04 exercise files.
| | 06:11 | Go ahead and hit Open, and we are going
to go ahead and upload that file, and we
| | 06:15 | will add another file here. Hit Browse.
| | 06:18 | We are going to upload that
GreenMoray.flv file, hit Open, and upload that file.
| | 06:23 | We're going to add one more file.
| | 06:25 | Hit Add and Browse, go ahead and
navigate back up to your desktop, and find that
| | 06:30 | GreenMoray.mov file that we just compressed.
| | 06:33 | So we'll go ahead and
select that and upload that one.
| | 06:36 | Press the Upload this file
button and that gets all those in.
| | 06:39 | One last step while we are in here is
to go ahead and unzip the zip file; go
| | 06:44 | ahead and hit the dropdown menu
to the right of it and hit Unzip.
| | 06:47 | That should un-package all those files.
You can go ahead and get rid of that
| | 06:51 | movie.zip file now if you like, you
can hit the dropdown menu for it, and hit
| | 06:55 | Delete to do little cleanup here. Say yes.
| | 06:58 | So now all our files are in here.
All of our videos have been uploaded.
| | 07:01 | We can see our FLV and the MOV file
that we just added and all those other
| | 07:06 | movies that we can use throughout our title.
| | 07:08 | To finalize this, go ahead and hit the
Save changes button down at the bottom.
| | 07:12 | That tells Moodle that
that's in fact what we want to do.
| | 07:15 | Now, we have all of our video files
properly uploaded, and in the next video we
| | 07:19 | will show you how to start posting those.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting QuickTime video as .mov files| 00:00 | Now that we have our video compressed
and uploaded into our My private files
| | 00:04 | section, let's go ahead and
post a video into our course.
| | 00:07 | Now we're going to go ahead and add it
into the same reef identification file
| | 00:11 | that we're working on earlier.
| | 00:12 | So make sure you have editing turned on
and then you can go ahead and scroll
| | 00:15 | down to Week 2 in your course. And we
have our Coral Reef Species Identification
| | 00:22 | file that we've been working with.
| | 00:23 | Go ahead and hit the Edit or Update button.
| | 00:25 | That will take us into this page.
| | 00:27 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit,
and here in the Page content section we
| | 00:32 | have our Acropora palmata file
that we've been working with.
| | 00:36 | In order to give ourselves a little
more room to work with, let's go ahead and
| | 00:38 | jump into the full-screen view.
| | 00:40 | That'll brighten things up a
little bit for us to be able to see.
| | 00:43 | Go ahead and click at the end of your
image file. Hit the Enter or Return key.
| | 00:49 | We're going to type in the
new name of the next organism.
| | 00:51 | So I'm going to type name:
| | 00:54 | Gymnothorax funebris, which is the green moray.
| | 01:00 | We'll go ahead and put them
in parentheses (Green Moray).
| | 01:04 | We'll go ahead and select that
scientific name and make sure it's italicized.
| | 01:07 | Hit Return at the end.
| | 01:11 | Let's go ahead and just simply post that
video file right here for this next organism.
| | 01:16 | So we're going to come up here
to our Insert Moodle Media tool.
| | 01:20 | Go ahead and click on that icon and next
in the General section go ahead and hit
| | 01:24 | the Find or upload a file.
| | 01:26 | Now we should be in the Private
files section of the File picker.
| | 01:29 | Go into your BIOL432 folder,
and here's our movies folder. We can go inside of
| | 01:34 | there, and we see all of the different
video files that we've been working with.
| | 01:38 | Here is that GreenMoray.mov.
| | 01:40 | Make sure you've grab the MOV file.
| | 01:42 | Go ahead and hit the Select this file
button, and the file should preview for us
| | 01:47 | right here, and we should see
the video playing quite nicely.
| | 01:50 | Go ahead and hit the Insert button.
| | 01:51 | Just like we saw with the audio file
where we only have a link showing initially,
| | 01:56 | here we just have a link showing to the movie.
| | 01:59 | Go ahead and hit the Toggle full-screen
mode to jump out of the full-screen mode.
| | 02:03 | We'll go and scroll back down to the
bottom and hit Save and return to course.
| | 02:08 | Now when your page refreshes it should
bring you right back into your Week 2
| | 02:11 | section and then go ahead and click on the
link, and now let's check and see how that worked.
| | 02:16 | Here's our audio file and as we scroll
down a little bit, we can see there is our
| | 02:20 | Gymnothorax funebris name that we
added, and here is our video file. We can go
| | 02:24 | ahead and hit the Play button,
and that plays just fine in our browser.
| | 02:28 | So as you can see, it's quite easy to
go ahead and post a piece of video into
| | 02:33 | your course once you compress it,
and there are lots of different file formats
| | 02:37 | that you can compress your video in.
| | 02:39 | In the next movie I'll show you how
to go ahead and post a Flash file.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting Flash video as .flv files| 00:00 | Let's go ahead and look at how
you would post a Flash video file.
| | 00:03 | We are still in our course,
and we've got editing turned on.
| | 00:07 | Click on the dropdown menu for Add a
resource, and let's create another new page.
| | 00:12 | This time we are going to create a page
specifically for the green moray eel, so
| | 00:15 | we're just type in "Green
Moray Eel - Flash Video."
| | 00:21 | For the Description just go ahead and
type in "Green Moray Eel - Flash Video"
| | 00:28 | again, go ahead and scroll down to the
Page contents, type in the scientific name.
| | 00:33 | So we will type in "Name:
| | 00:37 | Gymnothorax funebris," hit Return,
type in Common Name: Green Moray.
| | 00:44 | Hit return, and let's go ahead and
italicize Gymnothorax funebris and click
| | 00:51 | down at the bottom, and let's go
ahead and add the Flash Video.
| | 00:55 | So click the button for Insert or
Edit Media. Then hit the Find or upload a
| | 01:01 | sound file or video file.
| | 01:03 | Again, in the File picker, you should
be in your Private files section. Go to
| | 01:06 | BIOL432 and go into the movies
folder that we created and look for your
| | 01:11 | GreenMoray.flv file.
| | 01:13 | So go ahead and click on
that and hit Select this file.
| | 01:16 | Now you may get a little warning here
saying, "Click here to download this plugin."
| | 01:21 | Well, don't worry about that.
Go ahead and hit Insert.
| | 01:23 | It should work just fine.
| | 01:25 | Once again, we're just going to have a
link that's displaying inside of our Page
| | 01:29 | content section, but it will
show up once we go to the page.
| | 01:33 | So go ahead and scroll down to the
bottom and click Save and return to course.
| | 01:37 | And when our screen refreshes, we will
go ahead and move our Green Moray Eel
| | 01:42 | video up into our Lecture Materials and
tab it in so that it aligns neatly with
| | 01:48 | our other items, and let's
go ahead and check our work.
| | 01:50 | So go ahead and click on
the link for Green Moray Eel.
| | 01:53 | When the video loads, you can see
it's loading in the default Flash Player
| | 01:58 | that's embedded as part of our Moodle install.
| | 02:01 | We can go ahead and hit the Play
button and the video plays out quite nicely.
| | 02:06 | There is really no difference in
posting a video for the Flash format or in
| | 02:11 | the QuickTime format. The difference ends up
being how it ends up playing on the other end.
| | 02:16 | So if you would like to learn how to
compress video into the Flash format, go
| | 02:20 | ahead and check out some of the other
titles here at lynda.com for a detailed
| | 02:24 | walkthrough as to how to do that.
| | 02:26 | So let's go ahead and return back to our course.
| | 02:28 | We are going to go back to BIOL432 in
our breadcrumbs, and that's how you work
| | 02:34 | with a lot of different types of media.
| | 02:36 | We've worked with images, we have
worked with audio, and we have worked with
| | 02:39 | video files throughout this chapter.
| | 02:41 | Now the rest of the course is going to
be dedicated to actually building the
| | 02:45 | rest of your course content using a lot
of the other features in Moodle, and in
| | 02:49 | the next chapter we are going to
spend some time looking at the new
| | 02:52 | repositories features of Moodle.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Using RepositoriesUnderstanding repositories| 00:00 | As a teacher, you store a lot of your
files currently on your own computer,
| | 00:04 | whether it be a
laptop or desktop computer,
| | 00:07 | and the typical workflow is that
you'll take those files on your computer and
| | 00:11 | you'll upload them directly into Moodle,
either into your Private files section
| | 00:15 | or directly into your Moodle course.
| | 00:17 | In recent years the web has matured so
now you may no longer store all of your
| | 00:23 | local files on your own computer.
| | 00:25 | You may use various different cloud
services such as Dropbox, Google Docs,
| | 00:30 | Flickr, or YouTube to store a lot of the files
that you normally would have on your computer.
| | 00:36 | Wouldn't it be great if you could take
all of those files that you've got out
| | 00:40 | there in the cloud and push them
directly into Moodle, whether it be into
| | 00:44 | your My private files section or
straight into your Moodle course itself?
| | 00:49 | Well, in order to do this you need to
help of your Moodle administrator. Your
| | 00:54 | Moodle administrator needs to go
into the site administration section of
| | 00:57 | Moodle and then go in and manage this
new concept called repositories that's
| | 01:02 | included in Moodle 2.
| | 01:04 | Repositories allow you to get
access directly to many different cloud
| | 01:08 | services, such as Dropbox.
| | 01:11 | What the Moodle administrator needs
to do is go into the manage repository
| | 01:15 | section and check a box saying yes, my
users should be able to use their Dropbox
| | 01:20 | accounts to post files directly in
Moodle, and in order to do that the
| | 01:24 | administrator then has to go out to
that service's web site--in this case
| | 01:29 | www.dropbox.com--and find that service's
API and get the API key that will allow
| | 01:38 | the local Moodle site to be able
to use this cloud site's services.
| | 01:43 | They'll take that API key and then load
it back into the Moodle administration
| | 01:47 | section. Then once this is done the
teacher can then go into their Moodle course
| | 01:53 | and when they go to add some content
into their course and they bring up the
| | 01:57 | standard File picker a new item
appears in the left-hand column for the
| | 02:01 | repository that has been enabled,
| | 02:03 | in this case Dropbox where the user
can then click on the link and it'll ask
| | 02:07 | them to log in to their Dropbox account,
giving them access to their files that
| | 02:12 | they can load directly
then into their Moodle course.
| | 02:15 | For the remainder of this chapter we're
going to step through a series of movies
| | 02:19 | to configure several different repositories.
| | 02:22 | The first movie of each pair will
always be using the role of the Moodle
| | 02:27 | administrator, and we're going to show
you how to turn on a particular repository,
| | 02:32 | then go out to that web site and access
the API key and load it into the Moodle
| | 02:37 | administration section.
| | 02:39 | Once this is done, we'll then spend the
next movie logged back in as the teacher
| | 02:44 | and access some files that we've
posted onto that cloud service and add some
| | 02:49 | files then directly into our Moodle course.
| | 02:52 | So for each of the following movies
you'll need to log in to the first movie as
| | 02:56 | the administrator and the second movie
as your teacher account. Let's get started
| | 03:02 | by setting up a Dropbox repository.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring a Dropbox repository| 00:00 | Let's go ahead and set up a
Dropbox repository for our user.
| | 00:04 | The first thing we're going to need
to do is make sure that we're logged in to our
| | 00:07 | Moodle server as the Administrator user.
| | 00:11 | So, log out if you're currently logged in,
log in as Admin, and use the password
| | 00:15 | 12345 if you're following along with me.
| | 00:18 | When your admin page loads, simply
scroll down to the bottom of the left-hand
| | 00:23 | column and in the Settings block
click on the link for Site administration.
| | 00:28 | Then scroll down again until
you find the section for Plugins.
| | 00:32 | Click on the links for Plugins.
| | 00:34 | You may need to scroll down
again and find Repositories.
| | 00:37 | In the Repository section, click on
the link from Manage repositories.
| | 00:42 | This is where all the repositories
are managed for your Moodle Server.
| | 00:46 | Again, you must be a Moodle
administrator in order to access this section.
| | 00:51 | Currently, you can see that there
are a couple of repositories that are
| | 00:54 | already configured for you:
| | 00:56 | Server files, Upload a file,
Recent files, and Private files.
| | 01:00 | These are the ones that you've been
seeing all along in your standard File picker.
| | 01:04 | Go ahead and scroll down on the page
until you find the section for Dropbox.
| | 01:10 | In the dropdown menu to the right of
Dropbox click the dropdown menu and
| | 01:14 | select Enabled and visible.
| | 01:17 | This will take you to the Dropbox
confirmation and configuration page.
| | 01:21 | You're asked to enter in a
Dropbox API key and a Dropbox secret.
| | 01:27 | In order to enter these files,
we need to go to the Dropbox web service and
| | 01:32 | create that information.
| | 01:34 | So, in your browser, press Command+T
or Ctrl+T to open a new tab and then go
| | 01:39 | to the Dropbox site.
| | 01:40 | Go to www.dropbox.com.
| | 01:44 | If you do not already have a Dropbox
account, or if you're not sure exactly what
| | 01:49 | Dropbox is, they have a video right here
that you can watch and you can download
| | 01:53 | the Dropbox application and
install it locally on your machine.
| | 01:57 | I've already gone ahead and done these
steps, and you can tell that I've got the
| | 02:00 | Dropbox application installed
because in the upper right-hand corner
| | 02:04 | you can see the small Dropbox icon up here.
| | 02:07 | If you don't already have an account,
you can click the Login link in the
| | 02:11 | upper right, and there is a link for Create
account, and you can create a free Dropbox account.
| | 02:16 | Once you have your Dropbox account,
go ahead and click the Login dropdown menu
| | 02:21 | and log in to your account.
| | 02:22 | I am going to log in to mine,
which is chris@chrismattia.com.
| | 02:27 | I'll type in my password,
and I'll click the Login button.
| | 02:34 | Now that I am logged in to my Dropbox
account, I can scroll all the way to the
| | 02:38 | very bottom of the page and I can see
the links that are down here in the footer
| | 02:42 | section of the Dropbox site.
| | 02:44 | The link that we're looking
for is the link for Developers.
| | 02:47 | It's in the Community
column, down near the bottom.
| | 02:50 | So, go ahead and click on the link for
Developers and this will take us to a
| | 02:53 | page that will explain
information about the API.
| | 02:56 | There is links for information and
announcements, a Quick start guide to get you
| | 03:01 | going, and then a section for My apps.
| | 03:04 | This is the place that we want to begin with.
| | 03:06 | So, go ahead click on the link for
My apps and this will take us to the
| | 03:09 | Dropbox API access.
| | 03:11 | There is a User License Agreement, or
ULA, that you need to read through and then
| | 03:16 | check the box that says "I agree with
the Dropbox Developer terms and conditions"
| | 03:20 | and click the Submit button.
| | 03:22 | Next, all you need to do is click
the button that says Create an App.
| | 03:26 | We give the application a name. In this
case, I am going to call mine MoodleESST,
| | 03:32 | for Essential Training, for Teachers.
| | 03:37 | In the Description, I am going to go
ahead and type in "Moodle Essential Training
| | 03:46 | for Teachers Test Site."
| | 03:50 | Hit the Create button and your new
application information is all created for
| | 03:56 | you, and you'll see right here in the
top section you'll see a link for App
| | 04:01 | key and App secret.
| | 04:03 | The information that's listed inside
of these two sections is the information
| | 04:07 | that we need to add into our Moodle server.
| | 04:10 | Now, one word of caution:
| | 04:11 | what we've created here is a test
account into our Dropbox account.
| | 04:17 | So, currently anyone who uses this
application key will only be able to link to
| | 04:22 | your own personal Dropbox account.
| | 04:24 | If you're a Moodle administrator
and you want a truly set this Dropbox
| | 04:28 | repository up for all users on your
server, then what you would need to do is
| | 04:33 | after you've gone through testing to
make sure that the application works, you
| | 04:37 | would come back into this page and you
would then click on the link for Apply
| | 04:41 | for a production status license.
| | 04:44 | You'll have a few more questions that
you'll have to answer about your server
| | 04:47 | and then once that is done and your
application has been approved, then Dropbox
| | 04:52 | will be available to all of your users.
But for the purposes of this video
| | 04:56 | training series, what we've got set
up here will work just fine for us.
| | 05:00 | So, go ahead and select all of the
information that's listed in blue under the
| | 05:05 | App key section and simply press
Command+C, or Ctrl+C, on your keyboard to copy
| | 05:10 | that to the clipboard.
| | 05:11 | Then we're just going to click back
over to the first tab in our browser where
| | 05:16 | we have our Moodle site set up,
and we're going to click into the section for
| | 05:20 | Dropbox API key and press Command+V,
or Ctrl+V, to paste that information in.
| | 05:26 | Let's click back into our Dropbox tab
| | 05:28 | and this time select the text in the
App secret, press Command+C, or Ctrl+C, to
| | 05:34 | copy it, go back over to your Moodle
course, go back into the Dropbox secret, and
| | 05:40 | press Command+V, or Ctrl+V, to paste that in.
| | 05:43 | When you're finished,
go ahead and click the Save button.
| | 05:47 | Okay, your Dropbox should now be
properly configured in your Manage
| | 05:51 | repositories section.
| | 05:53 | In the next movie, we will show you how
to go ahead and put this into practice.
| | 05:57 | So, in order to get into that movie,
you can now go up to the upper right-hand
| | 06:01 | corner and click the Logout
button and safely log out of Moodle.
| | 06:04 | And in the next movie, we will log
back in as our teacher account and step
| | 06:09 | through how to use this Dropbox repository.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a Dropbox repository| 00:00 | In order to use our Dropbox repository,
we need to have some files first on our
| | 00:05 | Dropbox in order to be able to
access from inside of Moodle.
| | 00:08 | So to begin, go ahead and minimize your
Firefox browser and open up your Finder,
| | 00:13 | or your Windows Explorer,
and you can go to your Dropbox folder.
| | 00:17 | When you install Dropbox on your
local machine, Dropbox will create a folder,
| | 00:21 | and in many cases it's just
located inside of your Home folder.
| | 00:25 | Next, we need to copy
some files into our Dropbox.
| | 00:27 | If you're following along with the
exercise files, go ahead and open up the
| | 00:31 | Chapter 05 folder, and here you'll
find a zip file called DropboxImages.zip.
| | 00:37 | I've included a regular folder that
has the files all listed out here, and you
| | 00:41 | can see it's just a whole series of
images that are properly named with the
| | 00:44 | JPEG file extension.
| | 00:46 | Each of these images has
already been compressed.
| | 00:48 | What we want to do is we want to go
ahead and upload this DropboxImages.zip file
| | 00:53 | to our Dropbox to be able to
copy it then into our Moodle course.
| | 00:57 | So go ahead and drag your window down
if you need to and simply drag and drop
| | 01:01 | the DropboxImages.zip.
| | 01:02 | Now when I drop it in, go ahead
and look and see what happens.
| | 01:05 | Initially, you get a small blue icon that
then indicates that the files have been
| | 01:10 | dropped into the Dropbox folder,
and then the icon changes to green, indicating
| | 01:14 | that the files have finished
uploading to the Dropbox server.
| | 01:17 | So now not only is this DropboxImages.zip
file located here on the local
| | 01:23 | computer's Dropbox folder, but it's also
loaded up on to our Dropbox in the cloud.
| | 01:27 | Let's go ahead and close these windows
now, and let's go back down and open up
| | 01:31 | our browser with our Moodle site, and let's
go ahead and log in as our own user account.
| | 01:36 | So instead of logged in as the
administrator, I am going to go ahead and log in
| | 01:39 | as Chris, and my password is 12345.
| | 01:42 | Hit the Login button, and now let's go
ahead and go directly into our Coral
| | 01:47 | Reef Ecology course.
| | 01:49 | I am going to scroll down on the
right-hand side and find the My private files
| | 01:53 | section and click on the
Manage my private files button.
| | 01:58 | Here we are taken into the standard
browser we've been seeing all along.
| | 02:02 | We will go ahead and go into BIOL432
folder, and we will go into our Images folder.
| | 02:06 | So this is where we want to load that zip file.
| | 02:09 | So we will hit the Add button and now
when we go into the File picker, you'll
| | 02:13 | notice there is a brand-new option
that's down here that we haven't seen before,
| | 02:17 | and it's just one that's called Dropbox.
| | 02:19 | So all you have to do is go ahead and
click on that link for Dropbox, and we are
| | 02:22 | going to get a Login button.
| | 02:24 | Go ahead and click that Login button and
it's going to spring open a new window.
| | 02:28 | So let's go ahead and drag that window
open a little bit, so we can see all the
| | 02:31 | information that's in there.
| | 02:33 | Now it should automatically have you
logged in, but it may prompt you to
| | 02:36 | go ahead and log in.
| | 02:37 | So I've got my account that I
set up the API key with, the
| | 02:41 | chris@chrismattia.com, and I'm
getting a prompt here that's asking me if I
| | 02:45 | would like to allow this
application to be able to access this API and
| | 02:49 | essentially acts as my Dropbox.
| | 02:51 | This is also a good point to remind
yourself that if you were setting up this
| | 02:56 | repository on your test server, you're
only setting up the repository to link to
| | 03:02 | your personal Dropbox folder.
| | 03:03 | In order to set this repository up
to allow any user to access their own
| | 03:08 | Dropbox, you would have to apply
for the full production license.
| | 03:13 | But for right now, this is
going to work just fine for us.
| | 03:16 | We can go ahead and hit the Allow
button and it automatically then logs us in,
| | 03:21 | because our browser had previously logged us in.
| | 03:24 | Here's our Dropbox set of information,
and there is that DropboxImages.zip file
| | 03:29 | that we just dropped into that folder
in our Finder, or in Windows Explorer.
| | 03:34 | So let's go ahead and link
this DropboxImages file now.
| | 03:37 | We will just go ahead and click on it.
| | 03:38 | It's going to ask us, what do we want
to call it, and we will leave the default
| | 03:42 | there and hit Select this file, and there we go.
| | 03:44 | The DropboxImages.zip file has been
added to our private files section.
| | 03:49 | We can hit the little
dropdown menu here and say Unzip.
| | 03:53 | And there we get our Dropbox images folder.
| | 03:56 | We can do a little bit of cleanup here.
| | 03:57 | We can get rid of this _MACOSX file.
| | 04:00 | Go ahead and hit Delete for that.
| | 04:01 | We can even get rid of
the DropboxImages.zip file.
| | 04:06 | So we'll just click on
that and say Delete and Yes.
| | 04:10 | So that little bit of cleanup is done.
| | 04:12 | Now go ahead and hit the Save
changes button, and there we go.
| | 04:16 | All of those files are now inside of
our Moodle course, and we've been able to
| | 04:21 | add them directly from our Dropbox.
| | 04:24 | Anytime you want to quickly get
information into your Moodle site now, you
| | 04:28 | can minimize your browser window and
by opening up a standard Finder window,
| | 04:33 | or Windows Explorer,
| | 04:34 | you can go to your Dropbox folder and
add files directly here and they will show
| | 04:37 | up in that Dropbox link within the
Dropbox repository in your Moodle course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring a Google Docs repository| 00:00 | The next repository that we are
going to set up is Google Docs.
| | 00:04 | Now to begin, make sure you're logged
out of your account and go ahead go up to
| | 00:07 | the upper right-hand corner and
click on Login button and log in as the
| | 00:11 | administrator, and if you are
following along with me, the password we set is
| | 00:15 | 12345. Go ahead and hit the Login button.
| | 00:18 | Now scroll down on the left-hand side,
look for the Settings block, and click on
| | 00:22 | the link for Site administration.
And scroll down again and find the Plugins link
| | 00:27 | and click on that. Scroll down again
and click on the Repositories link
| | 00:31 | and look for the link for Manage
repositories. When the Manager repositories
| | 00:36 | page opens up, go ahead scroll down in that
list until you find the listing for Google Docs.
| | 00:42 | Click the dropdown menu where it
currently says Disabled and set it to
| | 00:46 | Enabled and Visible.
| | 00:49 | The Configuration page for Google Docs
Plugin shows up, and it's going to ask
| | 00:53 | you for the Repository plugin name.
Goahead and leave this blank and simply
| | 00:56 | click the Save button.
| | 00:57 | That's all there is to it.
| | 01:00 | It was that easy to go ahead and set up
Google Docs to merge into your course.
| | 01:05 | Now go up to the upper right-
hand corner and log out of the
| | 01:07 | administrator account.
| | 01:08 | In the next movie we'll log in as our
user account, and we will step through using
| | 01:12 | the Google Docs Repository in your course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a Google Docs repository| 00:00 | Now that we've configured the Google
Docs repository as an administrator and we've logged out,
| | 00:06 | let's go ahead and log in to Google Docs
and post a file up into our Google Docs,
| | 00:10 | so that we can access it from inside of Moodle.
| | 00:12 | Go ahead and press Command+T, or Ctrl+T,
on your keyboard to open up a new tab,
| | 00:16 | and then go to www.google.com.
| | 00:19 | In the upper right-hand corner,
there should be a link for Sign in.
| | 00:22 | Go ahead and click on that link.
| | 00:24 | Now if you don't have a Google account,
you can click down here where it says
| | 00:27 | Don't have an Account?
Create an account now.
| | 00:30 | Follow the onscreen
instructions and then log in.
| | 00:33 | If you already have a Google
account, go ahead and log in.
| | 00:37 | I'll go ahead and enter my email address
and my password to my Google Docs account.
| | 00:41 | I'll click the Sign in button.
| | 00:43 | Once you're signed in to Google Docs
account, let's access Google Docs by
| | 00:47 | coming up here and finding the link for More,
click the dropdown menu, and go down to Documents.
| | 00:54 | This will load up the
standard Google Docs browser.
| | 00:57 | Now let's go ahead and upload a
file, if you don't have one already.
| | 01:00 | So go ahead and hit the dropdown menu
for Upload and select Files from the menu.
| | 01:05 | This is going to open up a standard
file picker for your operating system.
| | 01:08 | If you navigate into the exercise
files > Chapter 05, I've included a
| | 01:14 | Symbiosis.odt, or Open Document Text,
file right here for you to upload.
| | 01:19 | Go ahead and select that file and hit Upload.
| | 01:22 | Google Docs will pop up an Upload
settings window for you and ask you how you
| | 01:26 | would like to deal with
files that you're uploading.
| | 01:28 | We're going to go ahead and leave
this set to Convert documents and
| | 01:32 | presentations to the
corresponding Google Docs format.
| | 01:35 | And we'll also leave the
Confirm settings before each upload.
| | 01:38 | That way we're always sure
what kind of file we're uploading.
| | 01:41 | Hit the Start upload button and the
file should begin uploading into your
| | 01:45 | Google Docs account.
| | 01:48 | After a few seconds, the file upload
should complete and you should then see the
| | 01:52 | file listed in your MODIFIED TODAY
section right in your Google Docs homepage.
| | 01:57 | Go ahead and click on the Symbiosis.odt
file, so we can have a look at the file
| | 02:01 | that we just uploaded.
| | 02:02 | This is a file that contains some
basic information about the Coral
| | 02:05 | Zooxanthellae Symbiosis.
| | 02:07 | Okay, let's go ahead and post
this document inside of our course.
| | 02:12 | To do this, go ahead and click back into
your Moodle course in the other tab and
| | 02:17 | then go ahead and log in as yourself.
| | 02:19 | In the upper right-hand corner,
I'll click the Login link.
| | 02:22 | I'll change the username from admin to
chris and then use my password of 12345.
| | 02:29 | Click the Login button and then
click on the course Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 02:35 | When your course page loads, go ahead
and turn editing on and then scroll down
| | 02:39 | to Week 2, where you find Coral
reef structure and diversity,
| | 02:43 | and let's add that Coral Zooxanthellae
Symbiosis document here into the LECTURE MATERIALS.
| | 02:48 | Go ahead and click the dropdown menu for Add
a resource, and let's simply link to a File.
| | 02:55 | Let's go ahead and name the file
as Coral Zooxanthellae Symbiosis
| | 03:00 | and for the Description
put in General information.
| | 03:07 | Now let's scroll down to the
Content section and click the Add button.
| | 03:12 | Inside of our File picker, we now
see another new repository, Google Docs.
| | 03:16 | Go ahead and click on that link for
Google Docs and you should see a button
| | 03:20 | that asks you to log in.
| | 03:21 | Go ahead and click the Login button
and a pop-up window should appear.
| | 03:26 | Now since we've already logged in to
our Google Docs account in another tab of
| | 03:30 | our browser, it already has us
logged in inside of this window.
| | 03:34 | Let's go ahead and expand this window
out, so we can see all the information
| | 03:38 | that is presented to us.
| | 03:39 | Basically, what it's asking us is that
Google Docs has gotten a request from this
| | 03:43 | outside application and it wants to
know if we want to grant access to our
| | 03:48 | account to this application.
| | 03:50 | We click the button for Grant access
and the repository instantly refreshes.
| | 03:55 | And now we can see our Symbiosis.odt
file, which has been converted to an RTF,
| | 04:00 | or Rich Text Format, file is right here
available for us to be able to select
| | 04:05 | and post in our course.
| | 04:06 | Go ahead and select that file, and we can
get rid of the ODT file extension right
| | 04:11 | in the middle of it.
| | 04:12 | So now it just says Symbiosis.rtf, our
Author is set to ourselves, and we can
| | 04:17 | hit Select this file.
| | 04:21 | The file shows up here in our list,
and we can go ahead and scroll down and hit
| | 04:25 | Save and return to course.
| | 04:26 | This file has now been pulled directly
from Google Docs and has been added into
| | 04:30 | our Moodle course for us to be able to use.
| | 04:33 | So let's go ahead and just move this
document up into the LECTURE MATERIALS
| | 04:37 | section and then hit the Move
Right button to tab it in under the
| | 04:40 | appropriate heading.
| | 04:42 | Let's check and see if this worked.
| | 04:43 | Go ahead and click on the
Coral Zooxanthellae Symbiosis link
| | 04:47 | and our browser attempts to open up a
file, and it's going to open it with a
| | 04:52 | default text editor for us automatically.
| | 04:54 | Go ahead and hit OK, and the file
should download and open up, and your
| | 04:59 | students should now be able to read the
document that you posted directly from Google Docs.
| | 05:03 | Let's go ahead and close these windows.
| | 05:07 | So now we've been able to post that document.
| | 05:09 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the
top of your page in Moodle and then go
| | 05:12 | ahead and log back out.
| | 05:14 | And that's how easy it is to connect
your Google Docs account directly into
| | 05:18 | your Moodle account.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring a Flickr repository| 00:00 | Let's go ahead and set up the Flickr repository.
| | 00:03 | To do this, make sure you've logged out
of your Moodle server and then click the
| | 00:07 | Login button in the upper right-hand
corner and log in as the Admin account.
| | 00:11 | If you're following along, this should
be admin and the password should be 12345.
| | 00:14 | Hit the Login button and then go ahead
and scroll down in the left-hand side
| | 00:21 | of the Settings block.
| | 00:22 | Click on Site administration, scroll
down again, click on Plugins, find the
| | 00:28 | Repositories link, scroll down
again, and click on Manage repositories.
| | 00:34 | Now we can go ahead and scroll down in
the list of repositories until you find
| | 00:38 | the section where you
have the Flickr repositories.
| | 00:40 | Now you notice there are two:
| | 00:42 | there's Flickr and Flickr public.
| | 00:44 | We are going to configure the one
that's just called Flickr, and it's going to
| | 00:48 | allow you to tie a personal Flickr account
directly to your Moodle account, so you
| | 00:53 | can access the files in that repository.
| | 00:56 | The public one would allow you access
the public Flickr site to be a link in
| | 01:00 | files, but we're not going to go
ahead and configure that one right now;
| | 01:03 | we are going to configure the Flickr one.
| | 01:05 | So go ahead and hit the dropdown menu for
Disabled and change it to Enabled and visible.
| | 01:09 | This will bring up the Flickr
configuration screen for repositories.
| | 01:14 | Again, we're going to need to have an
API key, and we're going to have a secret,
| | 01:19 | and there will be another
step after we add these in.
| | 01:21 | Let's go ahead and get those
set up for right now though.
| | 01:23 | Go ahead and press Command+T, or Ctrl+T,
on your keyboard to open up a new tab in
| | 01:27 | your browser and then go to www.flickr.com.
| | 01:32 | If you don't have a Flickr account
already, go ahead and click the Sign up now
| | 01:35 | button that should be located on the main page.
| | 01:38 | You can either sign in with a Yahoo!
| | 01:40 | account, your Google account,
or your Facebook account.
| | 01:44 | I already have an account
that's already been set up,
| | 01:46 | so I'll simply hit the Sign in
link that's up here in the top.
| | 01:49 | It's going to ask me to go
ahead and sign in with my account.
| | 01:52 | I've signed in with my Google
account, so I'll click on Google.
| | 01:55 | I'll type in my Google account
information, chris@chrismattia.com.
| | 02:02 | I'll type in my Google password
and then click on the Sign in button.
| | 02:09 | Now, it takes me to my main Google page.
| | 02:11 | I can access my photostream by
clicking here on Your Photostream.
| | 02:17 | You can always get to my photostream by going to
| | 02:19 | www.flickr.com/photos/chrismattia.
| | 02:24 | Now, what we want to do though is we
want to access the API key information.
| | 02:28 | So, you want to find the You
menu and click the dropdown menu.
| | 02:32 | In the list, you should
find a link called Your Apps.
| | 02:34 | Go ahead and click on Your Apps in the
dropdown menu, and this is where we can
| | 02:39 | go in and we can set up an API key.
| | 02:42 | On the right-hand side, you should be able
to find a button that says Get Another Key.
| | 02:46 | Go ahead and click on that button,
and it's going to ask you, is this going to be
| | 02:51 | key for a non-commercial
site or for commercial purposes.
| | 02:55 | In this case, we're going to use the
non-commercial key, because we're just
| | 02:58 | setting up a testing server for right now.
| | 03:00 | Go ahead click on the APPLY FOR A NON-
COMMERCIAL KEY button and now it's going
| | 03:04 | to ask us a little bit of
information about our app.
| | 03:07 | What's the name of our app?
| | 03:08 | In this case, I am going to go
ahead and just type in "Moodle Essential
| | 03:12 | Training for Teachers."
| | 03:16 | In the Description is what I'm building.
| | 03:17 | I'll just type in, "A test
site to learn how to use Moodle."
| | 03:26 | Let's go ahead and scroll down on the
page a little bit more, and there's two
| | 03:30 | license agreements that we need to agree to.
| | 03:33 | First, we need to agree to acknowledge
the Flickr members own all the rights
| | 03:37 | to their content, and then we need to agree
that we comply with the Flickr API terms of use.
| | 03:43 | Click the Submit button, and the
key should be generated for us.
| | 03:46 | Your key will be unique
to your specific account.
| | 03:50 | To complete the next step of setting up
this key inside of our course, go ahead
| | 03:54 | and select the entire key and press
Command+C, or Ctrl+C, on your keyboard to copy
| | 03:59 | all of that text to clipboard.
| | 04:01 | And then we'll jump back over for
Moodle site in the tabs and come down to the
| | 04:06 | API key, click in there, and hit
Command+V, or Ctrl+V, to paste that in.
| | 04:11 | Next, let's go get the secret.
| | 04:13 | Go back to our tab with Flickr, select
the secret, press Command+C, or Ctrl+C, to
| | 04:20 | copy it, go back to our Moodle course,
click into the secret field, press
| | 04:25 | Command+V, or Ctrl+V, to paste that key in,
| | 04:28 | hit the Save button, and we're taken
back to the Manage repositories page.
| | 04:33 | Scroll down on the left-hand side and
underneath of the Repositories heading
| | 04:38 | you should find a link for Flickr.
| | 04:40 | Go ahead and click on that link
for Flickr to go back into the
| | 04:43 | Flickr configuration.
| | 04:45 | On the second line you should see a
link that says, Make sure that you set the
| | 04:50 | Callback URL for this Flickr key to,
and it's going to have a long URL.
| | 04:55 | Go ahead and select that whole URL
and copy it to your clipboard by using
| | 05:00 | Command+C, or Ctrl+C, to copy it.
| | 05:04 | Now go back to the Flickr tab
and underneath of the secret
| | 05:08 | you should find three links:
| | 05:10 | one for Edit app details, one for Edit author
flow for this app, and View all Apps by you.
| | 05:16 | Click on the link for
Edit auth flow for this app.
| | 05:19 | We need to add another
description for our app right here.
| | 05:22 | We will call this--.
| | 05:25 | For App Type, go ahead and select web
Application, and in the Callback URL go
| | 05:30 | ahead and paste, by pressing Command+V
or Ctrl+V, the callback URL that we just
| | 05:35 | copied from inside of our Moodle course.
| | 05:38 | We don't need to worry about an App Logo,
although if you have you would like to
| | 05:41 | use, you can go ahead
browse and upload that here.
| | 05:44 | Go ahead and click the SAVE CHANGES button at
the bottom and our API should be all set up now.
| | 05:51 | Go ahead and go back over to your
Moodle tab and click the Save button one more
| | 05:55 | time to make sure that those
settings have been properly saved.
| | 05:59 | Now, go back to the Home link in your
breadcrumbs and then go up to the upper
| | 06:03 | right-hand corner of your
screen and click the Logout button.
| | 06:06 | In the next movie, we will log in as our
regular user account and test this API
| | 06:11 | and see that it worked properly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a Flickr repository| 00:00 | Now let's use the Flickr repository
to access images from our photostream.
| | 00:06 | To begin, open up a new tab in your
browser if you don't have one already open
| | 00:10 | and go to Flickr.com.
| | 00:12 | You'll need to log in to your account
that you have created already, and then
| | 00:16 | you want to go to the You menu, click
the dropdown menu for that, and click the
| | 00:21 | button for Upload Photos and Videos.
| | 00:23 | It's going to ask you to go ahead
and Choose some photos that you want to
| | 00:26 | upload, so I am going to hit that Choose link.
| | 00:29 | I am going to navigate to my Desktop,
to my exercise files, to the Chapter 5
| | 00:34 | exercise files, and click on
the folder for Flickr images.
| | 00:37 | I have included an image called Caiman.jpg
| | 00:41 | that's got a picture of a
caiman, or an American crocodile.
| | 00:44 | Go ahead and click the Open button
and you can see the file has been added
| | 00:47 | right here for you.
| | 00:48 | You can scroll down a little bit, make
sure that the Link is set for Public, and
| | 00:53 | click Upload Photos and Video.
| | 00:55 | If you would like, you can upload additional
images of your own into your Flickr account.
| | 01:00 | Once it's finished, it's going to ask
you if you would like to add a description
| | 01:03 | to the page. That's not necessary for right now,
| | 01:06 | so we'll go ahead and scroll on up to the
top, click back on the You dropdown menu,
| | 01:11 | and select your photostream.
| | 01:13 | You should now see your caiman picture
that's posted here in your photostream.
| | 01:17 | Let's go ahead and add that
image into our Moodle course.
| | 01:21 | So we'll click back over into the first
tab where our Moodle site should be and
| | 01:26 | then go ahead and click the Login
button in the upper right-hand corner, and we
| | 01:29 | will log in as our normal user account.
So in my case I am going to log in as
| | 01:33 | Chris and my password,
if you're following along, is 12345.
| | 01:37 | Click the Login button, go ahead and
go back into your Coral Reef Ecology
| | 01:41 | course, turn Editing on,
| | 01:45 | and I'll go ahead and scroll
down to the Week 2 section.
| | 01:49 | Inside of Week 2 we have our Coral
Reef Species Identification page that we've
| | 01:53 | been working on previously.
| | 01:55 | Let's go and add another page
that will link to that photo.
| | 01:59 | So down at the bottom click the
dropdown menu for Add a resource
| | 02:02 | and let's simply link to a file.
| | 02:06 | In the Name field we will type
in "Image of a Caiman from Flickr." In the
| | 02:15 | Description, we will go ahead and put
"Image of a Caiman from Flickr," and then we
| | 02:23 | can scroll down to the Content
section and click the Add button.
| | 02:27 | Now inside of our standard File picker
we see yet another repository type.
| | 02:31 | This time it's listed as Flickr.
| | 02:33 | We can go and click on that link,
and we are given another log in button.
| | 02:37 | We hit the Login button,
and let's go ahead and expand this page.
| | 02:42 | It's now telling us that our Flickr
account is trying to be accessed through
| | 02:47 | this API that was set up.
| | 02:48 | If we want to go ahead and access it,
we can click the button that says, okay,
| | 02:52 | I'll authorize it. Click that button.
| | 02:55 | Your page should refresh and your
entire photostream should flow directly into
| | 03:00 | the main window here inside of your File picker.
| | 03:03 | This is pulling all of these
images directly in from Flickr.
| | 03:07 | It's incredibly helpful when you're
going to choose images that you want to have
| | 03:11 | posted into your course.
| | 03:12 | Let's go ahead and click on the
Caiman.jpg image and click Select this file.
| | 03:19 | The Caiman image is added.
| | 03:21 | We can now scroll all the way to the
bottom and click Save and return to course.
| | 03:26 | When our page refreshes, we will go
ahead and drag the image of a caiman from
| | 03:30 | Flickr up into our lecture materials,
tab it in one time to the right, so it
| | 03:34 | aligns with the rest of the items.
| | 03:35 | Go ahead and click on that link and
let's find out if it worked. There we go.
| | 03:39 | There is our image of the caiman
posted directly in from Flickr using the
| | 03:44 | new Flickr repository.
| | 03:46 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course by clicking on BIOL432. Then go
| | 03:51 | ahead and click the Logout button in the
upper right-hand corner of your screen.
| | 03:55 | Now you have seen how to configure
the Flickr repository and how to access
| | 04:00 | images from your Flickr photostream
directly inside of your Moodle course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring the YouTube videos repository| 00:00 | Now let's go ahead and set
up our YouTube repository.
| | 00:03 | To begin, go ahead and log in to your
Moodle server by clicking the Login link
| | 00:07 | in the upper right-hand corner,
and make sure that you log in as the
| | 00:10 | administrator account.
| | 00:11 | So if you're following along,
the username is admin and the password is 12345.
| | 00:14 | I'll go ahead and click the Login link,
and I'll scroll down on the left-hand
| | 00:20 | side, and we're going to
go to Site administration.
| | 00:23 | I'm going to scroll down again.
| | 00:24 | We're going to click on Plugins,
scroll down again, click on Repositories, and
| | 00:29 | I'll click on the link for Manage repositories.
| | 00:33 | This time go ahead and scroll all the
way to the bottom of the page, and the last
| | 00:37 | item down here is YouTube videos.
Go ahead and click the dropdown menu for that
| | 00:41 | and click Enabled and visible.
| | 00:44 | The YouTube repository type configure
will come up, and we can go ahead and leave
| | 00:49 | this field blank and just
simply click the Save button.
| | 00:53 | And that's all you have
to do to configure YouTube.
| | 00:55 | It's very easy, and it works great.
| | 00:57 | So I'll go up to the upper right-hand corner
and click the Logout button, and in the
| | 01:00 | next movie we'll log in as our teacher
account, and will link a YouTube video
| | 01:04 | directly into your course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the YouTube videos repository| 00:00 | Now that we've configured our YouTube
repository, it's time to go ahead and link
| | 00:04 | a YouTube video directly into our course.
| | 00:07 | If you'd like to, go ahead and open
a new tab in your browser by pressing
| | 00:10 | Command+T, or Ctrl+T,
and going to www.youtube.com.
| | 00:14 | If you don't have a YouTube account,
you can go ahead and create one by clicking
| | 00:18 | on the Create Account in
the upper right-hand corner.
| | 00:20 | Once you have an account, you can use
YouTube to upload videos and have them
| | 00:25 | posted up on the web.
| | 00:26 | I already have an account and I already
have some videos that I've posted up there.
| | 00:31 | Now let's go ahead and access some of
those videos directly into our Moodle course.
| | 00:36 | Go ahead and click the Login link in
the upper right-hand corner of your Moodle
| | 00:38 | course and log back in as your normal account.
| | 00:41 | If you're following along, I am using
chris and my Password is 12345.
| | 00:45 | Go ahead and click the Login link, and let's
go into our Coral Reef Ecology course.
| | 00:51 | Make sure editing is turned on by
clicking the Turn editing on link in the
| | 00:54 | upper right-hand corner.
| | 00:55 | Then go ahead and scroll down to Week 2.
| | 00:58 | Now let's go ahead create another
file that's going to have a YouTube
| | 01:03 | video posted on it.
| | 01:04 | To do this, come down to the bottom and
simply click the dropdown menu for Add a
| | 01:08 | resource, and this time Select Page.
| | 01:12 | Let's give this file a name, and this
time we are just going to call it Green
| | 01:18 | Moray Eel - YouTube.
| | 01:24 | Rather than typing this again, we
will just go ahead and select it,
| | 01:27 | press Command+C, or Ctrl+C, on your
keyboard, and in the Description go ahead and
| | 01:30 | paste that in, by pressing Command+V,
or Ctrl+V. Go ahead and scroll down to the
| | 01:34 | Content section, click
inside the content section.
| | 01:37 | We will type in Name:
| | 01:40 | Gymnothorax funibris. Hit Return,
type in Common Name:, type in Green Moray Eel.
| | 01:49 | Make sure you select Gymnothorax
funibris and make it italics, since it's a
| | 01:55 | proper scientific name.
| | 01:57 | Now click at the end of common name
Green Moray Eel and hit Return, and now let's
| | 02:01 | go ahead and add our YouTube video.
| | 02:04 | Click the Insert Moodle Media tool and
then simply click the link for Find or
| | 02:09 | upload a sound video or applet.
| | 02:11 | You'll notice now that you have a
new item type in your File picker.
| | 02:15 | If you try to go into most any other
method of accessing the File picker, you
| | 02:19 | won't find the YouTube videos link.
| | 02:21 | This will only appear inside
of this Moodle Media file type.
| | 02:25 | Go ahead and click on the link for
YouTube videos and you get simple
| | 02:28 | Search videos field.
| | 02:30 | Inside of the Search video fields,
let's go ahead and look for my username for
| | 02:34 | my YouTube account. That is cmmattia.
Hit the search field and you should
| | 02:42 | find a series of videos that
I've post up here to YouTube.
| | 02:45 | One of the files that we have got in
here is Gymnothorax funibris. It should show
| | 02:49 | up within this first page.
| | 02:51 | Go ahead and click the link for it,
and you can see a preview of that green moray
| | 02:55 | eel that we were working with in earlier
movies that I've already gone ahead and
| | 02:58 | posted up to YouTube.
| | 02:59 | Go ahead and scroll down on the page
and make sure that all the information is
| | 03:03 | listed here correctly.
| | 03:04 | Click the Select this file button.
The video should post inside of the Insert
| | 03:11 | Embed Media. Click the Insert
button and now you should see a link to
| | 03:15 | Gymnothorax funibris inside of our
Page content section of the content page.
| | 03:21 | Finally, scroll down to the bottom and
click the Save and return or course button.
| | 03:26 | When our page refreshes we will once
again grab this file and drag it up into
| | 03:31 | our Lecture Materials and tab it
over by using the Move right tool.
| | 03:35 | Now let's go ahead and check our work.
| | 03:37 | Go ahead and click on the link
for Green Moray Eel - YouTube.
| | 03:41 | Your page should refresh, and you
should get the YouTube video inside of the
| | 03:45 | built-in YouTube player.
| | 03:47 | You can click the Play button and the
video should automatically download from
| | 03:52 | YouTube and begin playing right
inside of your browser window.
| | 03:55 | It's just that easy to add YouTube content
now directly into your course inside of Moodle.
| | 04:02 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course by clicking the BIOL432 link in
| | 04:06 | our breadcrumbs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Creating ResourcesUnderstanding resources and activities| 00:00 | As you step through the process of
building your course inside of Moodle, the
| | 00:04 | first question that you need to ask
yourself is, do I want to add a resource or
| | 00:09 | an activity to my course?
| | 00:11 | Well, there is a very
important distinction between the two.
| | 00:14 | A resource is any piece of information
that you want to present to the student.
| | 00:19 | It's something that the student is
just going to consume, whether it be a
| | 00:23 | reading assignment, your syllabi,
images, audio, video, so forth.
| | 00:29 | Something that the students are just
going to be able to look at, read through,
| | 00:32 | in order to consume some amount of knowledge.
| | 00:35 | And activity, on the other hand, is
something that you want the students to do,
| | 00:39 | whether it be hand in an assignment,
participate in a discussion forum, interact
| | 00:44 | with a glossary, or collaboratively
build a wiki. All of these are activities.
| | 00:49 | So when you go through building your
course, the very first thing that you need
| | 00:52 | to know is am I going to
add a resource or an activity?
| | 00:56 | And that's the first choice that you're going
to make anytime you go to post some content.
| | 01:00 | Throughout the rest of this chapter
we'll step through in detail each of
| | 01:03 | the different primary resources that
are available to you inside of your
| | 01:07 | Moodle course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting a file or document| 00:00 | The most common type of resource that you'll be
adding to your Moodle course is the file type.
| | 00:05 | Now a file is simply any outside
document that you want to add into your Moodle
| | 00:09 | course and display to your students.
| | 00:11 | This can take many different forms.
| | 00:13 | It can be a Word document, a PDF document.
| | 00:15 | It can be an Excel spreadsheet full of data.
| | 00:18 | It can be an image file, audio file.
Any kind of a document that you have on
| | 00:23 | your machine that you want to
distribute out to your students can be included
| | 00:26 | in this resource type.
| | 00:28 | For this example, let's go ahead and add
a PDF file that shows our students what
| | 00:33 | we're expecting the final
presentation of their project to look like.
| | 00:37 | We'll go ahead and add it into
the Assignments section of Week 1.
| | 00:40 | To begin, make sure you have editing turned on.
| | 00:44 | Then scroll down to the bottom of
the Week 1 block and click the dropdown
| | 00:48 | menu for Add a resource.
| | 00:50 | The first item in Add a resource is
almost always File, because it's the
| | 00:54 | most commonly used.
| | 00:55 | Go ahead and click on File
and the Add a file page appears.
| | 01:00 | You must enter in any items that are
listed out in red with the asterisk.
| | 01:05 | So in this case we will add a
name for Sample Final Presentation.
| | 01:14 | I always like to go ahead and put a
space dash space and give the students some
| | 01:19 | indication as to what type of file this is.
| | 01:21 | Since we are going to be adding a PDF
file, I'll go ahead and type in PDF.
| | 01:25 | Now this is not absolutely necessary,
because as soon as the file is posted
| | 01:29 | inside of your Moodle course, the icon for
this document should appear as a PDF icon.
| | 01:34 | However, it's just one more nice thing
| | 01:37 | that doesn't take very long to add, and it
really helps your students to be able to
| | 01:40 | identify the exact type of
document that they're going to be opening.
| | 01:44 | Okay, in the Description field, this
field here is just the place for you to add
| | 01:48 | some additional information about this file.
| | 01:51 | And depending on how you have the file
linked, it may or may not display with
| | 01:56 | the file, or it may just be metadata
that's associated with this file for
| | 02:01 | searching in a few other
locations within the Moodle course.
| | 02:05 | So for the Description of this file,
we'll go ahead and simply add in "A sample
| | 02:11 | final presentation document for you to
use as a guide in building your project."
| | 02:22 | Go ahead and scroll down to the next
section in this page, which is Content.
| | 02:28 | Here you're able to add the
files that you want to attach.
| | 02:32 | You can also create folders to
keep additional files organized.
| | 02:36 | In this case, we are just
going to add a single file.
| | 02:38 | So click the Add button and this will
bring up your standard File picker that
| | 02:42 | we've been using throughout the title so far.
| | 02:44 | Go ahead and click into the Private files
section and then go into your BIOL432 folder.
| | 02:50 | Here we have all of the different
documents that we've been working with so far,
| | 02:54 | but we don't have the document
that we are looking for right now.
| | 02:57 | So go ahead and hit the Upload a file.
| | 02:59 | And then if you're following along
with the exercise files, hit the Browse
| | 03:02 | button, navigate to your Desktop,
and go into the Chapter 06 exercise files and
| | 03:07 | grab the file called Sample Presentation.pdf.
| | 03:11 | Select the file and click Open.
| | 03:13 | Any other file will work as well.
| | 03:15 | Go ahead and click the Upload file
button and the file gets uploaded into your
| | 03:20 | course, and it appears right
here inside of the Content section.
| | 03:24 | We can see that the file has been
correctly identified as a PDF file because the
| | 03:27 | icon is showing out here on the left-hand side.
| | 03:30 | You'll notice that there's a dropdown
menu at the right-hand side that allows
| | 03:33 | you to control this document.
| | 03:35 | You can download it to look at a
copy to make sure this is the exact file
| | 03:38 | that you're looking for.
| | 03:40 | If you have multiple files, you can set a
particular document as the main file type.
| | 03:45 | You can rename it,
| | 03:46 | you can move it to another location, or
you can delete this one altogether, and
| | 03:50 | you can add another file.
| | 03:52 | Go ahead and click off of that dropdown
menu, scroll down a little bit further.
| | 03:56 | And in case you don't have it open,
click the Show advanced button and you can
| | 04:00 | see the other options that you have
available to you inside this window.
| | 04:04 | The first item, Display, should
almost always be left on Automatic.
| | 04:08 | You do have some other choices here.
| | 04:10 | What this option will do is when one of
your students clicks on the file out in
| | 04:14 | the main part of your course, this
Display option will allow you to control your
| | 04:19 | student's experience.
| | 04:21 | If the document that you're presenting
is one that could be embedded within a
| | 04:24 | page, you can embed that file right here.
| | 04:27 | If you want force the students to
download the file, because in this case we have
| | 04:31 | a PDF file that we want them to
always be able to access and open,
| | 04:35 | we may want to go ahead
and force that to download.
| | 04:38 | That way anytime a student would click on
this file, it wouldn't open in their browser;
| | 04:42 | it would attempt to just download straight
to their computer so they have a copy of it.
| | 04:47 | You can also have the
option to simply open the file.
| | 04:49 | Now in this case, because this is a PDF
file, many web browsers will go ahead and
| | 04:54 | display that PDF file right
inside of their browser window.
| | 04:58 | So if you select the Open option, you
should be able to control the students'
| | 05:02 | experience so that PDF file just
displays right there for the student.
| | 05:06 | You can also choose In pop-up.
| | 05:07 | Now if you choose In pop-up, what will
happen here is when the student clicks
| | 05:11 | on the link, a new browser window will pop
open over the top of their main browser window,
| | 05:16 | and these will be the
parameters of that new browser window.
| | 05:20 | So you can even control the
pop-up width and height right here.
| | 05:24 | So for a PDF file, maybe 620x40 is a little
small, so maybe we could change that to 1024x768,
| | 05:32 | and that would be a more appropriately
sized window to display this content in.
| | 05:38 | I am going to go ahead and leave my
Display set to automatic, so Moodle will go
| | 05:43 | ahead and detect the user's browser and
figure out what is the best option for
| | 05:47 | that particular user.
| | 05:49 | You can choose whether or not you want
to display the resource name if you're
| | 05:52 | having the page open in a separate page,
or you can also choose to display the
| | 05:56 | resource description.
| | 05:58 | Now the resource description is this
field right here, and the name is up here.
| | 06:02 | So go ahead and scroll back down.
| | 06:04 | I am going to go ahead and leave
mine set to resource description.
| | 06:07 | And because this is just a simple
PDF file, I am not going to worry about
| | 06:10 | any filters or content.
| | 06:12 | If I was posting a media file that I
wanted to have displayed, I could select
| | 06:16 | either HTML files only or All files,
and I could control how I wanted the Moodle
| | 06:20 | filters to be able to interact with that file.
| | 06:23 | I am going to leave mine set to None though.
| | 06:26 | The last section down here
is Common module settings.
| | 06:29 | Now the first setting here is Show or Hide.
| | 06:31 | Let's say you're building the
materials for your course and you're working
| | 06:34 | ahead of the students and you have
some material that you don't want quite
| | 06:37 | release to the students yet, but you
want to make sure that it's already
| | 06:40 | prepped and it's up on your site.
| | 06:42 | When you create the asset, you can
change the Visible setting to Hide.
| | 06:46 | You will see the file as the instructor,
but your students will not have access to it.
| | 06:51 | At anytime in the future you could
come back into this page and you could
| | 06:54 | change the visibility to change from
Hide to Show and that file would instantly
| | 06:59 | be available to your students.
| | 07:01 | I am going to go ahead and make
this file available to my students.
| | 07:03 | I am going to leave the option set to Show.
| | 07:05 | The last option down here, ID number.
| | 07:08 | If you're planning on having this file
or this document included in some way
| | 07:12 | throughout your Gradebook, you may
want to go ahead and add in an ID number so
| | 07:16 | that the item can be
identified within the Gradebook.
| | 07:19 | We are not going to worry about that right now,
| | 07:20 | so we are going to go ahead
and leave this item blank.
| | 07:22 | Okay, everything looks correct,
| | 07:24 | so I am going to simply hit the
Save and return course button to finish
| | 07:27 | off posting this file.
| | 07:29 | Moodle should then automatically return me
back to the week that I was just working in.
| | 07:33 | Now the file has been added to the
bottom of the block, so I will go ahead and
| | 07:37 | scroll down to the bottom,
| | 07:39 | and here it is, Sample Final Presentation - PDF.
| | 07:43 | So now I know this is a PDF file, and I
can also see that here because the icon
| | 07:47 | for the file is showing me the Acrobat icon.
| | 07:50 | Now it's already in the Assignments
section where I would like it to appear, but
| | 07:54 | it's not quite tabbed over yet.
| | 07:55 | It's not aligned with the other object.
| | 07:57 | So just come on over here and
click on the Move Right button,
| | 08:00 | and that'll move this link so that it
just tabs in just a little bit so it lines
| | 08:04 | right there with the other assignment.
| | 08:07 | Okay, that's all you need to do.
| | 08:08 | If you wanted to have your Sample
Final Presentation to appear above
| | 08:12 | Research Project Ideas, you could
just grab the Mover tool and drag it up
| | 08:16 | one just a little bit,
| | 08:17 | and that file will then appear on
top of the Research Project Ideas.
| | 08:23 | That's all there is to posting a
file inside of your Moodle course.
| | 08:26 | This is going to be probably the most
used resource type that you're going to
| | 08:30 | have within your course,
| | 08:32 | so you should get very familiar
with this particular resource type.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Displaying a folder of documents| 00:00 | Now we just saw how to post an
individual file into your course, but many times
| | 00:04 | it would be very convenient for you to
be able to post many documents all at the
| | 00:08 | same time directly into your course.
| | 00:11 | This is done by posting a folder
directly into your course, and that folder can
| | 00:15 | contain any number of different
documents, even different types of documents
| | 00:19 | all in the same folder.
| | 00:21 | In this movie, we're going to step
through how to post a folder that has a bunch
| | 00:25 | of resources in it for the students to
learn how to write their research paper.
| | 00:29 | It'll have included with it
Microsoft Word documents, Excel, PowerPoint,
| | 00:33 | Keynote files and so forth.
| | 00:35 | To begin, make sure you have your
editing turned on in the upper right-hand
| | 00:39 | corner and then go ahead and scroll
down to the bottom of the Week 1 block.
| | 00:43 | Click the dropdown menu for Add a resource
and select the item Folder from the list.
| | 00:49 | When the Add a new folder page opens,
we need to first give this folder a name.
| | 00:53 | We'll simply call this Research Paper Resources.
| | 01:00 | Under the Description, go ahead and
type in "A variety of resources for you to
| | 01:09 | use while building your final project."
| | 01:17 | Now I'll go ahead and scroll
down a little bit further.
| | 01:20 | In the Content section, this is where
we need to add the folder of contents.
| | 01:24 | Now we could just go ahead and create a
folder and add items one by one into it,
| | 01:28 | or we can go ahead and click the Add
button to open up our standard File picker.
| | 01:32 | We'll make sure that we're inside of
our Private files section by clicking on
| | 01:37 | Private files in the left column,
and then go into our BIOL432 folder so we know
| | 01:42 | exactly where we're at.
| | 01:43 | Now I'll go ahead and click on the
Upload a file button and under the Attachment
| | 01:47 | section, click the Browse button.
| | 01:49 | In the Chapter 06 exercise files
folder, you'll find a file called
| | 01:53 | Research_Paper_Resources.zip.
| | 01:56 | If you want to know what's inside of
this, I've also included a folder in the
| | 02:00 | same chapter that has all
of those individual items.
| | 02:03 | Go ahead and select the ZIP
file and click the Open button.
| | 02:06 | Then click on Upload this file.
| | 02:08 | That will upload the ZIP file into our course.
| | 02:12 | Click the dropdown menu to the right of the
ZIP file where you can go ahead and select Unzip.
| | 02:17 | This will un-package that ZIP file and
have all of the individual documents
| | 02:22 | contained within it.
| | 02:23 | We can go ahead and get rid of the ZIP
file now because it's no longer necessary,
| | 02:27 | so click the dropdown menu
next to zip and choose Delete.
| | 02:30 | Go ahead and confirm that you want to
delete it, and now we're just simply left
| | 02:35 | with a folder that has all of
the individual documents in it.
| | 02:38 | If we come down to the next section
here, Common module settings, we can
| | 02:42 | choose whether or not we want this folder of
documents to be visible or not to the students.
| | 02:47 | I do want this to be visible for right now,
so we'll go ahead and leave it set to Show.
| | 02:51 | We're not going to be grading this item,
so we're going to leave the ID number blank.
| | 02:56 | Go ahead and click the button for Save
and return to course, and then when your
| | 03:00 | browser refreshes it should
take you back to the Week 1 block.
| | 03:03 | Go ahead and scroll down to the bottom
of the block and here you can see the
| | 03:07 | folder that we just added.
| | 03:08 | Now I'd like to have this folder to
appear underneath of the Sample Final
| | 03:12 | Presentation-PDF file, so I'll grab the
Move tool and drag that up into place
| | 03:17 | and then go ahead and use the Move-
right tool to align the folder with the
| | 03:21 | other items in that list.
| | 03:23 | Now let's go ahead and see how Moodle
is displaying all of these documents.
| | 03:27 | Go ahead and click on the folder
Research Paper Resources, and now you can see
| | 03:31 | the description that we added up here,
the title that we added, and we'll also
| | 03:36 | see a tree structure that shows the
name of the folder and all of the contents.
| | 03:41 | Through the file extensions at the end,
you can tell that we have a Microsoft
| | 03:43 | Word document, an Excel spreadsheet, a
PDF, a Keynote presentation, a PowerPoint
| | 03:49 | presentation, and another Word document.
| | 03:52 | Your students would be able to simply
click on one of these items and their
| | 03:56 | browser would attempt to download
that file and open it up for them.
| | 03:59 | Go ahead and hit the Cancel button.
| | 04:01 | You can explore any of
those documents if you'd like.
| | 04:03 | Since you're the teacher, you also get
a button down here at the bottom that
| | 04:07 | allows you to edit this resource and go
back in and make any changes if you need to.
| | 04:12 | Go ahead and go back to the main page
of your course by clicking on the BIOL432
| | 04:15 | link in the breadcrumbs and that
will take you back out to the main page.
| | 04:21 | Folders are great way to publish a lot of
documents out to your students very quickly.
| | 04:26 | Instead of having to upload them one
by one, don't forget to make a ZIP file
| | 04:31 | and upload that ZIP file.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a label to bring your course to life| 00:00 | Perhaps one of the most helpful
types of resources you can add into your
| | 00:03 | course is the label.
| | 00:05 | Now we've seen labels already
previously in the course when we added these,
| | 00:09 | where we added these subheadings, like
LECTURE MATERIALS and we added this map onto here.
| | 00:14 | Basically, what a label does, it allows
you to display content directly in your
| | 00:19 | Moodle course on the front page without
having to have the students click into
| | 00:23 | that resource to go and
explore more information;
| | 00:26 | it allows you to present it
right there on the front page.
| | 00:30 | Now, in this video I'm going to show
you how to use a label to display a custom
| | 00:34 | Google map directly on the
front page of your course.
| | 00:37 | As part of this course, our students
are going to be traveling to Belize
| | 00:41 | during their spring break,
| | 00:43 | and they're going to need to know
about the barrier reef system and about the
| | 00:46 | atolls that are off the coast of Belize,
| | 00:49 | so let's go ahead and create a custom map
where they can display that information.
| | 00:53 | To begin with, go ahead and scroll
down to the bottom of Week 1 and click the
| | 00:58 | dropdown menu for Add a resource.
| | 01:00 | Here we'll go ahead and select
Label from the dropdown menu.
| | 01:03 | The Label resource is very simple.
| | 01:05 | There's a space for you to add the label
text or any label content that you want
| | 01:10 | displayed on the front page
| | 01:11 | and then one simple item for Visible,
and that allows you to show or hide that item.
| | 01:16 | It's a pretty simple type of resource.
| | 01:19 | So in this case, let's go ahead and
type right into the Label text area "Map of
| | 01:24 | the Barrier Reef and Atolls of Belize."
| | 01:32 | Go ahead and select that text.
| | 01:35 | We'll give it a designation of
Heading 2 to make it standout a little bit more,
| | 01:39 | and then we'll also go ahead and color the text.
| | 01:41 | In this case hit the dropdown menu for
Color and under More colors, go ahead
| | 01:46 | and type in the color of #990000.
| | 01:53 | This is the same red color that we've
been using for a lot of our subheadings.
| | 01:56 | Go ahead and hit apply and we can
see that that color has been applied.
| | 02:00 | At the end of the line, click your
mouse and then hit Return one time.
| | 02:04 | This will bring the mouse
cursor down to the next line.
| | 02:07 | Now to add the Google map, we're going to
need to do a trick of going into the HTML view,
| | 02:13 | so hit the button for Edit HTML Source.
| | 02:16 | This will bring up the standard HTML
Editor for this particular source file,
| | 02:21 | and what we're going to do is we're
going to paste in some code that we're going
| | 02:24 | to go and get from Google Maps.
| | 02:25 | Now let's go ahead and get that code.
| | 02:28 | So in your browser, go ahead and press
Command+T, or Ctrl+T, to open a new tab and
| | 02:33 | point the URL to maps.google.com.
| | 02:36 | This should bring up the basic
Google Maps page within your browser.
| | 02:40 | We're going to navigate in this down to Belize.
| | 02:44 | It should be down here just underneath of
the Yucatan Peninsula in Central America.
| | 02:48 | Go ahead and double-click a few times to
zoom your map down until you're able to
| | 02:54 | see the barrier reef system here in Belize.
| | 02:57 | Let's go ahead and zoom out
just a little bit, a few more clicks.
| | 03:01 | We want to see this barrier reef system
and these different atolls that are out here.
| | 03:05 | Next we want to get the code that will
allow us to embed this map into our page.
| | 03:11 | So if you come up to the upper
right-hand side of the map, you'll see a variety
| | 03:15 | of different icons up here.
| | 03:16 | And one of them shows a Link icon and
if you hover your mouse over top of it,
| | 03:21 | it should say Link.
| | 03:22 | Go ahead and click on that item and a
dropdown menu should appear, where it has
| | 03:26 | you can paste in an email or an IM,
you can paste HTML into a web site,
| | 03:31 | but then there's this other link down
at the bottom that says Customize and
| | 03:34 | preview the embedded map.
| | 03:36 | Go ahead and click on that link,
| | 03:38 | and now we have a custom map that we
can drag around and we can adjust to
| | 03:42 | fine-tune it to be just the way that we want it.
| | 03:45 | Now this map is looking a little bit
large. Let's go ahead and check the
| | 03:48 | small size and see how that looks. All right!
| | 03:51 | That's looking a little bit better.
| | 03:52 | We just want to adjust the map so that
it's showing just the information we want.
| | 03:57 | We should be able to see from
Belize City down to Dangriga.
| | 04:00 | We should be able to see this Barrier
Reef System that's just off the coast.
| | 04:04 | We can look at the Map view
if we wanted to, all right.
| | 04:06 | Now we know those are the
islands that we're looking for.
| | 04:09 | So we can go back to the
Satellite view, make sure that's all set.
| | 04:12 | And now if we scroll down in this page,
at the bottom there is some text that
| | 04:18 | allows us to copy and paste this
text directly into our Moodle page.
| | 04:23 | So go ahead and select all the text
inside of the box. Make sure you drag
| | 04:27 | down and get all the way down to the very
bottom of where that map code is being displayed.
| | 04:31 | Then press Command+C, or Ctrl+C, on your
keyboard to copy that text to your clipboard.
| | 04:35 | You can go ahead and
minimize this Google Maps window,
| | 04:39 | and let's go back to the
Editing Label tab in Moodle.
| | 04:43 | We should be back where our
HTML Source Editor is located.
| | 04:46 | You want to make sure that your
cursor is at the very end of the line of
| | 04:50 | text and then simply press Command+V, or Ctrl+V,
on your keyboard to paste in all of that code.
| | 04:56 | Come down to the bottom
and click the Update button.
| | 04:59 | Now when your page refreshes, you should
be able to scroll down and see that map
| | 05:03 | that's displayed right here
inside of the Label text area.
| | 05:06 | Go ahead and click the Save and return
to course button and your page should
| | 05:11 | refresh and take you right back down to Week 1.
| | 05:14 | Now we want to move that item up
here into the LECTURE MATERIALS section,
| | 05:18 | so we'll simply scroll down to
the very bottom. Here's our map.
| | 05:22 | It's all ready to go.
| | 05:23 | Underneath of the map you can see
there is a small Move icon, so grab the
| | 05:27 | Move icon and just drag up in the page,
and you want to make sure that you get
| | 05:31 | it so that the gray line appears just
underneath of the map and just above REQUIRED READINGS.
| | 05:36 | Go ahead and drop that item in place,
scroll down a little bit more, and let's
| | 05:41 | go ahead and use the Move Right button
to go ahead and move that map and snap it
| | 05:45 | into alignment with all of the other items.
| | 05:47 | Now to see how this looks to the
students, go ahead and scroll all the way back
| | 05:51 | up at the top and turn editing off.
| | 05:53 | Now when we scroll down in our page,
our students not only get to see a map that
| | 05:57 | shows where the coral reefs are
located around the world, but as they scroll
| | 06:00 | down a little bit more, they can see
the map of the Belize barrier reef system
| | 06:05 | and the atolls of Belize.
| | 06:06 | They can even click and
drag around inside of this map.
| | 06:09 | They can use the Map tool to
look at other different views of it.
| | 06:13 | They can look at the Terrain view.
| | 06:14 | They can look at the Google Earth plug-in.
| | 06:16 | If they have Google Earth already
plugged into their browser, they can access
| | 06:20 | that directly through here, or they can
simply go back to the Satellite view and
| | 06:24 | see all the information that's in there.
| | 06:26 | Labels are an incredibly useful tool
for displaying information directly inside
| | 06:31 | of your Moodle page.
| | 06:32 | Anything that you can do in HTML is
pretty much fair game for you to be able
| | 06:36 | to add content and enrich your course
page with lots of different materials
| | 06:40 | and media.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a custom web page| 00:00 | Many times the content that you want
to post to your students has not been
| | 00:03 | created yet and you need to create it yourself.
| | 00:06 | In order to do this, you can go ahead
and create your own web pages by using the
| | 00:10 | resource type of page.
| | 00:12 | In this movie, we're going to go
through creating a new page inside of your
| | 00:15 | Moodle course that the students
can read to learn about the coral
| | 00:18 | zooxanthellae symbiosis, or the
relationship between the coral and the plants
| | 00:22 | that live inside of their tissues.
| | 00:24 | To do this, make sure you have editing
turned on and then go ahead and scroll
| | 00:27 | down to the bottom of the block for
Week 1 and click the Add a resource menu
| | 00:33 | and choose Page from the dropdown menu.
| | 00:35 | When the Add a new page window opens,
let's go ahead and give this file a name.
| | 00:39 | We'll just call this
Coral Zooxanthellae Symbiosis.
| | 00:49 | In the Description, go ahead and type
in "Learn about the interactions between
| | 00:59 | corals and their zooxanthellae."
| | 01:03 | Go ahead and scroll down
to the Page content section.
| | 01:11 | This is where our web
page is going to be composed.
| | 01:14 | Now, normally we could just go ahead
and begin typing directly into here,
| | 01:18 | but I've already gone ahead and
done a lot of the work for us.
| | 01:21 | So if we go ahead and minimize our
browser, in the Chapter 06 exercise files,
| | 01:25 | you should find a file called
background_html_formatted.txt.
| | 01:31 | Go ahead and press Command+A, or Ctrl+A,
on your keyboard to select all of the
| | 01:35 | contents of this document once you have
it open and then press Command+C, or Ctrl+C,
| | 01:40 | to copy the contents of it.
| | 01:41 | Let's go back into our page.
| | 01:44 | Now don't just paste your
content directly into here.
| | 01:47 | If you do, Moodle will attempt to
display the HTML code that I've already added
| | 01:52 | to this page content.
| | 01:53 | So in this case, go ahead and click the
button that says Edit HTML Source to get
| | 01:58 | to the HTML Source Editor.
| | 02:00 | Now press Command+V, or Ctrl+V, on your keyboard.
| | 02:03 | You can see that there's HTML code
that's already embedded that will have some
| | 02:07 | of the formatting already
started within this document for us.
| | 02:10 | Go ahead and press the Update button
and we can see all of the contents of the
| | 02:14 | file flowing into this Page content section.
| | 02:18 | Now I understand it's a little hard to
see all of the contents of this page, so
| | 02:21 | let's go ahead and toggle to the
fullscreen editing mode by clicking the button
| | 02:25 | here in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 02:27 | Now we can see all of the contents of the page.
| | 02:30 | If we click inside of a few of these
areas, we can see for instance that the
| | 02:33 | Coral Zooxanthellae Symbiosis
header has been renamed to Heading 1.
| | 02:39 | If we want to change the color of that
heading, we can simply select the text,
| | 02:43 | hit the dropdown menu for
font color, hit More colors,
| | 02:46 | go ahead and type in our heading color that
we've been using all along, which is #990000,
| | 02:53 | hit Apply to apply that color, and we
can make the changes directly onto here.
| | 02:57 | Now let's go ahead and insert an image
to add some interest and emphasize some
| | 03:02 | of the points that are
contained within this document.
| | 03:04 | Go ahead and click right in front of
the first word, Hermatypic corals, so that
| | 03:09 | your cursor is appearing right there.
| | 03:10 | Then go up in the toolbar and click
on the button for Insert/edit image.
| | 03:15 | Click the button for Find or upload an image.
Then click on the button for Private files.
| | 03:20 | Go into your BIOL432 folder
and go into your images folder.
| | 03:24 | Now, in a previous movie we uploaded a
bunch of files from our Dropbox folder
| | 03:29 | and they should be in a
folder called DropboxImages.
| | 03:31 | If you don't have access to these files,
I've gone ahead and included them in
| | 03:35 | the Chapter 06 exercise files as well for you.
| | 03:37 | So go ahead into that folder,
and you'll find a lot more files in here,
| | 03:41 | but the one we're looking for
first is called Dichocoenia_stokesii.
| | 03:45 | If you look down in the list,
you'll see two listings for them:
| | 03:48 | one that says Dichocoenia_stokesii
colony and the other that just says Dichocoenia_stokesii.
| | 03:51 | Go ahead and select on the second one,
click the button that says Select this
| | 03:56 | file, and this image should preview for us.
| | 03:58 | For the Image description, we could go
ahead and type in the long scientific name,
| | 04:03 | but in this case, we're just
interested in showing that this is a coral, so
| | 04:06 | we'll simply type in the
Image description Coral.
| | 04:10 | Go ahead and click the button for Insert
and the image appears inside of our page.
| | 04:14 | We have our heading, we have our image, and we
have to scroll way down here to find our text.
| | 04:19 | Our image is way oversized for this page.
| | 04:21 | That's not exactly what we were hoping to have.
| | 04:24 | It would be much nicer if our image was a
little bit smaller and it was added over
| | 04:28 | onto the right-hand side of the
page, so that the text flowed around it.
| | 04:31 | We can also see that our image and our
text are butting right up against each other.
| | 04:35 | Go ahead and click one time on the
image so you get the bounding box indicating
| | 04:39 | that the image has been selected.
| | 04:41 | Then click back on the Insert/edit image tool.
| | 04:44 | In Moodle 2.0, this will bring you
right back to a series of controls so you
| | 04:47 | can go ahead and you can control how this
image is going to flow around the HTML text.
| | 04:52 | Click on the second tab for Appearance.
| | 04:55 | Here we have a bunch of options to
control how this image is going to
| | 04:58 | work within our page.
| | 05:00 | Under the Alignment dropdown,
go ahead and select Right.
| | 05:03 | We have a preview over here on the
right-hand side that's going to show us what
| | 05:06 | our image is going to do with the text.
| | 05:08 | So when we select the Alignment > Right,
the image automatically jumps over here
| | 05:12 | to the right-hand side.
| | 05:13 | The top of the image
aligns with the top of the text.
| | 05:16 | Okay, when we look at our dimensions,
323x500, well that seems a little bit
| | 05:22 | large for the size of the text
that we have on this page,
| | 05:25 | so let's go ahead and just
shrink this dimension down.
| | 05:28 | So select the 323 and
let's go ahead and type in 250.
| | 05:31 | When you hit the Tab key over to
where the 500 was, you'll notice that your
| | 05:36 | dimension automatically
changed to this new 387 setting.
| | 05:40 | Now if your dimension didn't change
and it remained 500, simply go ahead and
| | 05:44 | delete the value for 500.
| | 05:47 | Then when your web browser goes to
display the image, it'll simply take the
| | 05:50 | Width parameter and it will
auto-adjust that image to whatever size it needs.
| | 05:55 | But since our browser here automatically
jumped to 387, we'll go ahead and leave that as is.
| | 06:00 | We want to make sure that the box
is checked for Constrain proportions.
| | 06:04 | That way our image will
automatically scale appropriately.
| | 06:07 | It won't skew and distort the image.
| | 06:10 | Down here under Vertical space,
go ahead and click inside of that box and
| | 06:13 | we'll add a 10-pixel buffer
vertically so our text will stay at least 10
| | 06:18 | pixels away from the image.
| | 06:20 | Let's do the same thing for
Horizontal space and make that 10 also.
| | 06:24 | We can click outside of the box
and our preview window adjusts,
| | 06:28 | so we can see that our image now is
going to float with a 10-pixel border on all
| | 06:32 | sides of it around the text.
| | 06:34 | Now we're not going to go ahead
and add a border; it would be a little weird looking.
| | 06:37 | It would just have a line that would
float around the image, and that's not
| | 06:41 | necessary in this case.
| | 06:43 | Okay, these are all the
changes that we need to make.
| | 06:44 | Go ahead and hit the Update button
| | 06:46 | and we'll notice that our image now
floats over here to the right-hand side.
| | 06:50 | Now if I scroll up, you can see it
aligns with the top of our text and it's
| | 06:53 | floating over here nicely.
| | 06:54 | Okay, let's add one more image into here.
| | 06:57 | Go ahead and scroll down on our
page, and let's look for the section for
| | 07:01 | Effects of Eutrophication.
| | 07:03 | Now eutrophication is when more
nutrients are being put into the surrounding
| | 07:07 | seawater and the corals are having
trouble growing because they're being
| | 07:11 | overcrowded by other invasive species.
| | 07:13 | Well, in this case, let's show a
picture that's going to show some of this.
| | 07:17 | So go ahead and click right in front
of Tropical oceans, go back up to our
| | 07:20 | Insert/edit image tool, click
the Find or upload an image,
| | 07:24 | let's go back into our BIOL432 folder,
go back into our images folder, go
| | 07:30 | back into our DropboxImages folder, and here
you should find an image called Cliona_langae.
| | 07:36 | Go ahead and select that image and
click the Select this file button.
| | 07:40 | The image appears in here.
| | 07:41 | For the Image description,
again we'll simply just type in Coral.
| | 07:45 | Now remember the Image description field
is what is going to be displayed if the
| | 07:49 | user is using a screen
reader with their browser.
| | 07:51 | Let's go ahead and go directly over
to the Appearance tab, and let's make a
| | 07:55 | couple of adjustments here.
| | 07:57 | This time, under Dimensions,
let's go ahead and set this to 250.
| | 08:01 | Hit the Tab key and that will
auto-adjust down the smaller size.
| | 08:05 | Make sure that Constrain proportions
is checked, and again we'll set the
| | 08:08 | Vertical spacing to 10 and the
Horizontal spacing to 10 as well.
| | 08:14 | Go ahead and hit the Insert button and
our image appears inside of here. Whoops!
| | 08:19 | We forgot to make it show
up on the right-hand side.
| | 08:21 | Once again, click on your image, hit
the Edit image tool to go back into the
| | 08:26 | Image Editor, go to Appearance, click
the dropdown menu for Alignment, select
| | 08:31 | Right from the dropdown menu, and choose Update.
| | 08:34 | Now our image appears in the
right-hand side where we wanted it, the text is
| | 08:38 | flowing around it, and everything
is looking pretty good on this page.
| | 08:42 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the top if you
want to see what the overall page looks like,
| | 08:46 | and let's return back to our main page
by clicking the Toggle fullscreen mode.
| | 08:51 | This will take us back into our editing page.
| | 08:54 | Go ahead and scroll down to the Options section.
| | 08:57 | The options here are to simply display
the name of the page, or we could also
| | 09:01 | display the page description.
| | 09:03 | I'm going to go ahead and leave the default set.
| | 09:04 | For the Common module settings,
this is the same as we've seen before.
| | 09:08 | We're going to go ahead and make sure
that our students can see this page, so
| | 09:11 | we'll leave it set to Show,
and we're not going to set an ID number.
| | 09:14 | Hit the Save and return to course page.
| | 09:17 | Our browser should automatically
refresh us back to Week 1, and let's go ahead
| | 09:20 | and move this file up here into
our LECTURE MATERIALS section.
| | 09:24 | So scroll down to the bottom of the
Week 1 block, where you can find your Coral
| | 09:29 | Zooxanthellae Symbiosis, grab the
Move tool, and simply drag that item up.
| | 09:34 | When you get up near the top of your
browser window, just push up just a little bit
| | 09:38 | and your page should automatically
scroll up. We want to get until we're just above
| | 09:42 | where the map is and just below the Vertical
attenuation of sunlight with depth equation.
| | 09:48 | Drop the item in here, and let's use
the Move Right tool to tab it into place.
| | 09:54 | Okay, let's do a final check of our
work to make sure everything looks proper.
| | 09:57 | Go ahead and click on the link
for Coral Zooxanthellae Symbiosis.
| | 10:01 | Our page loads, we have our image in
here, our text is flowing around nicely,
| | 10:06 | our heading is colored
the way that we wanted it.
| | 10:09 | So we scroll down a little bit further.
| | 10:10 | We have another image that's showing
up with the effects of eutrophication.
| | 10:14 | And the students are able to get all
the information that they need right
| | 10:17 | from this one page.
| | 10:18 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the top
of our page and click on the BIOL432 link.
| | 10:24 | Many times you'll find yourself
having to create content directly inside of
| | 10:28 | Moodle, and the best resource type
to add for this is the Page resource.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Posting a URL for a web resource| 00:00 | The next type of resource that I'd like
to explore with you is the URL type.
| | 00:04 | Now, a URL is just a universal
resource locator, or a web address.
| | 00:09 | You can use this type of resource to
simply provide a link to your students out
| | 00:13 | to some web site that you
want them to be able to go to.
| | 00:16 | Now, in this movie, we are going to go
ahead and we are going to create a link
| | 00:19 | out to Google Scholar, and we are going
to do a custom search in Google Scholar,
| | 00:23 | so that the students always have the
latest information about what papers are
| | 00:27 | available for a particular topic.
| | 00:29 | Now, the topic of our first week is
Introduction to tropical marine ecosystems,
| | 00:34 | and our overall course is
about Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 00:37 | So let's go ahead and scroll down to
the bottom of the first week's block,
| | 00:41 | click the dropdown menu for Add a resource,
and let's go ahead and add a URL resource.
| | 00:47 | Let's go ahead right here into the
Name section, and we're going to type in a
| | 00:50 | name, and this will be what the
students are actually going to click on.
| | 00:54 | So we will type in "Coral Reef
Ecology Current 2011 Papers."
| | 01:05 | In the Description field type in "This
web site will display the current research
| | 01:15 | papers on Coral Reef Ecology."
| | 01:20 | Go ahead and scroll down on the page
until you find the Content section.
| | 01:23 | This is the place where you'll go
ahead and enter in your external URL.
| | 01:28 | Now, if you know the URL, you can just
go ahead and type it right into here.
| | 01:31 | You can also choose a link, but in this
case, what we are going to do is we are
| | 01:34 | going to go ahead and open a new tab
in your browser by pressing Command+T, or
| | 01:38 | Ctrl+T, on your keyboard,
and then go to scholar.google.com.
| | 01:42 | Google scholar is a fantastic tool and
if you've never used this, this is just a
| | 01:46 | really great tool for any type of
research that you're doing within your course.
| | 01:51 | In order to use Google Scholar, all
you do is come down here into the Search
| | 01:54 | field and type in the search
query that you want to use.
| | 01:57 | So in this case I am just going
to type in "Coral Reef Ecology."
| | 02:03 | Now, what will happen when we search
is this is going to search only for
| | 02:08 | articles that are specifically
related to this particular topic.
| | 02:11 | Before we hit the Search button though, go
ahead and uncheck the box for include patents.
| | 02:15 | Now, there probably are not very many
patents related to Coral Reef Ecology, but
| | 02:20 | it may be the case that the particular
subject matter that you're searching for
| | 02:24 | may have patents included,
and that's not going to be something that's
| | 02:27 | necessarily going to be
appropriate for your students,
| | 02:29 | although if that is something that you're
searching for, go ahead and leave it checked.
| | 02:33 | So with this set up, we will simply go
ahead and hit the Search button and now
| | 02:36 | what we get back in the search results
is a listing of all papers and resources
| | 02:41 | in Google Scholar related to
this particular search field,
| | 02:45 | Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 02:46 | Now, you'll notice if we look over
here on the right-hand side, we are only
| | 02:49 | displaying results 1 of 10 of 101,000
results. That's probably a bit much for
| | 02:54 | students to have to pore through.
| | 02:56 | So let's go ahead and narrow
our results down a little bit.
| | 03:00 | We can come over here in the dropdown
menus for Google Scholar and now we can
| | 03:04 | select just a particular time period.
| | 03:06 | So if we want all the papers since, say,
2009, we can select that, and we see now
| | 03:11 | there is only 11,500 results.
| | 03:14 | Well, let's go ahead and narrow it down a
little bit further, and we will say since 2011.
| | 03:19 | Now, as of the recording of this movie,
there are currently 2,260 articles that
| | 03:25 | have been published about Coral Reef Ecology
and that are noted inside of Google Scholar.
| | 03:30 | You'll notice as you look through some of
these links, some of them are PDF files.
| | 03:34 | So if you click on the link, you can
download a reprint of this article and be
| | 03:37 | able to read it immediately.
| | 03:39 | This is a fantastic resource for students.
| | 03:42 | Not every article that's listed here
in the results will have a full text of
| | 03:46 | the article, but many of them will be able to
at least display an abstract of the article.
| | 03:51 | We could spend an entire day exploring
Google Scholar, bur for right now what we
| | 03:55 | want to do is we want to just get
this particular search results to our
| | 03:58 | students, so that anytime they click
on the link, they're going to get the
| | 04:01 | results for any paper that's published
that has Coral Reef Ecology in it, and
| | 04:06 | it's going to be since 2011.
| | 04:08 | All we need to do is take the URL
that's at the top of our URL field,
| | 04:12 | select that URL, copy it to our clipboard by
pressing Command+C or Ctrl+C on our keyboard.
| | 04:17 | Then go back to the editing URL tab,
come down here to where it says External
| | 04:22 | URL, click inside of that field, and press
Command+V, or Ctrl+V, to paste the URL in.
| | 04:27 | All of these extra characters that are
here inside of the link is the actual
| | 04:31 | search query for that Google Scholar search.
| | 04:35 | To be sure that this is what's happening,
go ahead and close the Google Scholar tab.
| | 04:40 | Now, go ahead and scroll
down to the next section here.
| | 04:43 | Under Options, we can choose to
display--right now it's set to Automatic.
| | 04:48 | We can have this link work in
a variety of different ways.
| | 04:51 | We can have it Automatic, which more than
likely is just going to refresh our main page;
| | 04:55 | that would take our students out of our
Moodle course and take them to some new site.
| | 05:00 | What I like to do when I set an
external link is to set it to open in a pop-up.
| | 05:05 | If we come over and we click the Show
Advanced button, now we can control the
| | 05:09 | size of that pop-up window.
| | 05:12 | By default, it is showing
up here on mine as 1020x750.
| | 05:16 | Well, that's a little bit of an odd size,
| | 05:18 | so I will go ahead and set 1024x768.
| | 05:25 | Since we've chosen to open this in a
pop-up window, our options to be able to
| | 05:29 | display the URL name or the URL
description are grayed out from us.
| | 05:34 | Some of the other options would allow
us to select these options but wouldn't
| | 05:37 | allow us to select the
dimensions of the pop-up window.
| | 05:40 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit further.
| | 05:42 | Here you have some options for parameters.
| | 05:44 | Now if you wanted to, you could go
ahead and form your own parameters to have
| | 05:48 | other content to be displayed.
| | 05:50 | We are not going to go
ahead and set any of those.
| | 05:53 | Let's go ahead and come down to
the bottom section where we have the
| | 05:55 | Common module settings.
| | 05:57 | Here, it works just as we've seen before.
| | 05:59 | The Show and Hide allows us to make
this content visible to our students,
| | 06:02 | by saying Show or Hide allows us to
still see it as the faculty member, but the
| | 06:07 | students would not see the content anymore.
| | 06:09 | So we will go ahead and leave this
set to Show, so that the students can
| | 06:12 | still see the file.
| | 06:13 | We are not going to worry about the ID number,
and simply click Save and return to course.
| | 06:18 | When our page refreshes, we are
taken back to our Week 1 block.
| | 06:22 | So go ahead and scroll down to the bottom
where that link has been posted. It's right here.
| | 06:26 | This is something that we would
like the students to be able to read,
| | 06:29 | so let's go ahead and add it up
to the Required Readings section.
| | 06:32 | So we will simply grab the Move tool
and drag it up into the Required Readings
| | 06:36 | section, and we will use the Move
Right tool to tab that in one link.
| | 06:40 | Now, let's see what happens.
| | 06:41 | Notice we don't have any
other tabs opened in our browser.
| | 06:44 | We don't have any other browser
windows opened, so we will go ahead and click
| | 06:47 | the link. A new browser window opens,
| | 06:49 | we are taken to Google Scholar, our
search parameter has been entered in for us,
| | 06:54 | and we are still getting
the options for since 2011.
| | 06:58 | We have the same number of
papers that we had earlier.
| | 07:00 | It's exactly what we wanted to have happen.
| | 07:03 | Now we can close this window and
we are still inside of our course.
| | 07:06 | Being able to add a URL link to any
web resource really opens your course up
| | 07:12 | to have access to any bit of
information that's available out on the world
| | 07:15 | wide web.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Managing AssignmentsAssignments overview| 00:00 | Anytime that you want to have students
hand in some piece of work that you want
| | 00:03 | to grade what you're going to do is
you're going to create an activity type
| | 00:07 | that is an assignment.
| | 00:08 | Now inside of Moodle there are
four primary types of assignments.
| | 00:11 | There's advanced uploading of files,
which allows your students to upload
| | 00:15 | multiple individual
documents to you for you to grade.
| | 00:18 | There is an online text assignment,
which will allow the students to simply
| | 00:22 | type into an HTML or plain text field any
content that you want them to hand into you.
| | 00:28 | There's an upload a single file
assignment, which allows them to simply upload
| | 00:32 | just one document and there's an
off-line activity, which allows you to give
| | 00:36 | instructions to the students as to
what it is that you want them to do, but
| | 00:39 | there's no actual file for them to hand in.
| | 00:41 | Now during this chapter, we're going to step
through each of these types of assignments.
| | 00:46 | Now before we dive in, I want to make a
quick note: back in the getting started
| | 00:49 | chapter, we had a movie on setting up
the different categories within your
| | 00:53 | Gradebook, so let's go ahead and
verify that that information has been done.
| | 00:57 | So in the left-hand column of your
course, in the Settings block, go ahead
| | 01:01 | and click on Grades.
| | 01:02 | Here you'll see all of your students
that have been added to your course, and
| | 01:05 | you'll see the different categories
that we added in that earlier movie.
| | 01:08 | We have a category for Exams,
Assignments, our Research Project, which are
| | 01:13 | broken into both a Group of Evaluation
Score and an Individual Evaluation score.
| | 01:18 | We can even see the Research Project
Ideas Assignment that we created during
| | 01:23 | that getting started chapter.
| | 01:25 | Now throughout this chapter we're going
to be adding additional assignment types
| | 01:28 | and we'll be selecting these different
categories to place the assignments in
| | 01:33 | and auto-create our Gradebook for us.
| | 01:35 | So let's go ahead and return back to our
course, and now we'll step through each
| | 01:39 | of these different assignment types
and show you how to build them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Advanced uploading of files assignment| 00:00 | Now, let's go ahead and create an
assignment that is using the Advanced
| | 00:04 | uploading of files type.
| | 00:06 | In our syllabi, we can see that on
May the 5th we want our students to hand
| | 00:10 | in their final paper.
| | 00:12 | This is a perfect type of assignment
for advanced uploading of files because
| | 00:15 | we specifically ask the students to be
able to hand in any figures and tables
| | 00:19 | as separate documents,
| | 00:20 | so they are going to have
to hand in multiple files.
| | 00:23 | In order to create this assignment type,
simply scroll all the way to the very
| | 00:28 | bottom of your course, down here where
it says Final Exam and Final Papers DUE!
| | 00:33 | To keep from scrolling around, go
ahead and hit the small box in the
| | 00:36 | upper right-hand corner.
| | 00:37 | That will hide all the rest of our course
content from us, so we can see just that box.
| | 00:42 | Click the dropdown menu for Add an activity,
and select Advanced uploading of files.
| | 00:47 | We'll give the assignment a
name: Final Research Paper.
| | 00:54 | In the Description, we want to tell the
students exactly what it is that we want
| | 00:57 | them to do in order to complete this assignment,
| | 01:00 | so let's be very explicit.
| | 01:01 | We'll go ahead and type "Upload your
final paper in Microsoft Word format.
| | 01:11 | Please, submit all tables and
figures as separate documents.
| | 01:21 | Be sure to follow the instructions to Authors."
| | 01:28 | Now, the instructions to authors is a
separate document that we haven't uploaded yet,
| | 01:32 | so go ahead and select the text for
that, click on the Insert or Edit a link
| | 01:36 | tool in your toolbar.
| | 01:38 | In the Link URL, hit the Browse button.
| | 01:41 | Make sure you're in your Private files
section, BIOL432, and then go ahead and
| | 01:46 | click on the Upload a file button.
| | 01:49 | Hit the Browse button, and in the
Chapter 07 exercise files folder there is a
| | 01:53 | file called Instructions to Authors.doc.
| | 01:57 | Go ahead and hit the Open
button and upload this file.
| | 02:01 | For the Title, just go ahead and
type in "Instructions to Authors."
| | 02:08 | Hit the Insert button to activate that link.
| | 02:11 | As we saw earlier, because the theme
that we're using does not have the correct
| | 02:14 | link color, go ahead and select that text,
| | 02:18 | go up to the Text Color tool and select our
link color that we've been using: 000080.
| | 02:25 | Okay, our Description is all set.
| | 02:27 | Let's go ahead and set up the
parameters for this particular assignment.
| | 02:30 | Go ahead and scroll down.
| | 02:31 | Here we can see the Available from
and the Due dates for this assignment.
| | 02:36 | The Available from date is the first date
and time that we want the students to
| | 02:41 | be able to see that this assignment is
available to them to begin completing.
| | 02:46 | So in our case, if we decided that on
April 1st, 2012 at say 10 o'clock in the
| | 02:59 | morning we wanted the students to be
able to start handing in that assignment,
| | 03:04 | then we could go ahead
and set this date in here.
| | 03:07 | We could leave the button for Enable
checked, and until this date, the students
| | 03:11 | would not be able to access the assignment type.
| | 03:14 | But we want the students to be able to
see this assignment from the first day of
| | 03:18 | class all the way to the end of the term,
| | 03:20 | so we'll uncheck the box for Enable.
| | 03:23 | The Due date is the last date and
time that the assignment is actually due.
| | 03:29 | So according to our syllabi, this
assignment is due on the 5th of May, 2012 at 5
| | 03:38 | o'clock in the afternoon.
| | 03:40 | Now this is perhaps the most common
mistake that a teacher makes when they're
| | 03:44 | setting up assignment due dates, and that is
that the time is set in a 24-hour clock.
| | 03:50 | So an assignment that's due at
5 o'clock needs to be set to 17:00 hours.
| | 03:55 | If you set it to 5, then at 5 o'clock
in the morning this assignment will come
| | 04:00 | due and at 5:01 the students will no
longer be able to complete the assignment.
| | 04:05 | Make sure that you have the time set correctly.
| | 04:08 | Now for training purposes, I like to go
ahead and uncheck the Enable box for Due dates.
| | 04:14 | That way the assignment is always open
to my students to be able to hand in.
| | 04:18 | The next option here, Prevent late
assignments, allows me to go in and control
| | 04:22 | whether or not I want to have the
students to be able to hand in an assignment
| | 04:26 | after this particular due date.
| | 04:29 | If I click the button for Yes and I
have Enable set, then at 17:01 the student
| | 04:35 | would not be able to hand in that assignment.
| | 04:37 | I don't want to be quite that strict in
this case, especially as a training exercise,
| | 04:42 | so I'm going to go ahead and
select No and deselect Enable.
| | 04:45 | If we scroll down a little bit,
the next section is for Grade.
| | 04:48 | The first dropdown menu allows us to
set how many points that we want this
| | 04:52 | assignment to be due for.
| | 04:54 | When we look at our syllabi, we can tell
that this assignment is worth 100 points,
| | 04:58 | so I'll go ahead and leave
it set to the default of 100.
| | 05:01 | The next dropdown is for Grade category.
| | 05:03 | Now, these are the grade categories that we
set up back in the Getting Started chapter.
| | 05:07 | The Assignment type that we want to set
this assignment for is going to be part
| | 05:11 | of the individual evaluation portion of
the grade, because each student is going
| | 05:16 | to hand in their own final research paper.
| | 05:19 | The final section here, Advanced
uploading of files, allows us to have fine
| | 05:23 | control over how we want the
students to upload their files.
| | 05:27 | The first option allows us to set
the Maximum size of files that we want
| | 05:32 | our students to upload.
| | 05:33 | In this case, 128 MB would be a little generous.
| | 05:37 | We're going to go ahead and
set this value to only 20 MB.
| | 05:39 | Now, that's 20 MB per file.
| | 05:43 | So if they have got a 20 MB Word
file and a 20 MB file for each of their
| | 05:48 | different files that they are attaching,
| | 05:49 | that would still be pretty generous.
| | 05:52 | the next option, Allow deleting,
| | 05:54 | This would allow students to upload a
file and then change their mind and remove
| | 05:58 | it out of a list of
files that they are uploading.
| | 05:59 | You may want to go ahead and leave
this set to Yes, especially if you have a
| | 06:04 | large assignment that's going to take a lot
of time for the students to be able to hand in.
| | 06:08 | That way, if they're making
revisions, they can continuously add and
| | 06:11 | subtract those documents from the assignment
until the assignment due date is finally there.
| | 06:17 | The next option is Maximum
number of uploaded files.
| | 06:20 | In our case, because we're going to
expect the students have multiple figures
| | 06:24 | and tables attached to their paper,
| | 06:26 | we should go ahead and
set this to a higher value.
| | 06:29 | But you can easily control how many files
that you want the students to be able to hand in.
| | 06:33 | I'll go ahead and set my value to 10.
| | 06:36 | The next option, Allow notes.
| | 06:38 | The Notes section allows a student to
be able to communicate directly to us
| | 06:43 | about the assignment that they're handing in.
| | 06:45 | So in the case of this final research
paper, we may want to have the students to
| | 06:49 | be able to explain to us what files that
they are uploading and how they should
| | 06:53 | all be put back together, since we're
asking them to hand in multiple files.
| | 06:57 | I'll go ahead and select Yes for this option.
| | 06:59 | The next option, Hide
description before available due date.
| | 07:03 | If we set this option to Yes and up
here in the Available from date, we have
| | 07:08 | that date enabled, then until this
particular date, the students would only see
| | 07:14 | the assignment name
inside of their course listing.
| | 07:17 | They wouldn't be able to see the
description and thus be able to see the
| | 07:20 | instructions as to what it is
we're expecting them to do.
| | 07:23 | Now, I believe in full non-disclosure
within my courses, so I like to make sure
| | 07:28 | that my Available from date is not
enabled, and I like to have my Hide
| | 07:32 | description set to No,
| | 07:34 | so that the description of my
assignment is always there, the students can
| | 07:37 | always look and see what it
is that I'm expecting of them.
| | 07:41 | The next option, Email alerts to teachers,
| | 07:43 | my suggestion for this is to set this to No.
| | 07:46 | We all get way too many emails and
knowing at the exact minute that a student
| | 07:51 | has handed in their paper and then
having to have an email that comes into
| | 07:55 | our inbox to be able to look and see that
that's happened is probably a bit excessive.
| | 08:00 | Now there may be cases where you really
need to know exactly when a student has
| | 08:04 | handed in their assignment and you want
that immediate feedback; in which case,
| | 08:08 | go ahead and set this option to Yes.
| | 08:10 | But for now, I'm going to leave
it set to No. The next option,
| | 08:14 | Enable Send for marking button.
This button appears at the bottom of the
| | 08:18 | Assignment Type, so students are able to
upload their files, add notes, and then
| | 08:23 | before the assignment is considered
completed by the student, they have to click
| | 08:28 | a button at the bottom
that says Send for marking.
| | 08:31 | I know a lot of faculty that this
causes a little bit of grief for, because
| | 08:35 | their students have not been properly
instructed that they must go in and click
| | 08:38 | this button in order to have
that assignment be fully handed in.
| | 08:43 | So word of warning: if you set
this to Yes, be sure to provide clear
| | 08:46 | instructions to your students as to
what the expectation for them is when
| | 08:50 | they're handing in their assignment.
| | 08:52 | For now, I'm going to go ahead and
leave my Send for marking set to No.
| | 08:56 | You can scroll down a little bit further,
and now we have some common module settings.
| | 09:01 | We're not going to use groups as part
of this assignment yet, so we're going to
| | 09:05 | go ahead and leave the Group mode set
to No groups, Visible set to Show so the
| | 09:09 | assignment does show for our students,
and we're not going to set an ID number.
| | 09:13 | Go ahead and hit the Save and return to
course button, and here we can see that
| | 09:18 | our Final Research Paper assignment has
been added to our course during week 15.
| | 09:23 | Go ahead and use the Move Right button
to be able to move that listing to be
| | 09:28 | aligned with all the
other listings in our course.
| | 09:30 | Now I want to look at two things very quickly.
| | 09:33 | First of all, let's look and see
what this assignment looks like as an
| | 09:36 | instructor when we click on the link.
| | 09:38 | Go ahead and click on the
link Final Research Paper.
| | 09:41 | Here we can see that when you go into
the assignment you're able to see the
| | 09:45 | specific description that
we gave to the students.
| | 09:48 | In the left-hand column, under the
Settings section, there is an option
| | 09:51 | for Switch role to.
| | 09:53 | Click the dropdown menu there and
then click the button for Student.
| | 09:57 | Now we can see exactly what a student
would see if they were in this assignment.
| | 10:02 | They see the description of the text,
they see a place for them to submit their
| | 10:06 | files and a place for them to upload
their files, and they see a Notes section
| | 10:11 | right here where if they hit the Edit
button they get a standard web editor to
| | 10:15 | be able to add the notes about
the files that they have submitted.
| | 10:18 | Go ahead and click the button for Return
to my normal role to go back to your view.
| | 10:24 | Inside of your view you
have a little bit of feedback.
| | 10:27 | One piece of feedback is right here.
| | 10:28 | It says, "No attempts have
been made on this assignment."
| | 10:31 | If you click on that link, it will
take you into the Quick Grading section
| | 10:35 | for this assignment.
| | 10:36 | Now, we're going to go into this
grading view in a later movie, but for now I
| | 10:41 | just wanted you to know that
this option was here for you.
| | 10:44 | Let's go ahead and return all the way
back to our course, and now we can go
| | 10:49 | ahead and reset our course, so we can bring
back all of the other content of our course.
| | 10:53 | Click the double box that's here in
the upper right-hand corner to show all
| | 10:57 | weeks, and then go ahead and scroll all
the way back up to the top of the page.
| | 11:04 | The advanced uploading of files
type of Assignment is probably the most
| | 11:08 | common assignment type that you're
going to be using when you're building
| | 11:12 | your Moodle courses.
| | 11:13 | It's by far the most flexible of all of
the different assignment types, because
| | 11:17 | you can have a mix of both a single file,
multiple files, and online text that
| | 11:23 | you can have the students hand in to you.
| | 11:25 | If I was going to learn only one type
of assignment, I would learn how to use
| | 11:28 | the Advanced uploading of files assignment type.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Online text assignment| 00:00 | The next assignment type that we want
to look at is the online text assignment.
| | 00:04 | Throughout our course we want our
students to be able to report in every single
| | 00:09 | week on their individual contribution to
their group project, and an online text
| | 00:14 | is perfect for this type of assignment.
| | 00:16 | We are not going to have the students
do this contribution the very first week,
| | 00:20 | but we want to start in the second week.
| | 00:21 | So go ahead and scroll down until you
get to Week 2 and click on the dropdown
| | 00:27 | for Add an activity and select Online text.
| | 00:29 | Now when the Online text assignment page
loads, for the assignment name just put
| | 00:35 | Week 2 Personal Contribution.
| | 00:40 | In the Description field type in
"Please describe your individual contribution
| | 00:50 | to your group project."
| | 00:54 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit.
The Available from and Due dates,
| | 00:59 | we are going to go ahead
and uncheck the Enable button.
| | 01:02 | That way this assignment is always
available to the students to go and
| | 01:06 | complete whenever they want.
| | 01:08 | They should be completing it during the
current week of the term, but this way
| | 01:12 | the assignment is always available to them.
| | 01:15 | We can choose whether or not we want
to prevent late submissions. In this
| | 01:18 | case we are going to go ahead and say no, so
that students can always submit these files.
| | 01:23 | For the grade though, having a
hundred points for this small assignment is
| | 01:27 | probably a bit much,
| | 01:28 | so we will go ahead and scroll down in
the list of points and select 5 points.
| | 01:33 | That way each week the students will
accumulate five additional points for just
| | 01:38 | letting us know what their
personal contribution is.
| | 01:41 | For the Grade category, we are
going to select Individual Evaluation.
| | 01:45 | This is part of their individual
contribution to the overall group project, and
| | 01:50 | it's part of their participation grade.
| | 01:52 | So we will go ahead and
select that Grade category.
| | 01:54 | The next section, Online text, Allow
resubmitting, we don't want to allow this.
| | 01:59 | We want the students to be able to
come in, type in their contribution, and
| | 02:03 | submit it and be done with it.
| | 02:04 | We don't want them going back
throughout the course of the term trying to make
| | 02:07 | edits and adjustments to this,
| | 02:09 | so once is enough in this assignment.
| | 02:12 | Now for Email alerts to teachers,
| | 02:14 | I certainly do not want to get an
email every single week from all of my
| | 02:17 | students letting me know that they've
gone ahead and completed this assignment.
| | 02:20 | When I'm ready to grade it, I will go
in and I will click on the assignment.
| | 02:24 | I'll review all of their
submissions, and then I'll move on.
| | 02:28 | I don't need to be reminded every time
one of my students completes the assignment.
| | 02:33 | Comment inline,
I am not going to worry about this either.
| | 02:35 | This would allow me to go ahead and
add comments directly into their text.
| | 02:39 | Basically, I am going to just go in,
read that they've made a contribution,
| | 02:43 | and decide whether or not they are going to
get the full 5 points for their contribution.
| | 02:46 | I am not going to be doing a lot of edits here.
| | 02:49 | So we will go ahead and leave that set to No.
| | 02:51 | Go ahead and scroll down to the bottom.
| | 02:52 | We are not going to tie
this assignment to groups.
| | 02:55 | We are going to make sure that this
assignment is visible to our students, and we
| | 02:58 | are not going to fill in an ID number.
| | 03:00 | Go ahead and hit Save and return to
course and when your page refreshes, you can
| | 03:05 | see here is our Week 2
Personal Contribution Assignment Type.
| | 03:09 | Go ahead and hit the Move right button
to tab it in so it aligns with all of
| | 03:13 | our other items and then go ahead and click
on the Assignment, just to see how it looks.
| | 03:18 | Here we can see that no attempts
have been made on the assignment,
| | 03:21 | we can see the specific instructions
that we've given to the student, and then
| | 03:26 | on the left-hand column under the
Setting section for Switch role to, we can
| | 03:30 | click that menu, hit Student, and we
can see what this assignment would look
| | 03:35 | like for a student.
| | 03:36 | There is as a button here for Add
submission that they could click and just be
| | 03:40 | able to enter in the text.
| | 03:42 | Go ahead and return to your normal role,
and then again in the upper right,
| | 03:46 | where it says no attempts have been made,
if you click on that link, here you can
| | 03:50 | see your Gradebook, and you can see any
submissions that the students have made.
| | 03:55 | We will go into how to fill out the
grades in a later movie. For now, go ahead
| | 03:59 | and return back to your course.
| | 04:01 | The Online text
assignment certainly has its place.
| | 04:05 | It's a great way to collect quick
information from your students in a text
| | 04:09 | format where they don't have to have
any software on their computer, just to be
| | 04:13 | able access your Moodle course and type
in whatever response to the assignment
| | 04:17 | instructions that you give them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Uploading a single file assignment| 00:00 | The next assignment type for us to
look at is the uploading of a single file.
| | 00:05 | Now when we look at our course
syllabi, and this document is included in the
| | 00:08 | Chapter 7 exercise files,
| | 00:10 | we can see that on February 8th we want the
students to hand in their thesis statement.
| | 00:15 | This is a brief (1-2 page)
summary of their research topic.
| | 00:18 | Well, this is a perfect single file assignment.
| | 00:21 | So to save ourselves some typing,
simply go ahead and select the text here
| | 00:26 | for the thesis statement assignment
right from our syllabi and copy it using
| | 00:30 | Command+C, or Ctrl+C, on your keyboard and
then go ahead and click back into Moodle.
| | 00:34 | Scroll down until you find Week 3--
| | 00:36 | I have gone ahead and just highlighted
it here--and click the dropdown for Add an
| | 00:40 | activity and then select Upload a single file.
| | 00:43 | For the Assignment name, go ahead and
type in Thesis Statement, and for the
| | 00:49 | Description, just go ahead and press
Command+V, or Ctrl+V, once you've clicked into
| | 00:53 | the Description field. All the
description directly out of our syllabi pastes
| | 00:58 | right into here, so the students were
able to see all that information and they
| | 01:01 | know exactly what it is that they need to do.
| | 01:03 | If we scroll down a little bit in our
page, we can see the other options that
| | 01:06 | are available to us.
| | 01:08 | We have the Available from and Due dates.
| | 01:10 | We will go ahead and uncheck both of
the Enable boxes for those, because we
| | 01:14 | want this assignment to be available
to the students the entire semester.
| | 01:18 | We want to go ahead and leave the Prevent
late submissions set to No. For the Grade,
| | 01:23 | we know that this assignment is worth
35 points, so go ahead and click the
| | 01:26 | dropdown menu here and scroll down
until you find the 35 listing here, and that
| | 01:32 | was listed in our syllabi.
| | 01:34 | For the Grade category we know that
the thesis statement is part of the Group
| | 01:38 | Evaluation grade, so we will go
ahead and select Group Evaluation.
| | 01:41 | We don't want to allow resubmitting,
and we don't want to get an email every time
| | 01:45 | that one of our students
submits their assignment.
| | 01:48 | For the Maximum size, 128 MB, is
probably a bit generous, so we'll go ahead and
| | 01:53 | set that down about 20 MB.
| | 01:56 | So we can scroll down just a little bit further.
| | 01:58 | We are going to leave the Group mode
set to No groups, the Visibility is set to
| | 02:01 | Show, because we do want this
assignment to be available to our students.
| | 02:05 | We will leave the ID number blank and we
will go ahead and hit Save and return to course.
| | 02:09 | When the page reloads, we can see that
our Thesis Statement assignment has been
| | 02:12 | added right here in our Week 3.
| | 02:15 | We can go ahead and hit the Move Right
button, and we can bump that over to the
| | 02:19 | right so it will align with the left-
hand side of all of our other Moodle
| | 02:23 | items that we've added.
| | 02:25 | And let's go ahead and click on the
Thesis Statement link, so we can see what
| | 02:28 | the assignment looks like.
| | 02:30 | Here we can see the text of the assignment.
| | 02:33 | We can see that currently no attempts
have been made on the assignment, although
| | 02:36 | that is a link, and it will take us
directly to the Grading section for this
| | 02:40 | assignment once students
began handing in assignments.
| | 02:43 | To see how this assignment would look
to a student, we can come over to the
| | 02:46 | left-hand side into the Settings box,
click on the link for Switch role to, and
| | 02:51 | select Student from the dropdown menu.
| | 02:54 | Here we can see the only real change in
the user interface is that the students
| | 02:59 | now have an Upload this file button,
where they'd be able to hit that an upload
| | 03:03 | their thesis statement directly to us,
handing in and completing this assignment.
| | 03:07 | Let's go ahead return back to our
normal role by clicking on the Return to my
| | 03:11 | normal role button and then go back to
the Main course page by clicking on the
| | 03:15 | BIAOL432 link, up in the breadcrumbs.
| | 03:18 | We can go ahead and jump back to our
overall view and Show all weeks by toggling
| | 03:23 | that box and scroll back
up to the top of our page.
| | 03:28 | The uploading a single file assignment
type is the perfect assignment if you
| | 03:32 | want to have your students just upload
one file. It's very quick and very easy
| | 03:37 | to set up, and its very explicit to
the students as to what it is that they
| | 03:40 | need to do.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Offline activity assignment| 00:00 | The next assignment type for us to
take a look at is the Offline activity.
| | 00:05 | Now an offline activity is any type
of activity that does not take place in
| | 00:10 | Moodle, so in the case of our
course we want our students to be able to
| | 00:13 | participate in the poster symposium at
our university and present their research
| | 00:18 | findings there. But there's nothing
that they need actually upload into our
| | 00:23 | Moodle course, so an offline
activity is actually perfect for this.
| | 00:26 | To begin with, let's go ahead and open
up the Syllabus.doc file from our Chapter
| | 00:31 | 7 exercise files, and here we have the
detailed description is to what it is that
| | 00:35 | we want the students to do.
| | 00:37 | Go ahead and select the text under
Poster Preparation and copy to your clipboard
| | 00:42 | using Command+C, or Ctrl+C.
This way we don't have to type it.
| | 00:45 | Let's back into our Moodle course
and then scroll down to Week 14.
| | 00:49 | I've gone ahead and highlighted it here for us.
| | 00:52 | We can click the dropdown menu for add
an activity and select Offline activity.
| | 00:57 | For the assignment name we'll simply
click in the box there and type in "Poster
| | 01:01 | Presentation" and for the Description we
can go ahead and click inside of the box
| | 01:08 | and press Command+V, or Ctrl+V, to paste
in the description that we have already
| | 01:12 | written out from our course syllabus.
| | 01:14 | Here we can see that we want the
students to present their drafts on the 25th
| | 01:18 | of April and on the 27th of April, we want them
to go ahead and present at the poster symposium.
| | 01:24 | Let's go ahead and set up the rest
of the parameters for this assignment.
| | 01:27 | If we scroll down on the page, we can
see the available from and due dates are
| | 01:32 | both set for us, but we can go ahead
and uncheck those boxes so that this
| | 01:36 | assignment is always available to our students.
| | 01:39 | We want to go ahead and make sure we
have Prevent late submissions set to No,
| | 01:43 | because the students are going
to do this on their own time.
| | 01:46 | When we look at our syllabus we can tell
that this assignment is were 35 points,
| | 01:49 | so we'll go ahead and scroll down in
the list of points available and we'll
| | 01:53 | select 35 from the dropdown menu.
| | 01:56 | Now this assignment is going to be
graded as part of our group evaluation,
| | 02:00 | so we'll select Group
Evaluation from the Grade category.
| | 02:04 | The Bottom, we're going to go
ahead and leave this set to No groups;
| | 02:06 | for Visible, we're going to set it to Show; and
for ID number, we're going to go ahead and leave that blank.
| | 02:11 | Go ahead and hit the Save
and return to course button,
| | 02:15 | and now let's go ahead and move the
poster presentation assignment over to the
| | 02:18 | right one by pressing the Move Right
button and then let's look and see what
| | 02:22 | this assignment looks like.
| | 02:23 | Go ahead and click on the link, and we
simply have the text description, and we
| | 02:28 | have our standard link, No
attempts have been made on this assignment.
| | 02:31 | If we come over to the left-hand side in
the Settings block and we click on Switch
| | 02:35 | role to and select Student,
| | 02:38 | the student view looks virtually the
same as what our view was. There's nothing
| | 02:41 | for the students to do, because we're
just providing information to the student
| | 02:45 | as to what they need to do.
| | 02:46 | They're going to complete this
assignment outside of Moodle, so they don't have
| | 02:50 | any upload features or even
any notes features for us.
| | 02:53 | Go ahead and return back to your normal
role and then go back to the main course
| | 02:57 | page by clicking on BIOL432 in the breadcrumbs.
| | 03:02 | Let's go ahead and un-highlight if
you've highlighted Week 14 and scroll all the
| | 03:08 | way back up to the top.
| | 03:10 | The Offline activity is the perfect
assignment type if you need to set up an
| | 03:14 | assignment where you're going to
grade the students on doing something but
| | 03:17 | they're not going to
complete that assignment online.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Assignment and Gradebook interactions| 00:00 | Before we finish up this chapter on
assignment types, I wanted to take just
| | 00:04 | a quick minute and have a look at the
Gradebook to show what happened when
| | 00:08 | we selected the particular Grade category
throughout each of the different assignment types.
| | 00:14 | If you go over to the Settings block
on the left-hand column and click on
| | 00:18 | Grades, you're taken
directly into your Gradebook.
| | 00:20 | Here you see all of your students
listed out, and under the appropriate grade
| | 00:25 | categories you see each of the
different assignments that we've added.
| | 00:29 | Here is your Final Research Paper,
your Thesis Statement, the Poster
| | 00:33 | Presentation, and if we
scroll over a little bit, the Week 2
| | 00:37 | Personal Contribution.
| | 00:38 | So by starting off by creating our
grade categories, then selecting those grade
| | 00:44 | categories when we created our
assignments themselves, our Gradebook is
| | 00:48 | automatically built for us, and we are
able to go directly into here in one view
| | 00:54 | and enter in all of the grades
for our class in one simple view.
| | 00:59 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course, and that should give you a good
| | 01:02 | overview of each of these
different assignment types:
| | 01:05 | Advanced uploading of files, Online
text, Uploading of single files, and
| | 01:10 | Offline activities.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Adding ActivitiesCreating a live chat room| 00:00 | Moodle has a built-in activity called
Chat and I like to use the Chat activity
| | 00:05 | to hold virtual office hours with my students.
| | 00:08 | That way anytime my students need to
get a hold of me during specified times
| | 00:12 | that I'm normally would be in my office
and holding office hours, they can also
| | 00:15 | log into the Moodle course and contact me
directly through there and have a live chat.
| | 00:21 | This has been a useful tool for
being able to get students to approach me
| | 00:25 | initially online and then come into
the office and meet with me in person.
| | 00:29 | So to creative an activity, make sure
you have Editing turned on and then in
| | 00:33 | the Header block we will go ahead
and click the dropdown menu for Add an
| | 00:36 | activity and select Chat.
| | 00:40 | For the Name of this chat room, I simply
call my chat room Virtual Office Hours.
| | 00:45 | For the Introductory text, I let the
students know when my virtual office hours
| | 00:49 | are going to be, This live chat will
be available to students everyday from
| | 00:58 | 11:30 AM until 1:30 PM.
| | 01:03 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit
and now let's set up some of the specific
| | 01:07 | parameters about the Chat.
| | 01:09 | We can set the chat time to
start at a particular date.
| | 01:13 | I could go ahead and set this date to
-- go ahead and be the first day of the
| | 01:16 | course, but I am going to go ahead and
set this to today's date which is the
| | 01:20 | 30th of July, 2011 and I am going to
set the time that this chat is going to be
| | 01:25 | available for my normal
time of 11:30 in the morning.
| | 01:29 | The next option of Repeat sessions, I
want set this to At the same time everyday.
| | 01:35 | That way everyday during the term I
don't have to go in and recreate a new chat,
| | 01:40 | this chat will automatically be
available to my students everyday.
| | 01:45 | The next option is Save past sessions,
and we can set this so it only saves the
| | 01:49 | chat session text for some
specified amount of time.
| | 01:54 | I like to keep a record of all these
chats, so I go ahead and set this to
| | 01:57 | Never delete messages.
| | 01:59 | The last option here is
Everyone can view past sessions.
| | 02:02 | If you want students to be able to
always go in and look at previous chats, you
| | 02:07 | can go ahead and set this to Yes.
| | 02:09 | If you do not want that, go
ahead and leave it set to No.
| | 02:11 | I am going to leave it set to No.
| | 02:13 | That way I can go back and I can review
all my previous chat sessions, but the
| | 02:17 | students are unable to go in
and see those other sessions.
| | 02:20 | Now if we were setting up a chat with a
guest speaker perhaps, we would want to
| | 02:23 | set this to Yes, so that the students
could always go in and check out what was
| | 02:26 | going on in the chat.
| | 02:28 | The bottom section here allows us
to set the Common module settings.
| | 02:31 | We are not going to use Group mode.
| | 02:33 | We are going to leave the
Visibility set to Show so that these virtual
| | 02:37 | office hours are always available to the
students, and we are not going to set an ID number.
| | 02:41 | Go ahead and click the Save and
return to course button and when our page
| | 02:44 | refreshes we can see our Virtual
Office Hours, Chat session available here
| | 02:49 | in our Header block.
| | 02:50 | To look at what the Chat session looks
like, go ahead and click on the link for
| | 02:53 | Virtual Office Hours and you can see our
instructions here that we have given to
| | 02:56 | the students, The live chat will be
available to the students everyday from
| | 03:00 | 11:30 AM to 1:30 PM.
| | 03:02 | We can see when the next session is
going to begin which would be set for the
| | 03:05 | next day,, and then we have
two ways of accessing the Chat.
| | 03:09 | The first way which simply opens a
live chat window and the other option is a
| | 03:13 | little bit more accessible interface.
| | 03:15 | Let's go ahead and explore the normal
chat session, click the Click here to
| | 03:18 | enter the chat room now link.
| | 03:20 | After a few seconds the chat room opens.
| | 03:23 | We can see that we've currently
entered into the chat room and in order to
| | 03:26 | interact with the chat there is a text
field down at the bottom, all we have to
| | 03:30 | do is type in a message, hit Enter or
Return on our keyboard and our new message
| | 03:34 | is posted into the chat.
| | 03:36 | Students are able to login to here
and interact with us in real-time.
| | 03:40 | Let's go ahead and close this window,
and I want to look at one other thing
| | 03:43 | inside of this chat.
| | 03:45 | Go ahead and return back to your course
by clicking on the BIOL432 link in the
| | 03:49 | upper left corner, in the breadcrumbs section.
| | 03:53 | We can see that our chat was added
here into the Header block, but if we look
| | 03:56 | over here in the right column, we can
see in the Upcoming events that there's a
| | 04:00 | Virtual Office Hours chat session,
that's already been added to our Calendar.
| | 04:04 | If you click on the link for Go to
calendar, we are initially brought in to the
| | 04:09 | current day where we can see the chat
session added as an activity, and then if
| | 04:13 | we look down in the Calendar we see
that tomorrow's date also has the Virtual
| | 04:17 | Office Hours added to it.
| | 04:19 | If we scroll down a little bit and we
look at the next days in sequence, you'll
| | 04:23 | notice that the next day sequence
do not have the chat session noted.
| | 04:28 | That's because the chat session only
notes on the very next day, tomorrow a new
| | 04:32 | session will be announced to
the students automatically.
| | 04:35 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the top
and let's return back to our course by
| | 04:38 | clicking on the BIOL432 link.
| | 04:41 | Using an online chat can be a great
way to get your students to interact with
| | 04:45 | you online, ask questions and approach you.
| | 04:48 | By working with the students through
the Chat session, you can often times
| | 04:51 | get them into your office to be able
to hold more one-on-one conversations
| | 04:55 | and tutoring session.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding Choice, Feedback, and Survey activities| 00:00 | Three activities that are available
to you inside of Moodle, in order to
| | 00:04 | collect information and feedback from
students are the Choice, Feedback and Survey Modules.
| | 00:12 | The Choice activity is one where
you're able to ask students a single
| | 00:16 | multiple-choice question that the
students can go in and select their answer,
| | 00:20 | and all data from all of the students in
your course are all collated together
| | 00:24 | into one easy-to-use interface.
| | 00:26 | The Feedback Module is more of what most
of us think of as a traditional survey.
| | 00:32 | This module allows the teacher to go in
and create their own custom survey that
| | 00:37 | they give to the students.
| | 00:38 | This survey can have multiple
different questions and even multiple
| | 00:41 | different question types.
| | 00:43 | Again, all data collected from the
students can then be collated and analyzed.
| | 00:48 | The final type is the Survey, and the
survey activity is one that distributes
| | 00:53 | one of several different types of
standardized surveys, such as the
| | 00:57 | Constructivist Online Learning
Environment Survey or the Attitudes to Thinking
| | 01:01 | and Learning Survey.
| | 01:03 | So when you want to start collecting
data and feedback from your students, the
| | 01:07 | first thing you need to decide is what
type of activity do you want, do you want
| | 01:11 | a single multiple Choice question,
Feedback, a Traditional User Created Survey
| | 01:17 |
| | 01:17 | or a Standardized Survey.
| | 01:18 | Over the next several movies, we
will step through using each of these.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a Choice activity| 00:00 | During the first week of our term,
we need to ask the students about any
| | 00:04 | specific dietary requirements that
they may have, so that when we go on our
| | 00:08 | field trip during spring break, we
know what to tell the cooks on the
| | 00:11 | Island where we are going.
| | 00:13 | The perfect tool for
doing this is to use a choice.
| | 00:16 | So make sure that Editing is turned on
and then scroll down to the bottom of
| | 00:19 | Week 1 and click on the dropdown
for add an activity and select Choice.
| | 00:24 | For the choice name, let's simply go
ahead and click inside of that field, and
| | 00:28 | enter in Dietary Requirements.
| | 00:30 | Then click down on the Introductory
text section and give the students a little
| | 00:34 | bit of instructions as to what
it is that you want them to do.
| | 00:38 | Please let us know about any
dietary requirements you have.
| | 00:44 | I am a, and we'll just add a colon there
at the end, so that the students have a
| | 00:50 | prompt, and then they can select their answers.
| | 00:52 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit and
let's look at some of the options that we have now.
| | 00:58 | Limit allows us to limit the
number of responses allowed.
| | 01:01 | If we were to select yes for this then
if we only have ten students and we limit
| | 01:06 | the number of responses for particular
question, then all of the students would
| | 01:11 | not be able to answer the same question.
| | 01:14 | So we want all the students to have
an independent survey in this case.
| | 01:18 | So we'll leave this set to Disable.
| | 01:20 | For Options, these are the specific responses
that we want our students to be able to select.
| | 01:25 | So in regards to dietary
requirements, we'll simply type in Vegetarian.
| | 01:31 | for Option 2, we'll type in Carnivore.
| | 01:33 | for Option 3, we'll type in Omnivore
and for Option 4, we'll type in Other
| | 01:39 | - Please contact me.
| | 01:41 | If we needed to add additional fields,
we could click the button to add three
| | 01:45 | more fields at a time.
| | 01:47 | Any fields that are left blank will
simply be ignored by the Moodle choice.
| | 01:51 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit further.
| | 01:54 | Now if we want to restrict this choice
activity to a particular time period, we
| | 01:58 | could check the box here and set the
Open and Until dates to restrict the time
| | 02:03 | period for the choice.
| | 02:04 | We're not going to do that.
| | 02:05 | So we're going to uncheck this box.
| | 02:06 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit
further, a couple of display parameters
| | 02:10 | that we'd like to use.
| | 02:11 | The first is how we want
to display our questions.
| | 02:14 | do we want them to be
displayed horizontally or vertically.
| | 02:16 | I like having mine displayed vertically.
| | 02:18 | So we'll go ahead and select the
dropdown here and change it from Display
| | 02:22 | horizontally to Display vertically.
| | 02:25 | Next is Publish results, and here we
can choose whether or not as soon as the
| | 02:30 | students finish this survey that
they can see the responses from other
| | 02:33 | students, we can say whether or not
they can only see those responses after
| | 02:38 | this activity time period has ended, or we
can say always show the results to the students.
| | 02:44 | Well, in this case, because we're asking
them specific dietary requirements, the
| | 02:48 | other students in the class do
not need to see those responses.
| | 02:51 | So we'll go ahead and leave it set to
Do not publish responses to students.
| | 02:55 | That way only the teachers of
the course are able to see it.
| | 02:58 | If we had chosen to reveal results to
students, we would have some options here
| | 03:02 | as to how to set the
privacy settings for the students.
| | 03:05 | In other words, we could publish the
results, but they would all be published
| | 03:08 | always anonymously to protect
the privacy of each student.
| | 03:12 | The next option is Allow choice to be updated.
| | 03:14 | This would be if you wanted the
students to be able to go in, answer the
| | 03:17 | choice activity, and then later go in, and
change their mind and select a different item.
| | 03:22 | So in this case, we're going to go
ahead and set No, because the student should
| | 03:25 | know the first time that they going
into the survey whether or not they are
| | 03:28 | vegetarian, carnivore or omnivore.
| | 03:31 | We could also choose to show a column
for any unanswered questions that were
| | 03:35 | listed in the top, but we don't want
that to show, so we're going to go ahead
| | 03:38 | and leave that set to No.
| | 03:39 | In the bottom Common module settings,
we can set the Group mode, if you're
| | 03:43 | having this choice targeted group specifically.
| | 03:45 | We're not in this case, so we're
going to leave this set No groups.
| | 03:48 | We're going to leave the Visibility
set to Shows so that the students all are
| | 03:52 | able to see this activity and
we're going to ignore the ID number.
| | 03:55 | Go ahead and click Save and return to course.
| | 03:57 | And when the page refreshes,
we're taken back to the top of Week 1.
| | 04:00 | Go ahead and scroll down in our list of
Week 1 activities and we'll go ahead and
| | 04:05 | use the Move right tool to move
the dietary requirements in under the
| | 04:09 | Assignments for the week and let's go
ahead and click on Dietary Requirements
| | 04:13 | choice to see what it looks like.
| | 04:15 | Here we can see the question that we
asked the students and then the prompt of
| | 04:18 | IMA and they can simply select their response.
| | 04:22 | In this case, I'm an omnivore, so
I'll go ahead and select Omnivore and
| | 04:25 | click Save my choice.
| | 04:27 | Once the choice has been answered for
ourselves we can see that the results are
| | 04:31 | not currently viewable, but if we look
in the upper-right, we can see that we
| | 04:34 | can view one response and click on that
link and you can see how the responses
| | 04:38 | will begin to come into you.
| | 04:40 | You can see each different column for
each choice that was available to the
| | 04:43 | students, you can see who answered and
in which column, you can download the
| | 04:48 | data into an ODS or Open Document format,
you can download it as an Excel file,
| | 04:53 | or you can download it as Text file.
| | 04:56 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course by clicking on the BIOL432 link in
| | 05:01 | the breadcrumb section and now I have
a simple way of being able to create a
| | 05:05 | single multiple source survey for your
students by using the choice activity.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a customized Feedback activity| 00:00 | The next type of activity to have
a look at is the Feedback activity.
| | 00:04 | Now this activity is most closely
related to what most teachers would consider
| | 00:09 | as a traditional survey.
| | 00:11 | You can go in and you can create any
number of different questions using
| | 00:15 | different types from Multiple choice, to
true/false to open-ended questions, and
| | 00:20 | we will create many of these
over the next couple of movies.
| | 00:22 | But in this movie we need to ask the
students to provide us some feedback for
| | 00:26 | the research station where we are
going for a spring break trip to Belize.
| | 00:30 | So what we want to do is we want to
scroll down in our page to Week 9 and simply
| | 00:34 | click on the Add an activity dropdown
menu and select Feedback from that menu.
| | 00:41 | When the page loads, simply click
inside of the Name field and type in
| | 00:44 | University of Belize-
Marine Research Center Feedback.
| | 00:53 | Then in the Description let's type in
Use this form to provide feedback to our
| | 00:58 | host at the University of
Belize's Marine Research Center.
| | 01:02 | All feedback will be recorded Anonymously.
| | 01:05 | Then go ahead and scroll down and the
next thing we can set up is the Timing.
| | 01:09 | We can choose to Open this feedback
activity at a particular date and time if we
| | 01:14 | check this box and then set
up the date and time here.
| | 01:18 | We could then choose to close the
activity, meaning it would no longer be
| | 01:21 | available to the students, by checking this
box and setting up its date and time here.
| | 01:24 | I want to make sure that this activity
is available to our students at any time.
| | 01:28 | So I'll go ahead and uncheck the box.
| | 01:30 | Next, if we scroll down we can
get to the Feedback options section.
| | 01:34 | Here we can choose how our feedback
is going to be recorded, whether it's
| | 01:38 | recorded anonymously for each user or
if the user's name is tracked along with
| | 01:42 | all of their feedback.
| | 01:44 | In this case, we have told the
students that their feedback will be
| | 01:47 | recorded anonymously.
| | 01:48 | So we will leave it set to Anonymous.
| | 01:50 | Next, we can choose whether or not we want to
show any analysis after the page is submitted.
| | 01:55 | Many times it's very helpful to create
little mini surveys embedded as part of
| | 01:59 | your course and you want to provide the
students immediate feedback based on the
| | 02:03 | voting that they're
doing inside of their course.
| | 02:05 | In that case you would ant to set this
option to Yes, but for our use here, we
| | 02:09 | are going to go ahead and leave it set to No.
| | 02:11 | Next, you can choose whether or not
you want to Send email notification out
| | 02:14 | after the user completes the exam.
| | 02:16 | There is no need for that right now,
so we are going to go ahead and leave
| | 02:19 | this one set to No.
| | 02:20 | You could also choose if you wanted
students to be able to submit Multiple
| | 02:24 | copies of this survey.
| | 02:26 | In this case we want to make sure that
each student is only able to submit their
| | 02:30 | feedback one time,, and then we are
going to transfer all of that feedback back
| | 02:34 | to our host, back at the University of Belize.
| | 02:37 | So we are going to leave
Multiple submissions also set to No.
| | 02:39 | The next option would allow us to turn on
Automatic numbering of all of our questions.
| | 02:44 | We are just going to create a few
questions in this feedback so we are not going
| | 02:48 | to need to worry about auto-numbering.
| | 02:49 | So we will go ahead and leave
that turned off for right now.
| | 02:51 | Scroll down on the page and now we can
provide the students with some kind of
| | 02:54 | response after they
complete this feedback activity.
| | 02:58 | So I will simply click into
the box and type in Thank you for
| | 03:01 | providing feedback.
| | 03:02 | If we had a Web address that we
wanted to direct the students to after they
| | 03:06 | completed the feedback, we can
enter that URL in right here.
| | 03:10 | In our case, after the students complete
the feedback, we want to just have them
| | 03:14 | return back to the main course page,
and so that will be the default action.
| | 03:18 | So I'll go ahead and leave
this option blank for now.
| | 03:20 | Go ahead and scroll down and now
we have our Common module settings.
| | 03:24 | We are not going to require any groups on this.
| | 03:26 | We want to make sure that the
activity is always available to the students.
| | 03:29 | So we are going to leave the
Visibility set to Show and we are not going to
| | 03:32 | worry about an ID number.
| | 03:34 | Next, let's scroll down and we can choose
whether or not we want to Restrict access.
| | 03:38 | We are not going to have
any restricted access on this.
| | 03:41 | So we will simply click the
Save and return to course button.
| | 03:43 | When we return back to our course,
let's go ahead and move the Feedback module
| | 03:47 | in one by clicking the Move Right button
and then let's go ahead and take a look
| | 03:50 | at the Feedback module.
| | 03:51 | So, I am going to go ahead and click on
the Feedback and the first page gives us
| | 03:54 | an overview of the setup that we have.
| | 03:57 | We have the title of the survey, how
many Submitted answers, any Questions that
| | 04:01 | we've had, these are currently set
to 0, we have the Description of the
| | 04:05 | feedback, we have a listing that is
going to describe the page after the student
| | 04:09 | completes the feedback, and there
is a link to Answer the questions.
| | 04:13 | There are also tabs that we can go
into to be able to Edit the questions.
| | 04:17 | There is a Template of we want to
build one of these Feedback modules and
| | 04:21 | then convert it into a template to be able
to use over and over throughout our course.
| | 04:25 | Next, there is a tab for Analysis
where we can take and analyze all of the
| | 04:29 | data that comes back in.
| | 04:30 | we can even export that
data out to Microsoft Excel.
| | 04:34 | And the last tab allows us to
show any responses that the students
| | 04:37 | have submitted to us.
| | 04:39 | Let's go ahead and return
back to the Overview tab.
| | 04:41 | and in the next movie we will
begin creating our questions for this
| | 04:45 | Feedback module.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a multiple choice question| 00:00 | The first question in our custom
feedback activity that we want the students to
| | 00:04 | answer is one that would allow them to
select each of the different activities
| | 00:08 | that they participated in
while they were on the island.
| | 00:11 | This is the multiple-choice type of
question that'll allow the students to
| | 00:15 | select multiple answers.
| | 00:16 | So make sure you're inside of the
feedback activity, you're on the Edit
| | 00:20 | question tab and then in the Add questions to
activity dropdown menu select Multiple choice.
| | 00:27 | We want to require all students to answer
this question, so check the box for Required.
| | 00:32 | In the Question field enter in the
question that we want to ask the student,
| | 00:36 | Please select all of the activities that
you participated in while at the MRC or
| | 00:46 | Marine Research Center.
| | 00:47 | For the label we would normally put in
some kind of note designating the type of
| | 00:52 | activity that we're doing.
| | 00:54 | So for this label we'll type
in Activities Participation.
| | 00:59 | For the Adjustment, here we can
select vertical or horizontal and this will
| | 01:04 | denote how we want the optional answers
to show up underneath of our question.
| | 01:09 | In this case I like to have this type
of question to have the answers listed
| | 01:13 | out vertically to make a little bit easier
to read, so we'll leave that set to vertical.
| | 01:18 | Next is the Multiple-choice type.
| | 01:21 | We want to make sure that we select
multiple-choice multiple answers, this way
| | 01:25 | students can select multiple different
activities that they participated in.
| | 01:29 | The next two options Do
not analyze empty submits.
| | 01:33 | We want to set that to Yes, because
we don't want any analysis set to any
| | 01:37 | responses that are left open.
| | 01:39 | And also Hide the "Not selected" item,
we want to make sure that that's set to
| | 01:44 | Yes also, because we know all of our
student participated in at least one of the
| | 01:48 | activities that we're
going to have within our list.
| | 01:50 | Go ahead and scroll down and here in
the Multiple-choice values field we want
| | 01:55 | to go ahead and type in a list of all
the different activities that we want to
| | 02:00 | show up as options.
| | 02:01 | Now to that a type in these
activities we simply type in the name of the
| | 02:05 | activity in the first case Swimming and
then simply hit Enter or Return on your
| | 02:09 | keyboard to go to the line
and type in the next activity.
| | 02:12 | Snorkeling hit Enter or Return then
type in Scuba and make sure you type in
| | 02:17 | SCUBA in all upper case hit
Enter or Return and the Hiking.
| | 02:22 | Now it's important that you have the
item in here listed SCUBA, because we're
| | 02:26 | going to have a follow-up question to
this to be able to rate the facilities and
| | 02:30 | we're going to have to
select this particular name.
| | 02:33 | So come down here a little bit further
and our next item dependent item, this
| | 02:38 | question is not dependent on any other
questions, but the next question that we
| | 02:43 | do add will be dependent on this one.
| | 02:45 | So we're not going to set this here and
we're not going to set a dependent value.
| | 02:49 | For Position, Position is simply
listing out which position with in our overall
| | 02:54 | feedback questionnaire that were to have
this particular question appear in that list.
| | 03:00 | So this is all the settings we want
to save on this one, so hit the Save
| | 03:03 | question button and here we can begin
seeing a preview as to what our survey
| | 03:07 | is going to look like.
| | 03:08 | In the next movie we'll go
ahead and add a dependent question.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a dependent followup question| 00:00 | In the first question of our feedback
activity when I ask the students about
| | 00:04 | what activities they participated in.
| | 00:06 | With one of those activities being SCUBA
if the students did participate in that
| | 00:10 | activity we want to be able to ask
follow-up question to find out additional
| | 00:15 | information about what they thought
about the facilities for the SCUBA Diving
| | 00:18 | program at the Island.
| | 00:20 | So in order to add any follow-up
questions we need to first create a page break
| | 00:25 | within our feedback activity.
| | 00:27 | So hit the dropdown menu
and select Add a page break.
| | 00:31 | The page break block will show up down
here just underneath of our question.
| | 00:35 | Now let's go back up to the dropdown
list and this time we're going to add
| | 00:38 | another multiple choice question.
| | 00:40 | We're going to make this another
required question, and for the Question
| | 00:44 | text we're going to type in Please rate your
experience with our SCUBA Diving facilities.
| | 00:53 | For the Label let's add SCUBA facilities.
| | 00:57 | So we have a clear label list to what
this particular question is asking about.
| | 01:02 | The Adjustment allows us to select
whether or not we want the responses to be
| | 01:06 | horizontal or vertical.
| | 01:07 | In this case I'd like them to be
vertical, and then we can select the type of
| | 01:11 | multiple-choice question.
| | 01:13 | In this case I'd like to go ahead and
make this a multiple-choice single answer
| | 01:17 | allowed dropdown list.
| | 01:19 | That way the students get a simple
dropdown list that will have all the options
| | 01:23 | listed, but it will be a
nice clean activity type.
| | 01:26 | We don't want to analyze empty
submissions and we do want Hide the
| | 01:31 | "Not selected" item.
| | 01:32 | So we will go ahead and
hit Yes for that one as well.
| | 01:35 | Go ahead and scroll down a little bit
and in the Multiple choice values this
| | 01:39 | time we're going to list out each of
the different types of ratings that we're
| | 01:42 | going to give to our SCUBA facility.
| | 01:44 | The first being Excellent.
| | 01:46 | Simply hit Enter or Return and then
Above Average, Enter or Return, Average,
| | 01:52 | Enter or Return, Below
Average, and finally Poor.
| | 01:56 | In the dropdown menu for dependent
item select ActivitiesParticipation.
| | 02:01 | This is the label of the previous question.
| | 02:04 | The dependent value would be the
name of the item from the list from the
| | 02:09 | previous question that if the student
selects that item this question will
| | 02:13 | automatically appear.
| | 02:16 | The dependent value that we want is SCUBA.
| | 02:19 | Be sure to type the value exactly as
you typed it in the previous question's
| | 02:23 | Multiple choice values option.
| | 02:25 | So in this case we're going
to type in SCUBA in all caps.
| | 02:29 | The Position item is going to show
which position within our feedback activity
| | 02:33 | that this particular
question is going to appear.
| | 02:36 | Go ahead and click the Save question
item and now we can see the preview as to
| | 02:40 | what our feedback survey looks like.
| | 02:43 | We have our first question asking about
activities, then a page break and what
| | 02:47 | will happen is depending on
what the student selects here.
| | 02:50 | if the student selects SCUBA this
dependent follow-up question about the SCUBA
| | 02:55 | facilities will appear next.
| | 02:58 | If the student selects any other item
from the list this question will simply be
| | 03:02 | skipped and the next question
will be presented to the student.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a rating question| 00:00 | The next type of question that we want
to add to our feedback survey is a rated
| | 00:06 | type of question where the students can
select from a scale, let's say 0 to 4 or
| | 00:10 | 1 to 5, some particular rating.
| | 00:13 | In this case we're going to ask
about the students' overall level of
| | 00:16 | satisfaction with the MRC
facilities on the island.
| | 00:20 | So go ahead and click the dropdown
menu and select Multiple choice (rated),
| | 00:26 | this is again going to be a required
question, we want all students to be
| | 00:29 | forced to answer this question, then
in the Question field let's go ahead and
| | 00:33 | ask our question, Please rate your overall
level of satisfaction with the MRC facilities.
| | 00:41 | For the Label we'll go
ahead and add MRC Facilities.
| | 00:43 | Now for these types of questions I'd
like to have the responses laid out
| | 00:49 | horizontally, so it's easy to
see from one response to the next.
| | 00:53 | So we'll go ahead and select horizontally.
| | 00:55 | The type of multiple-choice select, we
can have it so that it just gives us our
| | 01:00 | listings, or we can have
these added into a dropdown.
| | 01:03 | We've already seen what a dropdown
looks like, so we'll go ahead and leave this
| | 01:05 | set to Multiple choice - single answer.
| | 01:08 | We do not want to analyze any empty
submits nor do we want to show the not
| | 01:14 | selected items, so we'll go
ahead and leave that set to Yes also.
| | 01:17 | In the Multiple choice values section
we want to designate the point value
| | 01:22 | associated with each item, and we do
that by adding a number and then a slash
| | 01:27 | and then the name of the item that
we want to make selectable for that.
| | 01:31 | So for 0 we'll go ahead and add Poor,
hit Enter or Return on your keyboard for
| | 01:36 | a point value of 1/, we'll give the
label of Below Average, then for 2 points
| | 01:43 | we'll go ahead and call this Average, 3
points Above Average, 4 points Excellent.
| | 01:49 | Notice I didn't put spaces on either
side of the slash either between the
| | 01:54 | numerical value and the slash or
between the slash and our label.
| | 01:58 | So that's really important to be
able to make sure that you leave those
| | 02:00 | without spaces in there.
| | 02:01 | We'll go ahead and scroll down.
| | 02:03 | this is not a dependent question,
so we don't need to worry about the
| | 02:07 | dependent value either.
| | 02:09 | Position 4 would be the fourth question
in our survey which is fine, and we'll
| | 02:12 | go ahead and hit Save question.
| | 02:14 | When our page reloads in the Preview
down here at the bottom we can scroll
| | 02:17 | down and we can see the label that
we've got here, and then we can see the
| | 02:21 | question, Please rate your overall
level of satisfaction with the MRC
| | 02:24 | facilities, and we have our radio
buttons for Poor, Below Average, Average,
| | 02:30 | Above Average, and Excellent.
| | 02:32 | In the next movie we'll add an open-ended
question for students to be able to
| | 02:36 | provide us additional feedback.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding an open response question| 00:00 | Now as I ask our students an open-ended
question where they're able to just
| | 00:03 | freeform type in, whatever type of
feedback that they would like to provide to us.
| | 00:09 | So in order to do that we'll hit the
dropdown menu for select for our questions,
| | 00:13 | we're going to select the Longer text answer.
| | 00:16 | Now this is a question that we don't
necessarily need to require our students
| | 00:19 | to be able to provide feedback for, so we'll
go ahead and leave the Required box unchecked.
| | 00:25 | For the Question text let's ask the
students to Please use the space provided to
| | 00:31 | give us any additional
feedback about your experience at MRC.
| | 00:38 | For the Label we'll
simply put Additional Feedback.
| | 00:41 | The Width parameter controls how wide
the field is that the students are going
| | 00:46 | to be able to enter text into.
| | 00:48 | The default value of 30 should be
sufficient, and the number of lines that are
| | 00:52 | available should also be sufficient at 5.
| | 00:55 | This question is not dependent on any
other item, although this is a great
| | 00:58 | question type to ask for additional
feedback if a student would just select an
| | 01:03 | item of say other in some kind of a
choice feedback and here you could have a
| | 01:07 | follow-up question that would allow
them to provide you additional feedback
| | 01:11 | about their previous choice.
| | 01:13 | But in this case we're just going to
have an open-ended question, so we're going
| | 01:16 | to leave dependent item not set, same
thing for dependent value and Position 5
| | 01:22 | is perfect for a type of feedback questionnaire.
| | 01:24 | So go ahead and click the Save
question button and let's go ahead and scroll
| | 01:28 | down to the bottom in our list so we can
see how this is going to look on our page.
| | 01:33 | Here we have a blank for our students
to be able to type-in their responses.
| | 01:37 | One other thing that I want to point out.
| | 01:38 | This is the first question that we've
created that's not been a required question.
| | 01:42 | Now if we look over here on the right
-hand side, we can see that some of
| | 01:46 | our questions have a yellow circle
with an exclamation point in them, well
| | 01:49 | this question does not.
| | 01:51 | If we hover our mouse over this icon we
can see that it's simply a toggle to be
| | 01:56 | able to turn each question
to be either required or not.
| | 01:59 | So if we later change our mind and we
want this question to be required, we
| | 02:03 | simply check the button and then when
we scroll back down, we see that this is
| | 02:07 | now a required question.
| | 02:09 | If we decide again that we don't want
it to be required, we simply click the
| | 02:13 | exclamation point and that question is
no longer required by our students to
| | 02:18 | be able to complete.
| | 02:19 | Okay, our survey is looking to
be in pretty good shape right now.
| | 02:23 | In the next movie we're going logout of
our current user account log in as one
| | 02:27 | of our student accounts that we set up,
complete the survey, and then log back
| | 02:32 | in as ourselves so that we can
see what the results look like.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Analyzing Feedback results| 00:01 | Now make sure you have logged out of
your account in Moodle and now let's login
| | 00:04 | as a student, so we can step through
providing feedback that we can then go and
| | 00:09 | look at the analysis of.
| | 00:09 | So go up to the upper right corner,
click on Login link and we are going to
| | 00:13 | login as the User Al which is one of
our students and the Passwords can be
| | 00:18 | 12345, go ahead and click the Login link.
| | 00:21 | And when our page shows up, go head
over to the My courses section, click
| | 00:26 | on Coral Reef Ecology.
| | 00:28 | Now let's go ahead and scroll down to
Week 9 in the course, right there, and
| | 00:34 | let's go ahead and click
on this feedback activity.
| | 00:36 | We are given the instructions that we
entered in the first screen, and then
| | 00:40 | we have a link to answer the questions, go
ahead and click on the Answer the questions.
| | 00:44 | Here we can select the different types
of activities that we participated in and
| | 00:48 | we went swimming, snorkeling and
scuba diving, but we didn't do any hiking.
| | 00:51 | Go ahead and click the button for
next page, and notice that since we noted
| | 00:56 | that we went scuba diving, we get this
question here, which is going to ask us
| | 01:01 | to rate the scuba diving facility, so we
will go ahead and say those were excellent.
| | 01:05 | Next we can rate our overall
satisfaction with the MRC facilities and we thought
| | 01:09 | they were excellent as well.
| | 01:11 | In the space provided down here, we
can go and provide a little bit of extra
| | 01:15 | feedback, here we will just say, I had
a great time, and we can go ahead and
| | 01:20 | click the button for Submit our answers.
| | 01:22 | We are taken to a single page now that
thanks us for providing any feedback, and
| | 01:27 | when we hit the Continue link, we
are simply taken back to our course.
| | 01:32 | All right that's how we
wanted the feedback module to work.
| | 01:35 | Now let's go ahead and logout of the
student account and we will log back in as
| | 01:39 | our self, and my Password is 12345, go
and hit the Login link, here we go, let's
| | 01:47 | go back into our course.
| | 01:49 | And here in Week 9 if we scroll down
just a little bit, we can go ahead and
| | 01:53 | click on the link to go
back into our Feedback section.
| | 01:56 | With the feedback that's been
provided, we can look at two of these other
| | 02:00 | tabs here, let's go ahead and look at
Show responses first, here we can see
| | 02:04 | that we've had one Anonymous entry
that's been made, go ahead and click the
| | 02:08 | Show responses and once again we have
to click the link for response number 1
| | 02:15 | Show responses, and here we can see the
answers that were provided from this particular user.
| | 02:22 | Now if we had told Moodle to track
our users, we would know which user this
| | 02:27 | was, but since we said this should be
Anonymous results, our results coming in
| | 02:31 | here are anonymous.
| | 02:32 | Now if you want to look at all of the
responses that have come in and be able to
| | 02:36 | look at some general statistics about
them, go ahead and make sure you scrolled
| | 02:40 | up to the top and go ahead and
click on the Tab for Analysis.
| | 02:43 | Here we can see the number of
submitted answers and the number of questions.
| | 02:48 | we can export all these
results out to Microsoft Excel.
| | 02:52 | If we scroll down just a little bit,
we can see each other different
| | 02:55 | questions that were asked, and we can
see the percentages of responses that
| | 03:00 | we got for each of those.
| | 03:01 | Now since we've only got one response
in here, all these are going to show 100%
| | 03:05 | but if we have had multiple, it would
actually calculate the percentages for
| | 03:09 | each answer inside of here.
| | 03:11 | And so we can go ahead and scroll down
and look at all of our different options
| | 03:14 | that we've got here.
| | 03:16 | In this rating of our facilities, we
can see that because we added a value
| | 03:21 | associated with each of our different
ratings, we also get an average score for
| | 03:27 | this particular question, so we
can get an average rating and it has
| | 03:31 | automatically calculated for us right here.
| | 03:34 | In the bottom section, we can see any text
feedback that our students provided to us.
| | 03:38 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the top
and let's go ahead and return back to our
| | 03:42 | course by clicking BIOL432
link up here in our breadcrumbs.
| | 03:47 | And now you have basics for being
able to create your own custom feedback
| | 03:52 | questionnaire that you can provide to
your students and collect any number of
| | 03:56 | different data from your students.
| | 03:58 | This is the module that many teachers
have been looking for when they look to
| | 04:03 | create their own custom
survey within their Moodle course.
| | 04:07 | In the next movie we are going to go
ahead and look at the built-in survey tool
| | 04:11 | to look at providing some
standardized surveys to our students.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a standardized survey| 00:00 | Now that we've seen two methods of
creating custom surveys by either using the
| | 00:04 | choice module or the feedback module.
| | 00:08 | Now let's go ahead and add a
standardized survey to our course to collect some
| | 00:11 | information about the student's
attitudes towards thinking and learning.
| | 00:15 | To do this scroll down to the bottom of
Week 1 and click the dropdown menu for
| | 00:20 | Add an activity and select survey.
| | 00:23 | We're going to have the students
complete an ATLLS survey or attitudes towards
| | 00:28 | teaching and learning.
| | 00:29 | So for the Name simply type in ATTLS
survey, for the survey type click the
| | 00:34 | dropdown menu and here you can choose
any one of several different types of
| | 00:38 | standardized surveys.
| | 00:40 | In this case we're to choose the
ATTLS or ATTLS 20 items survey.
| | 00:45 | If we wanted to we could create
additional instructions to provide to the
| | 00:49 | students to let them know what
it is they're taking and why.
| | 00:52 | But in this case the standardized
introduction provides all the information that we need.
| | 00:57 | Go ahead and scroll down on the page
and next we can set the group module since
| | 01:01 | we're having each student take this
survey for themselves, we're going to leave
| | 01:04 | set to No groups, we do
want Visibility to be Shown.
| | 01:08 | Now we're going to leave the ID number
blank, go ahead and click the Save and
| | 01:11 | return to course button and when our
page reloads go ahead and scroll back down
| | 01:16 | to the bottom of Week 1 and let's use
the Move right tool to move the ATLLS
| | 01:20 | survey and underneath of
our listing of assignments.
| | 01:23 | Now let's go ahead and look at the
survey itself, so click on the link ATLLS
| | 01:27 | survey and here in the instruction we
let the students know what the purpose of
| | 01:31 | the questionnaire is and that there are
no right or wrong answers and that this
| | 01:35 | will not affect their overall
assessment within the course.
| | 01:39 | All the questions are listed out here
on the left-hand side is a radio button
| | 01:43 | that by default is set to not yet
answered and then a range of answers from
| | 01:48 | strongly disagree all the way to
strongly agree that the student can go in and
| | 01:53 | simply select their
particular answer for each question.
| | 01:57 | Up here in the up here in the upper
right corner we have a link for us as the
| | 02:00 | instructor that shows how many
surveys have been submitted by our students.
| | 02:04 | Currently no survey responses have been
submitted, we go ahead and click on the
| | 02:08 | link anyway and we can see what other
options that will have when we go into
| | 02:13 | look at all of our results.
| | 02:15 | By default, you're taken to the
Summary page, you can go over to Scale to
| | 02:19 | look at additional information
about how the student answered all their
| | 02:22 | questions, you can go into a list of
all the questions that were answered in
| | 02:27 | order by all students.
| | 02:29 | We can look to detailed information
for each participant in our course to see
| | 02:33 | how they responded to each survey
question, and then we have a download link, or
| | 02:38 | we can go in and we can download all of
the results into a variety of different
| | 02:42 | formats, so that we can do additional
analysis of them either in a stats package
| | 02:47 | such as Microsoft Excel,
SPSS or any other stat package.
| | 02:52 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course looks good in return backdoor
| | 02:54 | course by clicking on the BIOL432 link.
| | 02:56 | Now you should have a pretty good feel
for the different types of tools that are
| | 03:00 | available to you with in Moodle 2,
such as choice which allows you to ask a
| | 03:04 | single question in a multiple-choice
format our feedback survey which allow you
| | 03:10 | to create as many questions and types
of questions as you would like to create
| | 03:15 | your own custom survey or using the
survey tool to administer one of many
| | 03:20 | standardized survey tools that are
available to you inside of Moodle.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Building GlossariesCreating a main glossary| 00:00 | With every course that you teach, there
are going to be many terms and concepts
| | 00:05 | that you need to convey to your student.
| | 00:08 | It'll be very helpful if you had
contextual help for those terms so that any
| | 00:13 | time the student encountered those
terms throughout their course, they would
| | 00:16 | be able to get directly to a
definition or detailed explanation as to what
| | 00:21 | that term or concept is.
| | 00:23 | And in Moodle there's an activity
type called Glossary that is perfect for
| | 00:27 | this style of teaching.
| | 00:28 | To get started building your main
glossary, be sure that editing is turned on.
| | 00:32 | And then in the header block of your
course, click on the dropdown menu for Add
| | 00:36 | an activity and select Glossary.
| | 00:38 | For the name of this glossary, we
will simply type in Course Glossary.
| | 00:46 | For the Description, we'll type in Main
course glossary of terms and concepts.
| | 00:55 | Go ahead and scroll down in the page
and let's look at the various different
| | 01:01 | settings and options that we have
available to us within the glossary.
| | 01:04 | The first option asks us how many
entries that we would like to show per page.
| | 01:08 | As you go through your course and you
have more and more entries into your
| | 01:11 | glossary, it's oftentimes helpful to
limit the number of entries that you find
| | 01:15 | on each individual page so that your
page doesn't end up with this long list
| | 01:19 | of terms and concepts.
| | 01:21 | I like to leave mine set to
the default of 10 terms per page.
| | 01:25 | The next option of glossary type
allows you to select either Main or
| | 01:29 | Secondary glossary.
| | 01:30 | Now within each course, you
can only have one Main glossary.
| | 01:34 | You can have many Secondary glossaries,
but you can only have one main one.
| | 01:38 | In this case we are going to be
setting up our Main glossary for the course.
| | 01:42 | In a later movie, we will create a
Secondary glossary and show you how that works.
| | 01:46 | The next option Duplicate entries allowed.
| | 01:48 | We want to leave this set to No because
we only want each term in our glossary
| | 01:52 | to appear at one time.
| | 01:54 | Allow comments on entries, let's
go ahead and change this to Yes.
| | 01:57 | That way students can come in and add
additional information or feedback to
| | 02:01 | each glossary entry. Allow print view.
| | 02:04 | It would be very helpful many times to
have our students to be able to print out
| | 02:08 | a page that has the glossary
entry with its definition on it.
| | 02:12 | Automatically link glossary entries.
| | 02:14 | This is a great option to have set on.
| | 02:16 | And in a later movie, I will show
you how to make sure that the server is
| | 02:19 | enabled to have auto-linking turned on.
| | 02:22 | This will allow terms that show up in
your glossary to automatically show up as
| | 02:26 | contextual hyperlinks elsewhere in your course.
| | 02:29 | Approved by default.
| | 02:31 | Since initially it's going to be
primarily the instructor that's adding the
| | 02:34 | terms into the glossary, we don't need
to go through and make sure that every
| | 02:38 | single term automatically
goes through an approval process.
| | 02:41 | But if it's the case where you want to
have your students constantly adding all
| | 02:45 | of the new entries into your glossary
and adding the terms in, you may want to
| | 02:49 | set this to No so that any time a term
is added into the glossary, you get a
| | 02:53 | chance as the instructor to go in and
evaluate whether or not the term has been
| | 02:58 | properly defined before it's
released to the rest of the class.
| | 03:01 | The Simple, dictionary style is
perfect for the initial Display option.
| | 03:05 | There are many different options here
that you're able to select to show how you
| | 03:09 | want each glossary entry to
appear within the glossary.
| | 03:12 | I encourage you to go in and
explore some of these different options.
| | 03:15 | Show 'Special' link.
| | 03:16 | We are going to go ahead
and leave this set to Yes.
| | 03:19 | That way if students want to use
special characters in their search parameters
| | 03:22 | as they're searching for specific terms,
they're able to do so. Show alphabet.
| | 03:27 | When a user goes into a glossary, there will
be a list of all of the letters of the alphabet.
| | 03:31 | So a student can click on a particular
letter in the alphabet and jump directly
| | 03:35 | to that section of the glossary.
| | 03:37 | This is a very helpful thing to have turned on.
| | 03:39 | So we'll go ahead and leave
that set to Yes. Show ALL links.
| | 03:42 | When a student begins to browse through
your glossary, we've limited each page
| | 03:46 | of the glossary to only show 10 terms.
| | 03:48 | If we leave the Show ALL link, then a
student would be able to click the ALL
| | 03:52 | link and see every single term
that's listed inside the glossary.
| | 03:56 | It's also a great way to get back to
the main listing of the glossary if
| | 03:59 | the student has been browsing around within
a particular letter or area of the alphabet.
| | 04:04 | The last option, Edit always.
| | 04:06 | If you want to set up your glossary so
that once you create the glossary, the
| | 04:09 | students are no longer able to go in
and edit any of the content, you may want
| | 04:13 | to go ahead and leave this set to No.
| | 04:16 | But in our case, I'd like to be able
to have the students to be able to go in
| | 04:19 | and edit definitions and add
additional information as we go along.
| | 04:22 | So I am going to go ahead
and set this option to Yes.
| | 04:25 | Okay, let's go ahead and
scroll down on the page.
| | 04:27 | Now we are not going to be grading the glossary.
| | 04:29 | But if we were we could select the
dropdown menu and assign this glossary to a
| | 04:33 | particular area of our grade book.
| | 04:36 | The next section of Ratings would allow
students to rate different definitions
| | 04:39 | that appear within the glossary.
| | 04:41 | We are going to currently
leave this set to No ratings.
| | 04:44 | Let's go ahead and scroll down to the
bottom of the page and we want to make
| | 04:47 | sure that the visibility for this
glossary is set to Show and we are not going
| | 04:51 | to worry about adding an ID number.
| | 04:53 | Go ahead and click Save and return to course.
| | 04:54 | And we can see right here in the
top of the header block is the link to
| | 04:58 | our Course Glossary.
| | 04:59 | We can go ahead and go into that glossary.
| | 05:01 | Here is the alphabetical
listing that we enabled.
| | 05:04 | There is the link for ALL and there is a
button here to be able to add new entries.
| | 05:08 | There is also a few other tabs that
are set up to allow students to browse
| | 05:12 | around through the glossary by
a variety of different topics.
| | 05:16 | And of course, there is a search
field to search throughout the glossary.
| | 05:19 | In the upper right-hand corner, there is
a print button to allow the students to
| | 05:23 | print a printer friendly
version of the glossary.
| | 05:25 | In the next movie, we will begin
adding terms into our glossary.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding concepts to the glossary| 00:00 | Now that we have our main glossary set up,
let's go ahead and begin adding terms
| | 00:04 | and concepts into our glossary.
| | 00:06 | To do this simply click the Add a new
entry button, when the page loads, click
| | 00:10 | in the Concept field at the top
and type in our first term, which is
| | 00:14 | Zooxanthellae, which is Z-o-o-x-a-n-t-h-
e-l-l-a-e, for the Definition, we will
| | 00:23 | simple type in A Brown endosymbiotic
algae commonly found in Hermatypic Corals.
| | 00:37 | You'll notice that we do
have a full HTML editor here.
| | 00:40 | So we could add additional images, media,
we could provide formatting to our text.
| | 00:45 | We can do anything we want
inside of this HTML field.
| | 00:48 | Go ahead and scroll down on the page
and now let's look at the Keyword section.
| | 00:52 | If we have any specific keywords that
we wanted to add to this term or concept,
| | 00:56 | we could add them here.
| | 00:57 | If we had any specific attachments or
any documents that we need to make sure
| | 01:01 | that were attached to this
concept, we could add those here.
| | 01:04 | We can go ahead and scroll down
a little bit further, now in the
| | 01:06 | Auto-linking section.
| | 01:07 | We want to check the box to make sure
that this entry is set up for Auto-linking.
| | 01:12 | We don't want to make sure that this
term is case-sensitive, but we do want to
| | 01:16 | match the whole word or words only.
| | 01:19 | That way, any variations of the terms
Zooxanthellae will not be auto linked,
| | 01:23 | only to full term of Zooxanthellae.
| | 01:25 | Go ahead and click the Save changes
button, and now we can see that our first
| | 01:28 | term is listed here and its
definition is listed underneath of it.
| | 01:32 | If we scroll down a little bit further,
we can see that we can delete this item,
| | 01:36 | or we can edit it right from here.
| | 01:38 | You can also see that there are currently no
comments that have been added to this term yet.
| | 01:41 | Let's go ahead and add our second term.
| | 01:43 | To do this simply click the Add a
new entry button and then in the
| | 01:46 | Concept field, type in Hermatypic
Coral, for the Definition, let's type
| | 01:53 | in A Reef Building Coral.
| | 01:59 | Go ahead and scroll down, we are going
to leave the Keywords and Attachments
| | 02:02 | blank, we are going to check the box
for This entry should be auto-linked, we
| | 02:05 | are going to check the box for Match
whole words only, and we going to leave,
| | 02:10 | This entry is case-sensitive, turned off.
| | 02:12 | Go and hit Save changes and now as we look at
our Definition, we can see it presented here.
| | 02:17 | If we click the All button, we can see all of
the terms that we have inside of this glossary.
| | 02:22 | Let's go ahead and look and see if the Auto-
linking is currently functioning in our course.
| | 02:26 | Go ahead and scroll all the way back up
to the top of our page and click on the
| | 02:29 | link for BIOL432, go ahead and scroll
down the page into the Lecture 1 section
| | 02:35 | and click on the link, Coral
Zooxanthellae Symbiosis that we added earlier.
| | 02:39 | Here is the article that we have and we
will notice that there are currently no
| | 02:42 | links within this document.
| | 02:44 | In the next movie, we will show you
how to turn Auto-linking on in the
| | 02:47 | server and then see how a glossary
term can provide contextual help directly
| | 02:52 | to your students.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Enabling glossary auto-linking| 00:00 | Now that we have our Glossary set
up and we have the Zooxanthellae and
| | 00:03 | Hermatypic Coral terms in here, we are
inside of the Coral Zooxanthellae article
| | 00:08 | that we added to our course earlier.
| | 00:10 | So we move our mouse around the text, we
can see that all we have here inside of
| | 00:14 | this article is just plain text.
| | 00:16 | Auto-linking is currently not working.
| | 00:18 | So let's go ahead and turn it on.
| | 00:20 | In order to turn it on we have to
be logged in as the administrator.
| | 00:24 | So go up to the upper right-hand corner,
click the Logout button, and then click
| | 00:28 | the Login button and Log
in as the administrator.
| | 00:31 | The Username is admin and the Password is 12345.
| | 00:35 | If you're working on your own campus
Moodle server you may have to contact your
| | 00:38 | IT department to get them
to turn this on for you.
| | 00:41 | Go ahead and scroll down in the left-hand
side in the Settings section and click
| | 00:45 | on the Link for Site administration.
| | 00:47 | Then scroll down pretty far in the
list until you find the link for Plugins.
| | 00:52 | Select Plugins and then look for the
link for Filters, click on Filters and then
| | 00:58 | select the first item which is Manage filters.
| | 01:02 | The Manage filters page shows up and
then what you're going to do is scroll down
| | 01:05 | until you can find the grayed
out link for Glossary auto-linking.
| | 01:08 | We can see that this item is currently
Disabled, click the dropdown menu and
| | 01:14 | change the value to On.
| | 01:16 | When your page refreshes Glossary auto-linking
should now be turned on and it
| | 01:21 | should be implying to the content section.
| | 01:24 | We are not going to have it apply to headings.
| | 01:27 | we are going to have it apply to content.
| | 01:30 | Okay, we should be all set up now on the server.
| | 01:32 | So let's go ahead and click the Logout
link in the upper right-hand corner and
| | 01:36 | then click Login and log
back in to your account.
| | 01:39 | If you are following along with me, my
login is chris and my Password is 12345.
| | 01:43 | Let's go ahead and go back into our
course and then if we scroll down into the
| | 01:50 | top of Week 1 we can find
that Coral Zooxanthellae article.
| | 01:54 | Go ahead and click on that article and
now as we move our mouse around on the
| | 01:58 | page, anytime that we find a term such
as Zooxanthellae we can click on it and
| | 02:03 | see that there's a pop-up window that
comes up that has the term listed in it.
| | 02:08 | Now one of our other terms is
Hermatypic Coral, but as I move my mouse over the
| | 02:13 | term here it's not linking, hit OK.
| | 02:16 | I see the term right here in the front
as the first word in this article and I
| | 02:20 | can see that that is also not linked.
| | 02:23 | Well, what's going on here is this is
listed as Hermatypic corals and our term
| | 02:28 | is defined as Hermatypic Coral.
| | 02:30 | Let's go ahead and fix that.
| | 02:31 | So go ahead and return back to your
main course by clicking on the BIOL432 link
| | 02:36 | up in your breadcrumbs, and then
make sure that Editing is turned on by
| | 02:39 | clicking the link in the upper right-hand
corner, and now let's take Glossaries
| | 02:43 | to a whole new level.
| | 02:44 | Let's go in and create a secondary
glossary and create a list of references that
| | 02:49 | become Auto-link throughout our course
and we will do that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a secondary glossary| 00:00 | Now, let's go ahead and unlock the
full potential of the glossary activity.
| | 00:04 | In this movie, we're going to go ahead
and we're going to create a secondary
| | 00:08 | glossary that's going to contain all of
the bibliographical references that we
| | 00:12 | want our students to be able
to look at throughout this term.
| | 00:15 | After we create the glossary, we're
also going to import an XML file that
| | 00:19 | contains all of these references.
| | 00:21 | To begin, make sure you're in the
header block and click the dropdown menu for
| | 00:25 | Add an activity and select Glossary.
| | 00:27 | For the Name of this activity,
simply type-in Bibliographical References.
| | 00:34 | In the Description, type-in
Bibliographic references used throughout this course.
| | 00:42 | Go ahead, and scroll down on the
page, and let's set up a few of the
| | 00:44 | settings for this glossary.
| | 00:46 | We do want 10 entries per page.
| | 00:48 | We want to make sure that the
Glossary type is set to Secondary glossary.
| | 00:51 | Then we want to change Allow comments
on entries to Yes, and we always want to
| | 00:56 | allow edits, so we'll set that one to Yes.
| | 00:58 | Everything else should be left at the default.
| | 01:00 | Go ahead and scroll all the way to the
bottom and then hit the Save and display button.
| | 01:05 | This will take us directly into the
glossary without having to go back to the
| | 01:08 | main page of the course.
| | 01:10 | Now, let's go ahead and import an XML
file that contains all of the references
| | 01:14 | that we need for the course.
| | 01:15 | Over in the left-hand column under
Settings, you have a section for Glossary
| | 01:19 | administration, and one of the
links here is Import entries.
| | 01:23 | Go ahead and click on Import entries,
and now click the Choose a file link.
| | 01:27 | This is going to open up an Upload a file
link, and allow us to browse for a file.
| | 01:32 | Now before we browse for this file,
let's go ahead and minimize our browser and
| | 01:36 | have a look at the XML file and
the text file that I have on screen.
| | 01:41 | XML stands for Extended Markup Language,
and there are many courses here in the
| | 01:46 | lynda.com Online Training Library that
can help you learn about creating your
| | 01:50 | own and editing an XML file.
| | 01:52 | Now, all that is beyond the scope of
this course, but I've gone ahead and
| | 01:55 | created this XML file for
us to be able to import in.
| | 01:59 | I want to take a quick look at the
file and see how it's constructed.
| | 02:02 | I can go ahead and twirl up some of
these items here and here we can see that
| | 02:06 | there's both an opening and a
closing tag to describe the content that's
| | 02:10 | going to be inside of it.
| | 02:11 | So here we've got the GLOSSARY tag,
underneath of that we have an INFO tag.
| | 02:16 | Inside of INFO we have ENTRIES and
ENTRIES is where all of the bibliographic
| | 02:21 | references are going to be contained.
| | 02:22 | Then inside of each entry, there is a
variety of different specific tags that
| | 02:27 | have to be here, including CONCEPT,
DEFINITION, FORMAT, USEDYNALINK,
| | 02:34 | CASESENSITIVE, FULLMATCH, TEACHERENTRY.
| | 02:38 | each of these values have
either a 1 for on or a 0 for off.
| | 02:43 | Then there are additional entry tags
that repeat, that contained each of the
| | 02:47 | bibliographical references
that we're going to import.
| | 02:50 | If you want to create your own file,
I've also included in the Chapter 09
| | 02:54 | exercise file a references.txt file
that contains the full text of all of the
| | 02:59 | references that I've used
inside of this XML file.
| | 03:02 | The other way to go ahead and create
all of these entries is to simply go
| | 03:05 | through and add the entries one
by one into the online glossary.
| | 03:10 | Okay, enough about the XML file.
| | 03:12 | Let's go ahead and go back to our
browser and inside the File Picker we'll click
| | 03:15 | the Browse button and select references.
xml from the Chapter 09 exercise files.
| | 03:20 | Go ahead and hit the Open button and
then click the Upload this file button.
| | 03:24 | We want to make sure that we're
importing into the current glossary, and we're
| | 03:28 | not going to import any categories.
| | 03:30 | Go ahead and hit the Submit button
and we can see that there were 6 total
| | 03:33 | entries in the XML file that were
found and Moodle imported all 6 entries.
| | 03:38 | Go ahead and hit the Continue button and
now we're taken back into our glossary.
| | 03:42 | If we scroll down, we can see that each
one of the references was imported in,
| | 03:47 | auto-linking is working because if I
hover my mouse over top of the term
| | 03:50 | Zooxanthellae inside of Dustan 1979,
we can see that we're cross-linked over
| | 03:55 | into our main gallery.
| | 03:56 | Now let's go ahead and look
at how powerful this tool is.
| | 03:59 | Go ahead and scroll back up to the top
of your page and let's return back to our
| | 04:02 | course and then scroll down on the page
to the Chapter 01 Lecture Materials and
| | 04:07 | let's go back into that Coral
Zooxanthellae Symbiosis link.
| | 04:11 | Now as we move our mouse around on
the page, anytime we go over top of a
| | 04:14 | reference, such as Glynn 1993 or
Stimson and Kinzie 1991, we can click on the
| | 04:20 | link and we can see the full reference.
| | 04:23 | Now, how exactly did this work?
| | 04:25 | Well, if we look inside of here, we
can see that we've cited inside of this
| | 04:28 | paper in a standard citation format.
| | 04:31 | so Glynn 1993, Stimson and
Kinzie 1991, Dustan 1979 and so forth.
| | 04:39 | Let's go ahead and go back to our course one
more time and go back into the bibliography.
| | 04:43 | Go ahead, and scroll down a little bit,
and let's look at this Glynn 1993 article.
| | 04:48 | Go ahead and hit the Edit button next to it.
| | 04:50 | We've listed the concept to be
exactly how he would cite this article as a
| | 04:55 | reference embedded in a scientific paper
with the definition being the full citation.
| | 05:01 | We've also down here in the Auto-linking,
made sure that Auto-linking was turned
| | 05:05 | on, and then we've
unchecked the Match whole words.
| | 05:08 | That way, any portion of this concept
that shows up inside of one of the other
| | 05:13 | blocks of text, inside of our Moodle course,
will automatically link to the full reference.
| | 05:18 | Now, notice here, you
can also add an attachment.
| | 05:20 | So if you have a full reprint of
this article that you want to be able to
| | 05:24 | provide out to your students, then you
can go ahead and simply click the Add
| | 05:28 | button here for Attachments, link that
PDF file directly here to this article,
| | 05:33 | and then embed it directly in any text
that you have throughout your course.
| | 05:37 | A student could be able to click on the
link to the reference and not only get
| | 05:40 | the full citation of that article, but
they can actually read the full paper as well.
| | 05:44 | Go ahead and return back to your course.
| | 05:46 | I hope has given you a good overview as
to how powerful the glossary activities
| | 05:51 | are within your Moodle course.
| | 05:53 | Just make sure that you
have Auto-linking turned on.
| | 05:56 | You may need to contact your IT
department to make sure that it's enabled on
| | 05:59 | your server if you don't have access
to the administration screens of Moodle.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Creating ForumsCreating a forum| 00:00 | Of all the different activity types
that Moodle has to offer, the Discussion
| | 00:04 | Forum is the one that tends to get my
students to really get engaged with the
| | 00:08 | Course Material the most.
| | 00:10 | In this chapter we are going to step
through setting up a Discussion Forum
| | 00:14 | that will help draw our students into our
course and really get them engaged in the materials.
| | 00:19 | So make sure that editing is turned on and
then scroll down to the bottom of Week 1.
| | 00:24 | Click the dropdown menu for at Add an
activity and select Forum from that menu.
| | 00:29 | For the Forum name, we'll click in there
and simply type in Week 1 Discussion Forum.
| | 00:36 | For the Forum introduction, we will
go over to our course syllabi which is
| | 00:39 | in the Chapter 10 exercise files and
scroll down until you find the Forum
| | 00:43 | Discussion section.
| | 00:45 | Go ahead and select the text that
describes what this assignment is and then
| | 00:49 | press Command+C or Ctrl+C on your
keyboard to copy that description.
| | 00:53 | Go ahead and click back into your
browser and in the Forum introduction just
| | 00:57 | press Command+V or Ctrl+V
to paste that description in.
| | 01:00 | Every week of the term, we are going to
create a discussion forum and each forum
| | 01:04 | is going to start off with
having four discussion topics.
| | 01:07 | We are going to require our students to
login and answer at least two of those topics.
| | 01:13 | Then over the course of the week we are
going to require our students to go in
| | 01:17 | and respond to several of their peers.
| | 01:21 | Their participation grade will be
affected by their weekly participation in
| | 01:25 | these discussion forums.
| | 01:27 | Go ahead and scroll down in the page
and let's look at some of the settings we
| | 01:30 | can make for this discussion forum.
| | 01:33 | The first is Subscription mode, and if
we click the dropdown menu, here we can
| | 01:37 | choose how we want students
to be subscribed to the forum.
| | 01:40 | Whether it's Optional for them to be
subscribed or whether we Forced them to be
| | 01:43 | subscribed, or we don't
allow subscriptions at all.
| | 01:47 | By subscribing to the forum, anytime a
post is made, each student would receive
| | 01:51 | an email from our Moodle server.
| | 01:53 | letting them know that a post has been made
and it will give them the full text of the post.
| | 01:57 | I like to leave this option set to
Optional subscription to give the choice to
| | 02:01 | the student as to how they would
like to receive that information.
| | 02:04 | The next option here is tracking for the forum.
| | 02:08 | I like to leave tracking turned on at all times.
| | 02:10 | This way any time myself or any
of my students login and they start
| | 02:15 | reading through the forum.
| | 02:16 | Moodle will keep track automatically
of what items in the forum that they've
| | 02:20 | read and which items that they haven't.
| | 02:22 | It'll help them keep organized
as they work through the material.
| | 02:25 | The Maximum attachment size, 128
MB is probably a bit generous for
| | 02:29 | this discussion forum.
| | 02:30 | I like to restrict them
down to a smaller amount.
| | 02:33 | So, say, 10 MB and attaching nine
documents is a bit much as well.
| | 02:38 | So we will go ahead and set that
done something more reasonable like 5.
| | 02:41 | These are purely Optional settings.
| | 02:42 | So you can set whatever
settings work best for you and your
| | 02:45 | particular discussion forums.
| | 02:47 | The next section is
Posting threshold for blocking.
| | 02:50 | Now this is an interesting setting.
| | 02:52 | The Time period for blocking, means
that if we set a particular time period,
| | 02:57 | then once a student makes a posting, they
may not be able to repost within so much time.
| | 03:02 | That will force other students to
get in and start interacting with the
| | 03:05 | material, but it can tend
to slow a discussion down.
| | 03:09 | So I like to leave this set to Don't block.
| | 03:11 | Next, if we scroll down a little further, we
can go in and we can set the Grade category.
| | 03:16 | Now when we look at our course syllabi,
we know that the participation in these
| | 03:20 | discussion forums is going to account
toward our assignment grade category.
| | 03:24 | So we will go ahead and select
assignments, and then the points that we assign
| | 03:27 | will go directly into this grade category.
| | 03:29 | If we scroll down a little bit
further, we have a rating system.
| | 03:33 | Now the ratings you're not able to
turn on until you've already saved this
| | 03:37 | assignment and gone back into it,
and then you can go and reset this.
| | 03:40 | But for the type of discussion that
we are using, we are not going to use
| | 03:44 | any ratings on these.
| | 03:46 | Finally, for the Common module settings,
we are not going to set this up for
| | 03:49 | Group mode, although if you wanted to,
you could create a different discussion
| | 03:53 | forum for each different group that you
may have within your course, but in this
| | 03:57 | case we want one discussion forum to
be available to all of our students.
| | 04:01 | Now for Visibility, I do want to set
this to Hide, and here's why, because I am
| | 04:05 | going to be going into the discussion
and setting up a series of questions into
| | 04:10 | that discussion forum.
| | 04:11 | I don't want the students to be able to see
those questions until I'm ready to release them.
| | 04:16 | So I am going to start off in this
chapter by having this setting set to Hide.
| | 04:20 | Go ahead and click the Save and display
option and we are taken directly into the forum.
| | 04:26 | Here we can see the text of the forum and
where we can add a new discussion topic.
| | 04:31 | In the next movie we will go ahead and
seed our discussion with four questions
| | 04:35 | to prompt the students to begin
the online discussion for this week.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Seeding a forum with questions| 00:00 | Now that our discussion forum is all
set up, we want to seed the discussion by
| | 00:04 | adding some discussion topics
to get the conversation rolling.
| | 00:08 | To begin, simply make sure that you're
inside of your discussion forum, and then
| | 00:13 | click the Add a new discussion topic.
| | 00:15 | Filling out this form couldn't be easier.
| | 00:17 | All we need to do is give the
message a subject, type in a message.
| | 00:22 | We can then set how we want the
subscription for this message to be set,
| | 00:27 | whether or not we want to add an
attachment, and then whether or not we want to
| | 00:30 | have this message go out via email immediately
or be sent out on the server's normal schedule.
| | 00:36 | Since we have our discussion forum
turned off by default, we're going to leave
| | 00:40 | the Mail now unchecked, and we want to
make sure that Subscription is set to I
| | 00:44 | don't want email copies of posts to this forum.
| | 00:47 | Now, let's work on setting up
the subject and the messages.
| | 00:51 | Because we're going to set up four
different questions, we want the fourth
| | 00:55 | question to show up at the bottom, and then
the other questions to show up above that.
| | 01:00 | So we're going to start off our
first posting with Question 4.
| | 01:03 | So type-in Question 4 for the subject,
and then in the Message, I've gone ahead
| | 01:08 | and included a file called forum
questions.txt in the Chapter 10 exercise files.
| | 01:13 | Go ahead and select the fourth
question, press Command+C or Ctrl+C on your
| | 01:17 | keyboard to copy it to the clipboard,
then go back to your browser and in the
| | 01:21 | Message field press Command+V or
Ctrl+V to paste that message in.
| | 01:26 | Hit the button Post to forum, Moodle
confirms that the message was posted, and
| | 01:31 | here's Question 4 noting that
we've started the discussion topic.
| | 01:34 | Let's go ahead, and add
the additional questions now.
| | 01:37 | So click the Add a new discussion topic button.
| | 01:40 | This time for the Subject
we're going to type-in Question 3.
| | 01:44 | For the Message, go ahead and minimize
your browser, go back over to the forum
| | 01:48 | questions.txt file from Chapter 10
Exercises, press Command+C or Ctrl+C when you
| | 01:53 | select Question 3, go back into your
browser, Command+V or Ctrl+V to paste that
| | 01:58 | question, scroll down, notice that
Moodle has automatically set the Subscription
| | 02:04 | model to the one that we
chose in the previous posting.
| | 02:07 | Hit Post to forum and now we can see
that Question 3 up here is above Question 4.
| | 02:14 | Let's go ahead and add Question 2,
and then following that, Question 1.
| | 02:18 | Hit Add a new discussion topic.
| | 02:21 | for the Subject, Question 2, for the
Message, we'll jump back over to our forum
| | 02:26 | questions.txt file, select it, press
Command+C or Ctrl+C to copy, back into our
| | 02:31 | browser, Command+V or Ctrl+V to paste,
scroll on down, verify our settings are
| | 02:37 | correct, Post to forum, one more to go.
| | 02:41 | Add a new discussion topic, for the
Subject, Question 1, for the Message, we'll
| | 02:47 | jump back over to our forum questions.
| | 02:49 | Command+C or Ctrl+C when we copy Question 1.
| | 02:52 | Then go back into our browser, Command+V
or Ctrl+V to paste in that question,
| | 02:57 | scroll down to the bottom,
and press Post to forum.
| | 03:01 | Now, we have our four questions added
into our discussion forum, in the next
| | 03:05 | movie, we'll go in and begin
working with these questions.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Participating in a forum| 00:00 | Now that we have our Discussion Forum
completely set up, let's say it's the
| | 00:04 | first week of our term.
| | 00:05 | We want to make this Discussion
Forum available to our students.
| | 00:08 | So, on the left-hand column we can
go ahead and click the Edit Settings
| | 00:11 | option for this forum.
| | 00:13 | We can scroll down to the bottom of
the page and simply change the Visible
| | 00:17 | setting from Hide to Show, then click
the Save and return to course button.
| | 00:21 | We are taken back to Week 1, let me go
ahead and scroll down on the page, we can
| | 00:26 | see that the Discussion Forum is now
available to our student, hit the Move
| | 00:30 | right button to move it into the proper place.
| | 00:32 | Now let's go ahead and logout of
Moodle, by going back up to the top of our
| | 00:36 | screen and clicking the Logout button,
and then let's log back in as a student.
| | 00:41 | Click the Login link, type in the
Username Al and the Password of 12345.
| | 00:49 | Hit the Login link, and now
we are back in as the student.
| | 00:53 | Go ahead and go back into course,
Coral Reef Ecology and scroll down to
| | 00:57 | the bottom of Week 1.
| | 00:58 | here we can see the Week 1 Discussion Forum.
| | 01:00 | Go ahead and click on that forum and
this is what students would see, they would
| | 01:05 | see the instructions they we have
provided to them and they would see the
| | 01:08 | initial four questions that
they have been prompted with.
| | 01:11 | We can go into the first question by
clicking on the link for question 1, and
| | 01:15 | now we can read what that question says.
| | 01:17 | Well, let's go ahead and make a response.
| | 01:19 | So hit the button on the right that
says Reply and then for response, we will
| | 01:24 | simply type in Bermuda is an example of
an island with coral reefs and is found
| | 01:32 | outside of the 30N and 30S Range.
| | 01:38 | Go ahead and scroll down on the forum
and here the students get the same set
| | 01:43 | of options that we do.
| | 01:45 | As a student they can choose to
receive the emails for the postings or not.
| | 01:48 | I will go ahead and leave it to set to
Send email copies of this forum to me, so
| | 01:52 | then as the student, I will be able
to get the responses that somebody may
| | 01:55 | respond to this particular forum, so
I would know when to come in and start
| | 01:58 | making additional responses.
| | 02:00 | Hit the button for Post to forum
and we are given a confirmation that
| | 02:03 | the posting went on.
| | 02:05 | Now when the page reloads, we can see
the initial posting, and then we can see
| | 02:08 | our response listed underneath of it.
| | 02:11 | We can choose how we want the responses to look.
| | 02:13 | initially, they're displayed in a Nested form.
| | 02:16 | We can also choose to display them as a
Threaded form, where the initial posting
| | 02:21 | is made and then any additional
responses are listed underneath, we could choose
| | 02:25 | to also look at them as a flat file
with the newest first, so that the newest
| | 02:31 | postings would be the first things that
we see as additional postings are made,,
| | 02:35 | or we can choose to see the oldest first.
| | 02:38 | I like to look at these as a nested form,
so that any responses to this question
| | 02:44 | would show up tabbed underneath,
whereas, additional responses to the initial
| | 02:49 | posting would show up at the same level.
| | 02:51 | It just helps to keep things organized.
| | 02:53 | Okay, now we know what the student sees.
| | 02:56 | Let's go ahead and logout of the
students view and log back in as our view.
| | 03:00 | So back up to the top and click on
the link for logout, then login again,
| | 03:06 | logging in as yourself, I am going to
login as Chris, my Password is 12345.
| | 03:10 | I will back into My course, by clicking
on the Coral Reef Ecology link, and now
| | 03:18 | I can scroll back down to the bottom
of Week 1 and here I am given feedback
| | 03:23 | directly inside of my course to where I
see that there's one unread post that I
| | 03:28 | haven't read, that's related
to this forum. This is great!
| | 03:32 | A student made a posting in here
and without even going into the forum.
| | 03:35 | I know that I already have something to read.
| | 03:37 | I can go ahead and click on the
Discussion Forum, and I can see that I have got
| | 03:42 | one item that's been
unread in this particular forum.
| | 03:45 | I can go straight to that message by
clicking on the number 1 and I can keep
| | 03:49 | track of what's going on in the
Discussions as they're happening by my students.
| | 03:54 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course by clicking on BIOL432 in the breadcrumbs.
| | 04:00 | Discussion Forums are a fantastic way to
keep your students involved and engaged
| | 04:04 | in your course material.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Creating a WikiCreating a wiki| 00:00 | A great tool to encourage our
students to collaborate together is a Wiki.
| | 00:05 | A Wiki is quite simply an easy to
build and edit collaborative workspace
| | 00:09 | within our Moodle course.
| | 00:11 | The term Wiki comes to us from the
Hawaiian term Wiki Wiki, which means very quickly.
| | 00:17 | To begin building our Class Wiki make
sure that editing is turned on and then in
| | 00:21 | the header block of your course, click
on the dropdown menu for Add an activity
| | 00:25 | and select Wiki from the menu.
| | 00:27 | For the Wiki name, simply click
into the blank and type in Research
| | 00:31 | Project Class Wiki.
| | 00:33 | For the Wiki description, type in, A
class wiki for us to collaborate with.
| | 00:39 | Scroll down on the page and let's
take a look at the Wiki settings.
| | 00:43 | For the First page name I'd like to go
ahead and set this to be simply Home.
| | 00:47 | That way when I go to create links
from subsequent pages later on back to the
| | 00:51 | homepage, it's very easy to
remember what page that I want to go to.
| | 00:56 | The next option of Wiki mode allows
us to set whether or not this Wiki is a
| | 01:00 | Collaborative Wiki, meaning that
everyone in the class will be able to
| | 01:04 | participate in building content within
it, or an Individual Wiki, which will be
| | 01:08 | restricted to a particular user.
| | 01:10 | In our case, we want to create a
Collaborative Wiki so that all members of our
| | 01:13 | course can collaborate together.
| | 01:16 | The next option of Default format
gives us three choices, the first is HTML.
| | 01:21 | This uses the standard HTML Markup
Language and Editor that we've seen thus far
| | 01:26 | throughout this title.
| | 01:27 | The two other options, Creole and
NWiki use a more standardized Wiki Markup
| | 01:33 | Language Format that is very easy to learn.
| | 01:36 | NWiki is the format that is most closely
related to the media wiki engine that's
| | 01:41 | used for sites such as, Wikipedia.
| | 01:44 | Since this is the fairly common tool,
we're going to go ahead and choose NWiki
| | 01:47 | for this training series.
| | 01:49 | The next option of Force format, if we
leave this deselected and anytime a new
| | 01:54 | page is created within our Wiki the
person that first begins editing that page
| | 01:58 | will be able to choose which of the
three formats that they want to use for
| | 02:02 | formatting that page.
| | 02:04 | Since this is a Collaborative Wiki, I
like to keep a level of consistency and
| | 02:08 | force all users to use one
single format when editing the page.
| | 02:12 | This way we're all essentially on the same page.
| | 02:14 | So make sure you check the box for Force format.
| | 02:18 | The bottom section is similar to what
we've seen throughput other videos in
| | 02:21 | this training series.
| | 02:23 | Group mode, leave this option set to No groups.
| | 02:25 | We're going to make sure that our
students are able to access the Wiki by
| | 02:28 | leaving Visibility set to Show and
we're going to leave the ID number blank.
| | 02:32 | Go ahead and click Save and
return to course to create the Wiki.
| | 02:36 | When our page reloads, we can see the
link for our Wiki right here inside of the
| | 02:40 | header block of our course.
| | 02:41 | I like to put the Wiki link up here in
the header block, because it's a common
| | 02:45 | tool that my students are going to be
going into pretty much every single day
| | 02:48 | throughout the term, as they
continue to contribute content.
| | 02:52 | That way the information is not
bound to a particular week, but yet it's
| | 02:56 | inferred that this
content is for the entire class.
| | 02:59 | Let's go into our Wiki by clicking on the
link and now we can see what our wiki looks like.
| | 03:04 | By default, we're taken into the Edit
tab, which has a text field for us to be
| | 03:08 | able to add our content directly into.
| | 03:10 | There is also a View tab that will
allow us to see what our page looks like, a
| | 03:16 | Comments tab for our users to be able
to add comments to a particular page.
| | 03:20 | A History tab so that we can go back
in time and pull a previous versions or
| | 03:24 | previous edits of a particular page.
| | 03:27 | A Map, which would show us all of the
individual pages that had been created
| | 03:31 | as part of our Class Wiki, and a
Files section which would show all of the
| | 03:35 | files that have been uploaded and attached
to our Wiki that can be linked into our Wiki.
| | 03:39 | We'll use this when we begin adding images.
| | 03:42 | One more thing to note, if we go ahead
and scroll down here to the bottom of our
| | 03:45 | page, there are a couple
of links down at the bottom.
| | 03:48 | Anytime we add text into the main
part of our page, we can preview those
| | 03:52 | changes by clicking on the Preview
button and see what the changes would look
| | 03:56 | like when they're rendered.
| | 03:57 | We can Save content once
we're happy with those results.
| | 04:01 | And the tag section here allows us to
add keywords to each individual page.
| | 04:06 | Okay, go ahead and scroll back up in the
page, and in the next movie we'll begin
| | 04:09 | adding text and formatting it with
the standard Wiki Markup Language.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Wiki editing basics| 00:00 | Now that we've created our Wiki and we
are inside of the Home page's edit tab,
| | 00:04 | let's go ahead and begin adding some text and
formatting that text inside of our Wiki editor.
| | 00:10 | Now you could just begin typing text
directly here inside of this box, but I've
| | 00:14 | gone ahead and I've added a text
file under the Chapter 11 exercise files
| | 00:18 | called Wiki Text Page.txt.
| | 00:21 | Go ahead and select the contents of
that document, press Command+C or Ctrl+C on
| | 00:24 | your keyboard to copy it to your clipboard.
| | 00:26 | Then go back into your browser, and
press Command+V or Ctrl+V to paste that text
| | 00:31 | into the text field.
| | 00:33 | Now before we go much further, I should
note that there are a couple of bugs in
| | 00:36 | the current Wiki that's included in
Moodle as of the recording of this movie.
| | 00:40 | Now some of these bugs may be cleaned
up by the time you're watching this and
| | 00:44 | you're downloading a later version of Moodle.
| | 00:46 | But as of right now, you
will notice a couple of things.
| | 00:49 | First of all, it does not stretch all
the way over to the right-hand side.
| | 00:52 | This is because of the screen
resolution that I have my browser set to, and I
| | 00:57 | don't have enough space in
order to get that text to show up.
| | 01:00 | Furthermore, if I scroll down a little
bit, you will notice that I'm not getting
| | 01:03 | a scrollbar to be able to
scroll over to the right.
| | 01:05 | Well, this is easily remedied.
| | 01:08 | Simply come over to the left-hand side
where the Settings block is and click the
| | 01:12 | button to be able to move
this item over to the Dock.
| | 01:15 | When we click that, our Settings tab
jumps over here into a pop-out menu that's
| | 01:21 | one of the features of Moodle 2.0.
| | 01:23 | And many times by simply doing that,
we get enough space to get our textbox
| | 01:27 | to display properly.
| | 01:29 | The next bug that we have to deal with
is if we simply scroll down to the bottom
| | 01:33 | of our page and we click the Preview
button so we can see what content that
| | 01:37 | we've already added into our page,
we see that clearly displayed here.
| | 01:41 | When we scroll down a little bit,
we should be able to begin applying
| | 01:44 | formatting by simply selecting a
line of text and hitting the icon on the
| | 01:49 | toolbar to apply formatting.
| | 01:51 | However, if you do this inside of the
preview, at this time, this option does not work.
| | 01:56 | So in order to get the formatting to be
applied, you need to scroll down to the
| | 01:59 | bottom, click the Save button to save
the changes, then go back into the Edit
| | 02:05 | tab, and now we can continue editing our text.
| | 02:09 | So let's go ahead and apply a top-level
heading to this top line of text Coral
| | 02:13 | Reef Ecology Class Wiki Homepage.
| | 02:15 | Select the line of text and then
click the icon with the largest A in it.
| | 02:20 | This applies the standard Wiki markup
language which is an equal sign and then a
| | 02:24 | space and then the text that we want to
have that formatting applied to and then
| | 02:28 | a apse and then another equal sign.
| | 02:31 | Further down on our page where we
have Additional Pages, we want that to be
| | 02:34 | the second-level down heading because it's
essentially a subheading of the first item.
| | 02:39 | So we could select the text and use
the icon for the next smaller A,, or we
| | 02:44 | could simply come directly in front of
Additional Pages and type in the code
| | 02:48 | ourselves, which is ==, space, then
go to the end of that line of text, put
| | 02:53 | another space, and then ==.
| | 02:56 | Let's go ahead and see what that looks like.
| | 02:58 | Scroll down on the page and instead of
hitting Preview, let's just go ahead and
| | 03:01 | save the changes by hitting the Save button.
| | 03:04 | And now we can see that the top-
level heading has been applied.
| | 03:06 | And if we scroll down a little bit
further, we can see that the second-level
| | 03:09 | heading has also been applied.
| | 03:11 | We can either go back to the Edit tab,
or over here on the right-hand side,
| | 03:16 | we can simply hit the Edit link to go
directly back into the Editor and edit this content.
| | 03:21 | Now that we've seen how to apply
some headings, let's apply some other
| | 03:24 | formatting to our text.
| | 03:26 | We can see in the second paragraph
that we want our students to not forget to
| | 03:29 | include a hypothesis, their
experimental design, a sample data table, and links
| | 03:35 | to a current research
project on their group page.
| | 03:37 | Well, let's go ahead and highlight
each of these items so that the students
| | 03:40 | don't forget to do them.
| | 03:42 | So we will go ahead and select
hypothesis and experimental design as one group,
| | 03:45 | and then we will hit the Bold tag.
| | 03:48 | We can see that the code for applying
Bold are two individual apostrophes both
| | 03:54 | before and after the text.
| | 03:57 | This is not quotation marks,
these are individual apostrophes.
| | 04:01 | So let's go ahead and type that in
to highlight our sample data table.
| | 04:05 | So we will go ahead right in front of
sample data table and we'll type in '',
| | 04:10 | and then at the end of the data
table, we'll type in again ''.
| | 04:14 | We'll do the same thing around links to
current research, so we will type in ''.
| | 04:22 | And then at the end of
research, we'll type in two more ''.
| | 04:25 | Let's go ahead and save the
changes and see how that looks.
| | 04:30 | So scroll back down to the bottom,
click the Save button, and here we can see
| | 04:34 | that our text has been bolded
directly in line within our Wiki.
| | 04:38 | Well, now that we know how to bold text,
let's go ahead and italicize some text.
| | 04:42 | Go ahead and hit the Edit button again.
| | 04:44 | And this time where we have Be sure to
include all equipment, let's go ahead and
| | 04:49 | make all italicized.
| | 04:51 | So we'll go ahead and select all
and then click the Italicize button.
| | 04:56 | Now we can see that the code for
Italicize is three individual apostrophes
| | 05:00 | before and three apostrophes afterwards.
| | 05:03 | If we go back down to the bottom and
we click the Save button, now we can see
| | 05:08 | that all has been italicized.
| | 05:10 | The Wiki markup language is very easy to learn.
| | 05:13 | There are some simple codes to be able to use.
| | 05:16 | And this markup language is consistent across
most Wikis that you will find out on the Web.
| | 05:20 | Go ahead and go back into the Edit tab,
and in the next movie, we'll show you
| | 05:24 | how to create and link additional pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating new pages| 00:00 | Now that we've been able to begin
editing text on our homepage of our Wiki,
| | 00:04 | it's time to begin adding additional
pages for students to be able to fill-in
| | 00:08 | the things were asking them to and the first
of these additional pages is the Packing List.
| | 00:13 | So make sure that you're inside of
your Edit field of your Wiki and at the
| | 00:17 | bottom of the page type in two left-
hand square brackets and then type in
| | 00:22 | Packing List and then two
right-hand square brackets.
| | 00:25 | Now what this is going to do is by
putting this text inside of these double
| | 00:30 | square brackets, it's going to tell
the Wiki I want to create a link to this
| | 00:34 | Additional Page called Packing List,
but since this Packing List page does not
| | 00:39 | currently exist, when we save this Wiki
page, a link to this new page is going
| | 00:44 | to be created for us to
begin editing, so let's do it.
| | 00:47 | Go ahead and scroll down to the bottom
of the page and click the Save button.
| | 00:50 | Now we can see all of our text listed
here, but if we scroll down, we can see
| | 00:54 | highlighted in red and
italicized a link for Packing List.
| | 00:58 | Go ahead and click on that link and we can see
a new Packing List page that has been created.
| | 01:03 | Let's go ahead and type in Class Packing
List and let's make it a level one heading.
| | 01:08 | So we'll put a space equals at the end
and at the beginning equal space and then
| | 01:15 | in the next line just simply hit Return,
and let's go ahead and save our page.
| | 01:20 | Scroll down to the bottom, hit Save,
and we can see Class Packing List has
| | 01:24 | been created, let's go ahead and edit this
page and then create a link back to the Home page.
| | 01:28 | So on the next line down here, type in
two left-hand brackets and then type in
| | 01:33 | Home, and then two right-hand brackets.
| | 01:36 | Home was the name of the first page
that we created for our Wiki, so now we
| | 01:40 | should have a link that
takes us back to the homepage.
| | 01:42 | So go ahead and scroll down at the
bottom, hit the Save button and there we can
| | 01:46 | see the word Home listed.
| | 01:48 | Now when we move our mouse over top of
it, we can see we get the hand icon and
| | 01:52 | the link become underlined.
| | 01:53 | If we click on that link, we're
taken back to our homepage. Excellent!
| | 01:58 | Let's go ahead and create Additional Pages
now for our coral group and for our fish group.
| | 02:02 | To do this go and hit the edit button,
then scroll down go to the end of Packing
| | 02:07 | List type and Return and then add two
left-hand brackets type in Coral Group,
| | 02:14 | two right-hand brackets hit Return and
two more left-hand brackets Fish Group
| | 02:19 | and then two right-hand brackets.
| | 02:21 | These will create the Additional Pages
for student research groups to be able to
| | 02:25 | go in and fill in their group information.
| | 02:28 | So next, go ahead and scroll down at
the bottom of the page, hit the Save
| | 02:31 | button, and when we scroll down again, we can
see that each of our links have been created.
| | 02:36 | Now you know how to create
Additional Pages within your Wiki.
| | 02:39 | All you need to do is with two left-hand
and two right-hand brackets around your
| | 02:43 | text, and a new page will be created for you.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating lists| 00:00 | Now that we've added some additional
pages to our Wiki, its time to go into our
| | 00:04 | Packing List and begin creating a list
of packing materials that our students
| | 00:08 | are needing to bring with them.
| | 00:10 | To begin, go ahead and click on the
Edit tab, and then inside the text Editing
| | 00:14 | field below Packing List, hit two line
Returns, to create a subheading, go ahead
| | 00:19 | and hit equals, equals space
Coral Group space equals, equals.
| | 00:25 | Hit a line Return and now to create a
bulleted list, we can begin by simply
| | 00:31 | clicking on the button in our
toolbar for a bulleted list.
| | 00:34 | We can now see that the markup for a
bulleted list is simply an asterisk in
| | 00:39 | front of a line of text.
| | 00:40 | So let's go ahead and
add some items to our list.
| | 00:43 | The first item that the Coral Group is
going to need to bring with them is some
| | 00:46 | Duct Tape, we can then hit Return on
our keyboard, type in another asterisks,
| | 00:50 | instead of going back up to the tool
bar, and then type in Cable Ties, hit
| | 00:54 | Return again, another asterisks,
Underwater Camera, hit Return.
| | 00:59 | And now when you bring an underwater
camera with you, you're also going to need
| | 01:03 | some additional items to go with that camera.
| | 01:05 | So to add in additional bullets that
are tabbed in underneath of the first
| | 01:10 | bullet, all we have to do is type in asterisks,
asterisks and then list out each of the items.
| | 01:16 | So the first item we will need are
some Batteries, hit Return, again two
| | 01:20 | asterisks, we will also need a Laptop
to download our pictures to, hit Return,
| | 01:25 | two asterisks and Assorted Cables, great!
| | 01:29 | Let's go ahead and scroll all the way
to the bottom and see how this looks.
| | 01:32 | So we will scroll down, we will
click the Save button and now we have our
| | 01:36 | top-level heading, our subheading, we
even have a table of contents that's being
| | 01:41 | built for us automatically here at the top.
| | 01:43 | So we scroll down even further, we
can see that each of the items in our
| | 01:46 | bulleted list has a nice bullet out
to the side, and then items underneath
| | 01:50 | of our digital camera where we have
the two asterisks are tabbed in with our
| | 01:54 | additional bullets. Okay great!
| | 01:55 | go ahead and hit the Edit button
and now let's add the other group.
| | 01:59 | So at the end of Assorted Cables hit
Return a couple times, we will make another
| | 02:03 | level 2 heading, which is equals equals
space Fish Group space equal, equal hit
| | 02:09 | Return, and now we are going to create
an ordered list for this group, and an
| | 02:14 | ordered list is the same thing as an
unordered list, only this time when we
| | 02:18 | click the button up here on our toolbar
that has the 1, 2, 3 and the dashes, we
| | 02:22 | will see that the markup for this
list has a pound sign indicating a number
| | 02:26 | that's going to be added
instead of the asterisks.
| | 02:29 | So let's go ahead and add the
first item into our list which is a
| | 02:32 | Spectrophotometer, we will Return on
our keyboard, type in another pound sign,
| | 02:36 | we will also need some Cable Ties, hit
Return, hit the pound sign again, and we
| | 02:41 | are going to need some Duct Tape, go
ahead and scroll to the bottom of the page,
| | 02:46 | hit the Save button and let's check our work.
| | 02:48 | When we scroll down, we can see now
that we have both the bulleted list and an
| | 02:54 | ordered list, excellent!
| | 02:56 | Now that we know how to apply this
formatting, let's return back to our Wiki
| | 03:00 | homepage by clicking the
home link that we created.
| | 03:03 | Scroll down and here we have our
additional pages and it lists out each item 1
| | 03:07 | after another, let's go ahead and
turn those items into a bulleted list.
| | 03:11 | So hit the Edit button, since our
pages are already laid out nice and cleanly
| | 03:16 | for us, all we have to do is right in
front of the left-hand brackets for each
| | 03:21 | of these items, we will simply add an
asterisk and now when we scroll down to
| | 03:26 | the bottom, we can hit the Save button
and now our additional pages has a nice
| | 03:31 | cleanly formatted list.
| | 03:34 | In the next movie we will go ahead and
begin adding some more content into our
| | 03:37 | Coral Group page and look at
adding some images to that page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding images| 00:00 | Our wiki is looking pretty good.
| | 00:02 | Now, let's go ahead, and learn how to
add an image into one of our wiki pages.
| | 00:06 | To do this, go ahead and click on the
link for Coral Group to have that page
| | 00:09 | fully created, and if you're not already
there, make sure you click on the Edit tab.
| | 00:14 | Inside the Editing field we're
going to go ahead and add some text.
| | 00:17 | Now, I've included a file called Coral Group
Experiment.txt in the Chapter 11 exercise files.
| | 00:23 | Go ahead, and select this text and copy
it to your clipboard using Command+C or
| | 00:27 | Ctrl+C. You'll notice that I've already
added some wiki markup to the note level
| | 00:31 | 1 and level 2 headings.
| | 00:33 | I've even added the code to be
able to Italicize Acropora palmata.
| | 00:37 | Once you have the code copied, go
ahead and go back into your browser, click
| | 00:41 | into the Text field and paste that
text by pressing Command+V or Ctrl+V. Go
| | 00:45 | ahead and scroll down at the bottom of
the page, and let's preview our work by
| | 00:49 | clicking the Save button.
| | 00:51 | Now, we can see that our Table of
Contents is laid out for this page, we have
| | 00:54 | our top-level heading of Coral Group,
a secondary heading for Hypothesis, and
| | 00:58 | Proposed Method, and we even have an
Italicized scientific name. Okay, great!
| | 01:03 | Go ahead and hit the Edit button and now
let's go over to the last tab which is Files.
| | 01:08 | This is where we'll be going in and
adding additional files that we can link
| | 01:12 | to within our wiki.
| | 01:13 | To do this, simply hit the Edit wiki
files button, and then click the Add button.
| | 01:18 | This should open up our standard File Picker.
| | 01:21 | Make sure you're on the Upload a file
tool and then click the Browse button.
| | 01:26 | Inside of the Chapter 11 exercise
files, I've got a file in there called
| | 01:30 | experimentalDesign.jpg.
| | 01:32 | Go ahead, and click one time on
that file and click the Open button.
| | 01:37 | Then hit the Upload this file button and
the file will be uploaded into our wiki.
| | 01:42 | Now, to make sure that we save this
change, you've got to hit the button
| | 01:45 | that says Save Changes.
| | 01:46 | If you go away from this page then your
changes will not be saved. excellent!
| | 01:50 | Now we have our image ready
to be added into our wiki page.
| | 01:54 | Let's go ahead and go back to the
Edit tab, and add that image in.
| | 01:59 | Now, this is part of our experimental design.
| | 02:01 | So simply at the bottom of the
proposed method, we're going to hit two line
| | 02:04 | returns and then there's a dropdown
menu here to be able to insert an image and
| | 02:09 | because Moodle has automatically
detected that, that image that we just added
| | 02:13 | into our file section was a JPEG, we
have a listing that shows that, that is an
| | 02:17 | item that is available for us to click on.
| | 02:20 | So select experimentalDesign.jpg from
the file and here we can see the specific
| | 02:26 | code that's used in order to add an image.
| | 02:29 | Basically, what you do is you put two
left-hand brackets indicating that we're
| | 02:32 | creating a link of some kind.
| | 02:34 | Then we type-in image and a colon,
and then we put the name of the file that
| | 02:40 | we're going to be, including, in
this case experimentalDesign.jpg.
| | 02:45 | You then have a pipe character which on
most keyboards is the key that's above
| | 02:50 | your Enter or Return key, and you
usually have to hold down the Shift key in
| | 02:54 | order to get the pipe character to come up.
| | 02:56 | It's just a vertical bar.
| | 02:57 | Then we have some alt text, and you can
go and you can change this text here if
| | 03:01 | you'd like, but I'm going to go ahead,
and leave mine set to alt, and then you
| | 03:04 | close off the tag with two right-hand brackets.
| | 03:06 | Now we don't get to see the image
right here in our editor, so we'll simply
| | 03:10 | scroll down to the bottom of the page,
and click the Save button and when we
| | 03:14 | scroll down, we can see the
image that we've included.
| | 03:16 | Now, the image that I've added here is
one that will be typical of how a group
| | 03:21 | would be working together in a
collaborative workspace and they've drawn out
| | 03:24 | their experimental design out on the
chalkboard and then simply use their
| | 03:28 | digital camera or their phone to be
able to take a picture of that drawing.
| | 03:32 | They can then simply save that file as a
JPEG and upload it into the Moodle course.
| | 03:37 | This is a great way to be able to
get work from the real world and add it
| | 03:41 | directly into your Moodle course to
be able to work with it digitally.
| | 03:45 | Now you know how to go through, and add
an image, in the next movie, we'll show
| | 03:48 | you how to create some external
links to outside web resources.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating external links| 00:00 | We're inside of our Coral
Group page for our course wiki.
| | 00:03 | Now we've just gone ahead and add an image.
| | 00:06 | Now we want to go ahead and add some
links, but before we go in and add any
| | 00:09 | links I want to point out something
that Moodle has done for us automatically.
| | 00:14 | In an earlier movie, when we created
our glossary and we added a few terms
| | 00:18 | to those and we returned on hyperlinking,
hyperlinking works within our wiki as well.
| | 00:23 | Inside of our proposed method, we can
see that the students are going to be
| | 00:27 | investigating the relationship of
Zooxanthellae density in Hermatypic Corals.
| | 00:31 | If we move our mouse over top of
Zooxanthellae, we can see that we get an
| | 00:35 | indicator that this is a link and if
click on the link, we see that Moodle has
| | 00:40 | auto-linked directly into our
glossary and is bringing up that term.
| | 00:45 | We can hit OK and Hermatypic
Corals works in the exact same way.
| | 00:50 | Once again, we're seeing the power of
being able to build our content inside of
| | 00:54 | Moodle and use some of
these auto-linking features.
| | 00:57 | Okay, let's go ahead and
create a link to an outside site.
| | 01:01 | To do this, make sure you scroll up to the
top of the page and click on the Edit tab.
| | 01:06 | Now underneath of our image, put a
couple of line returns and now we're going to
| | 01:10 | create a link out to a Google Scholar Search.
| | 01:13 | So open up a new tab in your browser
by pressing Command+T or Ctrl+T on your
| | 01:17 | keyboard, and go to scholar.google.com.
| | 01:22 | In the search field, simply type in a
search for Zooxanthellae adaptation and depth.
| | 01:28 | This way, all of these
terms will be searched for.
| | 01:31 | Go ahead and hit the Search button and
now we can see that right now, there is
| | 01:35 | about 2700 articles.
| | 01:38 | So in the dropdown menu here on the
first bar, go ahead and make sure that we're
| | 01:42 | only searching for articles
and were excluding any patents.
| | 01:45 | Then under the next dropdown menu
where it says anytime, select since 2011.
| | 01:50 | Now your number may vary from mine, but
as of the recording of this video, there
| | 01:56 | are currently only 106 papers that
have been published that have to do with
| | 02:00 | Zooxanthellae adaptation to depth in 2011.
| | 02:04 | So this looks like a pretty good
starting point to be able to add some
| | 02:06 | references into our site.
| | 02:09 | So at the top, make sure
you select the entire URL.
| | 02:13 | Then press Command+C or Ctrl+C on your
keyboard to copy that to the clipboard
| | 02:17 | and let's go back over to our Moodle tab.
| | 02:20 | Then inside of our wiki page, simply press
Command+V or Ctrl+V to paste in that URL.
| | 02:27 | If we wanted to, we could just leave
the page as is and to view that, simply
| | 02:32 | scroll down to the bottom
and hit the Preview button.
| | 02:35 | Now we can see when we scroll down
below our image, we have the text, we have
| | 02:40 | the link and if we hover our mouse
over top of it, we can see that that is an
| | 02:43 | active link and it will take us to
the page and do the search for us.
| | 02:47 | But this is a little messy.
| | 02:48 | we wouldn't want to necessarily
show all of the parameters of the URL.
| | 02:52 | So let's scroll down a little bit
further and let's add a little bit more
| | 02:55 | markup to clean this up.
| | 02:58 | To make it so that we just have a
listing that says Google scholar search for
| | 03:03 | Zooxanthellae adaptation and depth,
at the beginning of the URL, put one
| | 03:08 | left-hand bracket and at the end of
the URL, put a space and then type in the
| | 03:14 | text that you want to appear.
| | 03:15 | In this case, Google Scholar Search
for Zooxanthellae, adaptation and depth.
| | 03:24 | Put a right-hand square bracket
and then let's preview our work.
| | 03:28 | Scroll to the bottom of the page, click
the Preview button, and when we scroll
| | 03:32 | down, we see that instead of having the
long URL, we simply have a line of text
| | 03:39 | we can click on and it will
take us directly to that page.
| | 03:42 | We can hit the Back button in our
browser to make sure that we're still
| | 03:45 | inside of our text, scroll all the way to the
bottom of our page, and click the Save button.
| | 03:50 | When we scroll down now, we can see
that that link has been formalized.
| | 03:57 | When you're creating a link to an
outside resource within the wiki, all you need
| | 04:01 | to do is put a left-hand square bracket,
pasting the URL, type a space, type in
| | 04:07 | the text that you want to be
hyperlinked and then close it all off with a
| | 04:11 | right-hand square bracket.
| | 04:13 | Now you can link to any page and any
resource that's out on the web directly
| | 04:17 | inside of your wiki.
| | 04:19 | In the next movie, we'll show you how to
add a data table directly to this page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a table| 00:00 | We're inside of the Coral Group
page inside of our course Wiki.
| | 00:04 | The next thing that we want to add is
a data table down at the bottom of this
| | 00:08 | page so that the students can
enter in the data for depth, salinity,
| | 00:13 | temperature, and photosynthetic radiation that
they're going to be collecting on the field trip.
| | 00:18 | So let's go ahead and scroll up to the
top of the page and click on the Edit tab
| | 00:22 | so we can go into the Edit mode for this page.
| | 00:25 | Then scroll down and at the bottom of
our block of text Put in a couple of Line
| | 00:29 | Returns and then type-in a subheading
by typing an == Data Table==, hit Return.
| | 00:39 | Now to create a table is a little bit
tricky inside of a Wiki, but follow along
| | 00:44 | and we'll get through it, no problem.
| | 00:46 | The first thing we need to do is we
need to define the region for the table.
| | 00:50 | And you do that by opening
and closing a curly brace.
| | 00:54 | So I like to put an open curly brace on
the left-hand side, then typing a pipe
| | 00:58 | character that we mentioned earlier,
hit Return, and then type-in another pipe
| | 01:04 | character and close it
with a right-hand curly brace.
| | 01:07 | Now use the Up Arrow on your keyboard to
back up to the first line and put in a Return.
| | 01:12 | Now we have the definition as to where
our table is going to go in the page.
| | 01:17 | Now we need to define the first row.
| | 01:20 | To do this, type-in another
pipe character and then a dash.
| | 01:24 | I'd like to separate out all of
my headings on separate lines.
| | 01:28 | So I make sure that I put a space after
my dash, I hit Return, and now if I'll
| | 01:33 | type-in an exclamation point to
denote that this is my first heading.
| | 01:37 | I'll put a Space and then type-in Depth.
| | 01:40 | Hit Return, I'll put another exclamation
point, another Space, Salinity, hit Return.
| | 01:47 | exclamation point, Space, Temperature,
and of course we're going to record our
| | 01:51 | temperatures in Degrees Celsius.
| | 01:53 | So I'll put a parenthesis, a capital C,
and another parenthesis, and I hit Return.
| | 01:59 | One more exclamation point, a Space,
and then type in PAR in all uppercase.
| | 02:05 | Hit Return and that just defines our first row.
| | 02:09 | Next we need to define the second row
which is going to be the first row of data
| | 02:14 | that we're going to be, including in our table.
| | 02:15 | So we'll start off this row the same
way we started the last row with a pipe
| | 02:20 | character, again the vertical bar and a dash.
| | 02:23 | Then hit Return, another pipe character,
Space, 1m for 1 meter, and then hit Return.
| | 02:32 | We're now going to type-in a pipe
character on the next three lines and make
| | 02:36 | sure you put a space after the character.
| | 02:39 | If you don't put a space, it's not
going to create that cell for you.
| | 02:42 | What we're doing right now is we're
creating first the header row and now each
| | 02:48 | additional row of data.
| | 02:50 | So let's continue creating the second
row by typing in a pipe character, a
| | 02:54 | Space, a Return, a pipe character,
a Space, a Return, and one more pipe
| | 03:01 | character, and a Space.
| | 03:04 | Now let's go ahead and check our work.
| | 03:06 | Scroll to the bottom of the
page and click the Preview button.
| | 03:08 | When we scroll down on the page, we
now can see that we have our data table
| | 03:13 | already set up for us.
| | 03:15 | We have our first row of headings and
these headings have been added in here by
| | 03:19 | having that exclamation point
and it's formatted this first row.
| | 03:24 | We then have our second row where
the first cell has the 1m for the first
| | 03:28 | meter in depth and then additional spaces for
our students to be able to fill in the data later.
| | 03:34 | Now let's go ahead and add the
additional rows that we need to go to 2 meters, 3
| | 03:39 | meters, 4 meters, and 5 meters.
| | 03:42 | To save ourselves a little typing, we
can scroll down on the page and then
| | 03:46 | scroll down inside of our Edit window.
| | 03:49 | And now we can go ahead and simply
select the pipe with the dash that's
| | 03:54 | just above the 1m all the way down to the
last pipe that's before our closing brackets.
| | 03:59 | So altogether, you should
have five lines selected.
| | 04:02 | one, two, three, four, five.
| | 04:05 | Press Command or Ctrl+C on your
keyboard to copy those five lines.
| | 04:10 | Then at the end of the last line, hit Return,
press Command or Ctrl+V to paste in the text.
| | 04:17 | Hit Return, paste again with Command
or Ctrl+V. Hit Return, paste again, hit
| | 04:24 | Return, and press Command
or Ctrl+V one more time.
| | 04:27 | So now when we go down the list, we should
have one, two, three, four, five 1 meters.
| | 04:34 | Okay, let's go ahead and edit those now.
| | 04:37 | So the second one should be listed as 2.
| | 04:40 | The third one should be 3,
scroll down a little bit.
| | 04:44 | The fourth one should be 4,
and the fifth one should be 5.
| | 04:48 | And we'll go ahead and preview this by
clicking the Preview button, and then
| | 04:53 | we'll scroll on back down. And there we go!
| | 04:55 | We have our data table and it's all set up.
| | 04:57 | Now I want to show you something that
could be something that fools you a little bit.
| | 05:02 | So go ahead and scroll back down, I'm
going to go back into our data table.
| | 05:05 | Now at the row just below the 1 meter
mark, if we click our mouse just at the
| | 05:10 | end of that line, we can see that there is
currently a pipe character and then a Space.
| | 05:14 | What I want you to do is I want you to
Backspace and get rid of that one space
| | 05:19 | that was right there.
| | 05:20 | Let's go ahead and scroll down on our page
and preview the page to see what happens.
| | 05:24 | When we scroll down in the list, now we
can see that in the first row we're not
| | 05:29 | getting the correct number of columns.
| | 05:32 | And that's because that
space is really important.
| | 05:34 | It really separates out and tells the
Wiki that we really do mean to have a
| | 05:38 | column of data right here.
| | 05:40 | So in order to remedy that, scroll
back down in our list, go down just to
| | 05:45 | the line just below the 1 meter where
we got rid of that space, and put the
| | 05:49 | space back in place.
| | 05:51 | Now scroll all the way to the bottom
of our page and click the Save button.
| | 05:56 | And when we scroll down in our window,
we have our data table that's been
| | 05:59 | added properly for us.
| | 06:01 | Creating a data table inside of a Wiki
can be a little tricky, but it's not bad.
| | 06:06 | You just need to start off by using the
curly brackets, use a pipe character to
| | 06:11 | define each of the rows.
| | 06:13 | And if you want to define the header row,
just use the exclamation point instead
| | 06:16 | of the pipe characters to get
this nicely formatted header row.
| | 06:20 | There is a lot of other tricks
that you can use inside of a Wiki.
| | 06:23 | I'd suggest spending some time playing
around with this module to see what are
| | 06:27 | the things that you can do and how
you can implement a Wiki for your class.
| | 06:32 | Let's go ahead and return back to our
course by scrolling back up to the top of
| | 06:35 | the page and clicking on the
link for BIOL432 in the breadcrumbs.
| | 06:40 | We'll also move our Settings block
back out to the main course by clicking on
| | 06:45 | the Undock this item
link in the top of the dock.
| | 06:49 | Now everything is set back up the way
that we've been working all along and
| | 06:52 | we're ready to move on to the next chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Assessing Student with Tests and QuizzesOnline assessment overview| 00:00 | Perhaps one of the most powerful
features of Moodle is the ability to assess
| | 00:05 | learners performance, and you do
this in a variety of different ways.
| | 00:10 | Well, one of the primary ways that
you can assess learners knowledge is to
| | 00:13 | create online tests and Quizzes.
| | 00:16 | But before we create our first quiz,
there are some setup that we need to do,
| | 00:21 | and you do that setup beginning over
in the left-hand column in the Settings
| | 00:25 | block, you will find a link for
Question bank, go ahead click on that link and
| | 00:30 | underneath of the Question bank,
you'll see four different options:
| | 00:33 | Questions, Categories, Import, and Export.
| | 00:37 | The basic process that we need to
go through when setting up an online
| | 00:41 | assessment is to begin with setting up
our categories, once we have categories
| | 00:47 | that are questions are going to go
into, then we can begin creating the
| | 00:50 | questions themselves.
| | 00:52 | Once we have those questions, we can
then begin creating assessments or quizzes
| | 00:57 | that are the activities that are found
in the Add an activity dropdown menu in
| | 01:02 | your main course and
selecting Quiz from the dropdown menu.
| | 01:06 | You can also Import question pools
from other different sources, including
| | 01:11 | other learning management
systems such as Blackboard.
| | 01:15 | In the next movie we are going to
begin by setting up our Question
| | 01:18 | pool Categories.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating question pool categories| 00:01 | Now let's go ahead and create some
categories for our test poll questions to go into.
| | 00:05 | I'm in the Settings block on the left-hand
column inside the Question bank,
| | 00:10 | under the heading of Categories.
| | 00:12 | On this page the first thing we need
to do is make sure that we have our
| | 00:16 | parent category set.
| | 00:18 | The parent category denotes the location
that this new category is going to go into.
| | 00:23 | The default category that's set up
for us is called Default for our course
| | 00:28 | number, in our case it's, BIOL432.
| | 00:31 | So, we will go ahead and create our
first category within this parent category,
| | 00:35 | and we will call this one
simply Identification of Organisms.
| | 00:42 | If we wanted to add additional
descriptive information about this particular
| | 00:45 | category, we could add that here, but in
this case, we are going to go and leave
| | 00:49 | the category information blank.
| | 00:51 | Go ahead and hit the button for Add
category and now up here at the top, there
| | 00:55 | is an Identification of Organisms
subcategory that has been created within the
| | 00:59 | BIOL432 Default category.
| | 01:03 | Let's go ahead and add another subcategory.
| | 01:05 | This time we will create one called
Phylogeny, again, we will leave the Category
| | 01:11 | info blank, and we will hit the
Add category button at the bottom.
| | 01:14 | Now we can see we have two
items inside of our main category.
| | 01:18 | Let's add a third one called Ecology, and
one more time hit the Add category button.
| | 01:25 | You will note that the subcategories
are all listed out in alphabetical order,
| | 01:30 | but if we know that we are going to
use the Phylogeny category more than the
| | 01:33 | Identification of Organisms category,
we can go ahead and use the Up Arrow to
| | 01:37 | move that category up to a higher level.
| | 01:41 | If we wanted to make Identification
of Organisms to be a subcategory of
| | 01:45 | Phylogeny, we could use the
Right Arrow to tab that in.
| | 01:48 | We are going to go ahead and leave this
set the way that they are, and we have
| | 01:51 | our category set up now.
| | 01:53 | Most of the questions that we are going
to be creating are going to be Ecology
| | 01:56 | based, so they are going to be
inside of the Ecology category.
| | 02:00 | Now let's go ahead and click over in
the left-hand column under the Question
| | 02:04 | bank and click on Questions.
| | 02:07 | Here, we can see where we are going to
be creating our new questions, and the
| | 02:10 | very first item we have, is the
ability to select which category that our
| | 02:14 | questioned that we are creating is
going to be in, and those categories that we
| | 02:18 | just created are listed here for us.
| | 02:20 | In the next movie we will
begin creating our first question.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a first question| 00:00 | Now that we have our categories set up,
it's time to begin creating our first question.
| | 00:05 | We need to make sure that we are in
our question bank in our Settings section
| | 00:09 | and we select from the Category dropdown
menu, Ecology, because this is going to
| | 00:13 | be an ecology question.
| | 00:15 | Next, we want to click the button for
Create a new question here at the bottom.
| | 00:20 | A pop-up window will appear asking us to
choose which type of question that we want to add.
| | 00:25 | In this case, we are going to use a
simple example of a True/False question.
| | 00:29 | So select the radio button near the
bottom of the left-hand corner for
| | 00:32 | True/False and then click the Next button.
| | 00:36 | When our page loads, we again have the
ability to change the category that this
| | 00:40 | question is going to be associated with.
| | 00:42 | The category of Ecology is correct.
| | 00:44 | So we'll go ahead and leave that set as it is.
| | 00:47 | Just below that, we can enter in a name
for the question and this is not going
| | 00:51 | to be the text of the question.
| | 00:52 | this is just a name to help us
identify what question this is.
| | 00:56 | For this chapter, we are going to be
naming each of our question types for the
| | 01:00 | movie that we are recording them in so
that we can help keep track as to which
| | 01:04 | questions go with which movies.
| | 01:06 | In your course, you would probably want
to use a more descriptive question name
| | 01:10 | that more closely relates to the type
of information that you are going to be
| | 01:13 | asking in that question.
| | 01:15 | So in our case, we'll
simply type in A First Question.
| | 01:21 | For the Question text, this is the text
that we want to appear for our students
| | 01:25 | that we want them to answer.
| | 01:27 | So in our case, we'll
ask them a simple question.
| | 01:30 | Hermatypic Corals and
Zooxanthellae have a symbiotic relationship.
| | 01:39 | Scroll down a little bit and the next
option that we have to set is the Default mark.
| | 01:44 | The Default mark is how many points
is this question going to be worth.
| | 01:48 | We can set any point value that we want in here.
| | 01:50 | in our case, to keep things simple, we
are going to make every single one of our
| | 01:53 | questions worth only one point.
| | 01:56 | The next section is for General feedback.
| | 01:58 | Now the general feedback is provided
to all students regardless of if they
| | 02:02 | answer the question correctly or incorrectly.
| | 02:04 | This can be the type of feedback that
you would want to give to your students to
| | 02:07 | let them know the type of question or
some general information that they should
| | 02:11 | be knowing about this question or so forth.
| | 02:14 | We'll simply type in, Symbiosis is
key concept in coral reef ecology.
| | 02:24 | Let's go ahead and scroll down a little
bit further and now we can select what
| | 02:28 | the correct answer should be.
| | 02:30 | The correct answer for this
question happens to be true.
| | 02:33 | So we'll select True from the dropdown menu.
| | 02:36 | Now in the feedback responses, for
a true answer, we want to give the
| | 02:40 | students some feedback.
| | 02:41 | If the student answers true, and that's
correct, we can simply tell them, Good job!
| | 02:47 | The next section would be displayed if
a student answers the question false.
| | 02:52 | That's not right so we'll say Try again.
| | 02:55 | We'll scroll down a little bit
further and we'll see that we can add some
| | 02:59 | additional tags down here to this question.
| | 03:02 | Since this question is related to Symbiosis,
we'll go ahead and add a Symbiosis tag.
| | 03:08 | At the bottom, we'll simply
click the Save changes button.
| | 03:11 | When the page refreshes, we can see a
listing of all of the questions that we've entered.
| | 03:16 | Currently, we've only entered one
question, so there's only one being displayed
| | 03:20 | and it's being displayed for the ecology block.
| | 03:23 | If we want to preview how this
question looks, we can click on the magnifying
| | 03:27 | glass on the right-hand side
of the line for that question.
| | 03:31 | A pop-up window will appear where we can
test out how this question is going to work.
| | 03:36 | So the question is displayed,
we have our selection here.
| | 03:40 | Let's go ahead and answer true first
by clicking on the True radio button and
| | 03:44 | then click the button for Submit and Finish.
| | 03:46 | We are instantly given our feedback.
| | 03:49 | We're told that we've got the right
answer, we've given the specific feedback
| | 03:52 | of good job, we're given the general
feedback of Symbiosis as a key concept in
| | 03:57 | coral reef ecology and we are also given
the feedback that the correct answer is true.
| | 04:02 | All right!
| | 04:03 | What would happen if we answer it false?
| | 04:05 | Hit the Start again button and click the
False answer and then Submit and Finish.
| | 04:11 | Now we are shown that this is an
incorrect answer, we are given the specific
| | 04:15 | feedback, the general feedback and we
are given the feedback to let us know what
| | 04:20 | the correct answer is.
| | 04:22 | Go ahead and hit the Start over
button and then let's scroll down in the
| | 04:26 | Change Options so we can control some
of the specific options as to how we
| | 04:30 | want this question to react.
| | 04:32 | The first option of how questions behave
gives us the ability to set how we want
| | 04:38 | the feedback to be provided to our students.
| | 04:41 | Do we want deferred feedback meaning
that Moodle will wait until the very end of
| | 04:45 | our exam before it provides
any feedback to our users?
| | 04:49 | Do we want an interactive feedback
with multiple tries where it will
| | 04:52 | continuously give the students feedback?
| | 04:54 | This is a great tool for creating test
or quizzes that are meant to be study
| | 04:59 | questions for the students to go in
and do multiple attempts to learn more
| | 05:03 | information about a particular area.
| | 05:06 | I want to go ahead and set
this to deferred feedback.
| | 05:08 | So all my feedback is
provided to my students at the end.
| | 05:12 | The next option is Marked out of and
this will let us know how many points that
| | 05:15 | this question is totally worth.
| | 05:17 | The next option allows us to say whether
or not we want the students to be shown
| | 05:21 | when they have a correct or an incorrect answer.
| | 05:24 | If we choose Not shown here, then
under Marks, whether or not we want to show
| | 05:30 | how the student is doing that's these
areas up here, marked out of 1 point,
| | 05:35 | Question 1, Not yet answered, we would
start having items filled in here to let
| | 05:39 | us know how we are doing overall.
| | 05:40 | So we'll go ahead and say Not shown.
| | 05:43 | We can choose how many decimal
places we want for our grade.
| | 05:46 | Here they are being displayed as
being two decimal places that's fine.
| | 05:50 | We can choose whether or not we want to
provide the students with the specific feedback.
| | 05:54 | We can say Not shown for that and we can
say Not shown for the right answer, but
| | 05:59 | may be we do want to show
them the General feedback.
| | 06:02 | And we can also choose whether or not we
want to show them their Response history.
| | 06:05 | So if they are taking a practice exam
and they go through the questions multiple
| | 06:09 | times, we can show them how
they've changed their answers over time.
| | 06:13 | So with these settings here, we'll
click the button at the bottom that says
| | 06:16 | Start over with these options, and now
when we click the True answer and hit the
| | 06:20 | Submit and Finish, the only feedback
that we're given is the general feedback of
| | 06:26 | Symbiosis as a key
concept in coral reef ecology.
| | 06:28 | We are not given any specific
feedback as to whether we've got in the
| | 06:32 | question right or wrong.
| | 06:33 | That feedback would be held back
until the very end of the exam.
| | 06:37 | I am going to go ahead and scroll
back down here and turn on all of these
| | 06:42 | different options that we just turned
off and then go ahead and hit the button
| | 06:47 | for Start again with these options.
| | 06:49 | Everything should be turned back
on and we can close the preview.
| | 06:52 | That should give you a pretty good
overview of the general process that's
| | 06:56 | required to create a question bank question.
| | 07:00 | Over the next several movies, we'll
step through many of the other types of
| | 07:04 | questions, so you can get a feel for
what types of things are possible within
| | 07:08 | a Moodle question.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating true/false questions| 00:00 | The next question that we're going to
add into our question bank is another
| | 00:03 | true false question.
| | 00:05 | Only this time we're going to take
advantage of the fact that all of our
| | 00:08 | questions can contain HTML and thus any
type of media that we want, let's began
| | 00:15 | by making sure that our category is
still set to Ecology, and then we'll click
| | 00:19 | the button for create a new question.
| | 00:20 | We'll select another true false
question and then hit the Next button.
| | 00:26 | The category of Ecology is already set,
so our question name in this case is
| | 00:30 | going to be True/False.
| | 00:32 | So that we know which movie that
this question is associated with.
| | 00:35 | For the Question text, let's go ahead
and type in The animal depicted here is an
| | 00:44 | Aplisina fistularis.
| | 00:47 | Now since Aplisina fistularis is a
proper scientific name, we should go ahead
| | 00:52 | and select that text and then
format it by italicizing it.
| | 00:57 | We'll click our mouse at the end of the
line and hit Enter/Return in order to go
| | 01:01 | down to the next line.
| | 01:02 | Now let's go ahead and add in the
picture of an Aplisina fistularis.
| | 01:07 | So in our HTML toolbar, hit the tool
for insert an image think like the button
| | 01:12 | for find or upload an image than go
to the Private files section go into a
| | 01:18 | BIOL432 folder, go into the Images
folder and then if you're following along in
| | 01:24 | an earlier movie we created and
uploaded a whole folder of images from DropBox.
| | 01:29 | You can also find these in the Chapter
12 exercise files and you can upload them
| | 01:33 | one by one if you need to.
| | 01:35 | Go into the DropBox folder and the
third item over here if we hover our mouse
| | 01:39 | over top of it we can see the full name
Aplisina_fistularis_colony.jpg, go ahead
| | 01:47 | and select on that file and then
click the button for Select this file.
| | 01:50 | For an image description we don't want
to put anything too descriptive, because
| | 01:55 | you remember this is inside of a quiz,
so we wouldn't want to call out that
| | 01:58 | this is an Aplisina.
| | 01:59 | We'll just simply say that there's an
image here, than hit the Insert button and
| | 02:05 | now our question is set up.
| | 02:06 | Let's go ahead and scroll down, we
still want this question to be worth one
| | 02:10 | point, we're going to go ahead and
skip the general feedback this time.
| | 02:14 | For the correct answer this is a true
statement, so will select True and we'll
| | 02:18 | skip providing any other feedback for
now, go ahead and scroll all the way to
| | 02:22 | the bottom and click the Save changes button.
| | 02:25 | Now we have two questions here in our
question pool, our First Question and
| | 02:29 | our True False question, let's go
ahead and look and see what the True False
| | 02:32 | question would look like by hitting the
Preview icon of a little magnifying glass.
| | 02:37 | When the page pops open we can see here
is our text, our True False statement we
| | 02:42 | have a nice big image for students to
look at and then a place for them to
| | 02:45 | select the correct answer, let's go
ahead and select True Submit and finish and
| | 02:50 | we're given the feedback
that that is the correct answer.
| | 02:53 | Excellent that exactly what we want it,
go ahead and scroll down our page, click
| | 02:57 | the Close Preview button and now we're
ready to move on to the next question.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating multiple choice questions| 00:00 | The next type of question that we
are going to add is going to be for our
| | 00:03 | Ecology category, and we are going
to ad a multiple-choice question.
| | 00:07 | So go ahead and click on the
button for Create a new question.
| | 00:10 | In the pop-up window, select Multiple
choice from the list of options, and then
| | 00:15 | click the Next button.
| | 00:17 | When the page finally loads, go ahead
and click in the Question name type and
| | 00:21 | let's type in Multiple Choice.
| | 00:23 | For the question, go ahead and ask the
students to, Please select the correct
| | 00:30 | scientific name for this organism.
| | 00:34 | Hit Return, and now we will go ahead
and add an image, and then again, in your
| | 00:39 | File picker under Private files, go into
your BIOL432 folder and into the images
| | 00:44 | folder, and if you're following
along in an earlier movie, we've already
| | 00:48 | uploaded a folder called DropBoxImages.
| | 00:50 | I have included this in the Chapter12
exercise files, if you don't have it already.
| | 00:55 | Go ahead into DropBoxImages, and then
we are looking for the file in the third
| | 00:59 | row down called Diploria_labyrinthiformis.
| | 01:02 | If we select that item, we
can see it listed in here.
| | 01:06 | We probably don't want to name the file
inside of our quiz to be the exact name
| | 01:11 | of the organism that we are looking for.
| | 01:12 | So let's go ahead and rename this file
to Multiple Choice MC, I for image 1.
| | 01:22 | Then go ahead and click the
button for Select this file.
| | 01:25 | Now the image is
displayed here inside of our page.
| | 01:28 | We can change the image description to simply
say Image, and then click the Insert button.
| | 01:34 | The organism's image has
now been added into this page.
| | 01:38 | Let's go ahead and scroll down and
set up some of the other parameters.
| | 01:42 | For Default mark, this question is
also going to be worth only 1 point.
| | 01:46 | If you want to add some general feedback as we
saw in an earlier movie, you can do that here.
| | 01:50 | Go ahead and scroll down a little
further and now we can select how we want
| | 01:54 | the answers to work.
| | 01:56 | The default is to have One answer only.
| | 01:59 | This means only one of the
following answers is going to be correct.
| | 02:03 | If we select the other option,
Multiple answers allowed, then we can assign
| | 02:06 | point values to multiple different
answers, but in this case, only one of these
| | 02:11 | answers that we are going to create
is going to be the correct answer.
| | 02:13 | So we will leave it set to One answer only.
| | 02:16 | The next check box is for Shuffle the choices.
| | 02:19 | I always like to leave this set.
| | 02:21 | This way, every time a student sits
down and they click on this question
| | 02:25 | within a quiz, Moodle is going to
automatically shuffle the order of all of the answers.
| | 02:31 | That way if two students happen to be
sitting at computers next to each other,
| | 02:34 | and they both click onto the same
question at the same time, the chances are
| | 02:38 | pretty good that a correct answer of A
on the first student's computer would
| | 02:43 | likely be a correct answer of B or
C on the next student's computer.
| | 02:48 | The next option is Number of choices, and
this is how our answers will be numbered.
|
|
|
